SIRIUS. Answers for industry.

Transcription

1 s SIRIUS Datasheet 01 nswers for industry.

2 Introduction Contactors and Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS RW Soft Starter Protection Equipment Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the Control Cabinet Monitoring and Control Devices

3 Introduction 1 1/ nswers for Industry. 1/4 1/6

4 1 1/

5 nswers for industry. 1 Siemens offers automation, drive, and low-voltage switching technology as well as industrial software from standard products up to entire industry solutions. The industry software enables our industry customers to optimize the entire value chain from product design and development through manufacture and sales up to after-sales service. Our electrical and mechanical components offer integrated technologies for the entire drive train from couplings to gear units, from motors to control and drive solutions for all engineering industries. Our technology platform TIP offers robust solutions for power distribution. The high quality of our products sets industry-wide benchmarks. High environmental aims are part of our eco-management, and we implement these aims consistently. Right from product design, possible effects on the environment are examined. Hence many of our products and systems are RoHS compliant (Restriction of Hazardous Substances). s a matter of course, our production sites are 14001, but to us, environmental utilization of valuable resources. The drives with energy savings up to 60 %. Check out the opportunities our automation and drive solutions provide. nd discover how you can sustainably enhance your competitive edge with us. 1/

6 1 Siemens has been supplying products and solutions for environmental protection and climate control since its earliest beginnings. To name but one example, it was back in 187 that Werner von Siemens developed a technology for avoiding ash emissions from chimneys. Today, we have the Siemens environmental portfolio in which we bundle those technologies which have been shown to help our customers with pollution control. These include the following: than comparable solutions, such as gas and steam turbines for solar power, low-energy light bulbs, and intelligent building services engineering Systems which use renewable sources of energy and their components, such as wind power plants and steam turbines for solar power provision of clean water and purer air The Siemens environmental portfolio covers the entire and energy distribution right through to usage and green technologies. power loss and thus provide both passive and active support The components of SIRIUS Innovations perform at extremely low levels of inherent loss. The new generation heralded a that not only is it possible to save on energy costs but also to reduce the amount of waste heat in the control cabinet. This then translates to a higher packing density in the control 1/4

7 1 electronic coil control. This reduces the power loss by up to 9 %. Our soft starters use intelligent, integrated current bypass circuits. The power loss is thereby reduced by 9 % during operation. of a bimetal trip unit and boast not only a wider setting range but also a reduction of up to 98 % in no-load loss. In comparison with conventional feeders, the power loss in the compact feeder has been reduced by up to 80 %. This is one unit. improvement to the competitive ability of a company in all sectors of industry. in the system, generating visual displays and analyzing the evaluation of the potential savings and also form the basis for The communication-capable SIRIUS switching and protection devices can deliver energy values continually, without any additional installation expense and input, e. g. to a higherlevel energy management system, and thus offer the required transparency in energy consumption. added value in industrial control engineering. s a continuous process, a sophisticated concept will deliver a consistent reduction in energy consumption. Our energy management strategy is based on three phases: Identify, 1/5

8 1 The SIRIUS range has everything you need for switching, protecting and starting loads. Products for monitoring, control, detection, commanding, signaling and power supply round off the spectrum of industrial controls. space-saving. But how can all these requirements be met simultaneously? The answer lies in the unique SIRIUS modular that you need for switching, protecting and starting motors and industrial systems. Furthermore, all components of the SIRIUS modular system installing, wiring and maintenance are extremely easy and time-saving to perform. Regardless of whether you want to build up your own load feeders with motor starter protectors/circuit breakers or overload relays, contactors or soft starters, or decide instead in favor of preassembled feeders: SIRIUS has the right product for every application. Continuous further development and regular innovations ensure that our customers are optimally equipped with SIRIUS SIRIUS has long been synonymous world-wide with industrial beginning. The SIRIUS modular system with its components for the switching, starting, protection and monitoring of space-saving construction of control cabinets. With its latest innovations for the main and control circuit, the new SIRIUS modular system has underlined its leading position once again. The consistent further development of SIRIUS takes even better account of current market requirements, particularly and time. The advantages for you are: higher productivity and In the portfolio of the SIRIUS modular system you can trust components which now are even easier to install: plug in place, connect, click and that s it! Complicated wiring is a thing of the past, as are wiring errors. For you this means a The SIRIUS modular system in sizes S00 and S0 up to 40 control circuit. s the result, the innovative basic components such as motor starter protectors and contactors provide a host of advantages to optimize your plant, today and in the future. Often the innovation is to be found in the details. For example, more power in the same design and the bundling of functions in basic devices for notable space savings. t the same time the innovations enable the greatest starting for customer assembly, as a tested combination or an all-in-one solution complete with the compact starter, for soft starting or for frequent switching: the SIRIUS modular system offers the perfect answer. 1/6

9 1 nother aspect at the focus of the new developments was the enhancement of plant availability. In future, SIRIUS components from the modular system can also be used at minimum expense to monitor the application. Selective plant monitoring then becomes utterly simple with current monitoring relays integrated directly in the load feeder or to S-Interface or IO-Link. These innovations are the perfect low-end supplement to today s S-S1 modular system up to 50 kw / 400 V and offer many new options for the construction of control cabinets. The highlights of the new SIRIUS modular system are particularly numerous with regard to assembly and handling, application monitoring, connection to the controller, and customer support throughout the plant s lifecycle. ll these innovations add up to the many different Safety Integrated by Siemens is the consistent implementation of safety technology in accordance with the of safety-related functions in our standard products and the consistent integration of safety concepts in the standard automation environment offer many advantages for machine manufacturers and system operators. Our SIRIUS Safety Integrated controls are a central element of the Siemens Safety Integrated concept. Whether for failsafe sensing, instructing and reporting, monitoring and evaluating Integrated controls are expert at performing safety tasks in your plant. SIRIUS Safety Integrated uses failsafe communication using PROFIsafe via PROFIBUS, to solve even networked safety tasks solutions for compact machines or large-scale plants and for The free, TÜV-approved online tool is a rapid and reliable aid for the evaluation of machine safety functions. The result is a report conforming to the relevant machine documentation standards. Combined with Totally Integrated utomation and Safety Integrated, our product portfolio can be bundled to create optimized systems. ll in all, Siemens provides innovative controls with modern features, such as integrated communication and safety technology that work to your advantage: the basis for ground-breaking integrated solutions. 1/7

10 1 Notes 1/8

11 Controls Contactors and Contactor ssemblies / Introduction Power Contactors for Switching Motors /5 General data /11 SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw new /0 SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw /50 SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw /55 TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies /61 SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies new /69 SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies /75 SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting new /84 SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Contactors for Special pplications /91 SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, /98 SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, new /10 SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, /105 TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, /108 SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw /11 SIRIUS RT15 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, 18.5 kw /114 SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar Contactors for Switching DC voltage /117 TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Contactor Relays /11 SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole new /10 SIRIUS RH4 latched contactor relays, 4-pole new /11 SIRIUS RH1 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole new Coupling Contactors /1 SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw new Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors new /17 Introduction /18 SIRIUS function modules /14 SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link /147 SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays new /151 ccessories for RT, RH contactors and contactor relays /168 Spare parts for RT contactors For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays /169 ccessories for RT1, RH1 contactors and contactor relays /186 Spare parts for RT1 contactors For T Contactors and Contactor Relays /188 ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors /191 Spare parts for TC, TF, TK contactors

12 Controls Contactors and Contactor ssemblies Introduction Introduction Overview Size Type RT0 contactors Type C, DC operation Type S00 RT0 1 RT0 15 S0 RT0 RT0 16 RT0 17 RT0 18 RT0 RT0 4 RT0 5 RT0 6 RT0 7 RT0 8 C- I e /C-/415 V / V kw V 500 V 690 V 1000 V C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) kw kw kw kw V kw V kw ( operating cycles) C-1 I e RT ccessories for contactors uxiliary switch blocks On front Lateral RH9 11 RH9 11 (P. /157) (P. /161) RH9 11 RH9 1 (P. /157) (P. /161) Timing relay blocks R8 1. (P. /140) R8 1. (P. /140) Function modules R (P. /68, /8) R (P. /68, /8) Surge suppressors RT9 16 (P. /164) RT9 6 (P. /164) RU and RB overload relays (Protection Equipment > Overload Relays) RU1, thermal, CLSS 10 RU (Chap. 4) RU (Chap. 4) RB0/1, solid-state, CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 RB0 16 RB (Chap. 4) RB0 6 RB (Chap. 4) RV0 motor protection circuit breakers (Protection Equipment > Motor Protection Circuit Breakers) Type Link modules RV0 11 R (p. /64) (Chap. 4) (Chap. 4) RV0 1 R (Chap. 4) (Chap. 4) R reversing contactor assemblies Complete units Type R 15 R 16 R 17 R 18 R 4 R 5 R 6 R 7 R V kw ssembly kits/wiring modules R9 1-. (p. /67) R9 -. (p. /67) Function modules R B00 (p. /68) R B0 (p. /68) R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Complete units Type R4 15 R4 16 R4 17 (p. /79) R4 R4 5 R4 6 (p. /81) 415 V kw /18.5 ssembly kits/wiring modules R9 1-BB. (p. /8) R9 -BB. (p. /8) Function modules R C00 (p. /8) R C00 (p. /8) /

13 Controls Contactors and Contactor ssemblies Introduction Introduction Size Type RT10 contactors S RT10 S RT1. 4 S6 RT1. 5 Type RT10 4 RT10 5 RT10 6 RT10 44 RT10 45 RT10 46 RT10 54 RT10 55 RT10 56 C, DC operation (p. /45, /46) (p. /45, /46) (p. /47) Type C- I e /C-/415 V V kw V 500 V 690 V 1000 V C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) 415 V 415 V ( operating cycles) C-1 RT10/1 RT10/1 RT10/1 kw kw kw kw kw kw I e RT10/ RT14 C-1 contactors Type RT14 46 (p. /96) RT14 56 (p. /97) I e /C-1/40 C/ 690 V ccessories for contactors uxiliary switch blocks On front Lateral RH19 1 RH19 1 (p. /176) (p. /177) Terminal covers RT19 6-4E (p. /181) RT E1/ (p. /181) RT E1// (p. /181) Box terminal blocks RT19 55/56-4G (p. /181) Surge suppressors RT19 6/6 (p. /179) RT C (RC element) (p. /179) RU1 and RB overload relays (Protection Equipment > Overload Relays) RU11, thermal, CLSS 10 RU (Chap. 4) RU (Chap. 4) RB0/1, solid-state, CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 RB/, solid-state, CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 RB0 6 RB (Chap. 4) RB0 46 RB (Chap. 4) RB0 56 RB (Chap. 4) RB. 8 + RB9 06 (Chap. 4) RB. 8 + RB9 56 (Chap. 4) RV10 motor protection circuit breakers (Protection Equipment > Motor Protection Circuit Breakers) Type RV (Chap. 4) RV (Chap. 4) Link modules R19 1 (Chap. 4) R19 41 (Chap. 4) R1 reversing contactor assemblies Complete units Type R1 4 (p. /170) R1 5 R1 6 R1 44 (p. /71) R1 45 R V kw ssembly kits/wiring modules R19 - (p. /7) R19 4- (p. /7) R19 5- (p. /7) Mechanical interlocks R19 4-1/-B (p. /7) R (p. /7) R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Complete units Type R14 4 (p. /87) R14 5 (p. /88) R14 6 R14 44 (p. /89) R V kw / ssembly kits/wiring modules R19 -B/-C (p. /90) R19 4-B/-C (p. /90) R19 5-B (p. /90) /

14 Controls Contactors and Contactor ssemblies Introduction Introduction Size Type S10 RT1. 6 RT10 contactors RT1 and TF68/69 vacuum contactors Type C, DC operation RT10 64 (p. /47) Type RT1 64 (p. /54) C- S1 RT1. 7 RT10 65 RT10 66 RT10 75 (p. /47) RT1 65 RT1 66 RT1 75 (p. /54) RT10 76 RT TF6 TF68 (p. /60) I e /C-/415 V V kw V 500 V 690 V 1000 V C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) 415 V 415 V ( operating cycles) C-1 RT10/1 RT10/1 RT10/1 kw kw kw kw kw kw / / / / / / / / /500 50/ /161 I e RT10/1 75/ / TF RT14 C-1 contactors Type RT14 66 (p. /97) RT14 76 (p. /97) I e /C-1/40 C/ 690 V ccessories for contactors uxiliary switch blocks On front Lateral RH19 1 RH19 1 (p. /176) (p. /177) TY7 561 (p. /189) Terminal covers RT E1// (p. /181) TX7 686/696 (p. /189) Box terminal blocks RT G (p. /181) Surge suppressors RT C (RC element) (p. /179) TX7 57 (p. /188) RU1 and RB overload relays (Protection Equipment > Overload Relays) RU11, thermal, CLSS 10 RB0/1, solid-state, CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 RB/, solid-state, CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 RB0 66 RB (Chap. 4) RB0 66 RB (Chap. 4) RB. 8 + RB9 66 (Chap. 4) RV10 motor protection circuit breakers (Protection Equipment > Motor Protection Circuit Breakers) Type Link modules RB0 66 RB (Chap. 4) R1 reversing contactor assemblies Complete units Type 415 V kw ssembly kits/wiring modules R19 6- (p. /7) R19 7- (p. /7) TX Mechanical interlocks R TX R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Complete units Type 415 V kw 60 ssembly kits/wiring modules R19 6-B (p. /90) R19 7-B (p. /90) TX B /4

15 Power Contactors for Switching Motors General data General data Overview The SIRIUS modular system with its components for the switching, starting, protection and monitoring of motors and construction of control cabinets. RT contactors and coupling relays Size S00 with mountable accessories For accessories see pages /151 to /168. For contactor assemblies see pages /61 to /64. For assembly kit for reversing contactor assemblies (mech. interlocking, wiring modules) see page /67. For mountable overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /5

16 Power Contactors for Switching Motors General data General data RT contactors and coupling relays Size S0 with mountable accessories For accessories see pages /151 to /168. /6

17 Power Contactors for Switching Motors General data General data RT1 contactors Sizes S and S with mountable accessories /7

18 Power Contactors for Switching Motors General data General data RT1 contactors Sizes S6 to S1 with mountable accessories (illustration for basic unit) For mountable overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /8

19 Power Contactors for Switching Motors General data General data R1 contactor assemblies, RT1 contactors Sizes S6, S10 and S1 with accessories For mountable overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /9

20 Power Contactors for Switching Motors General data General data RT1 contactors Sizes S6 to S1 with accessories For mountable overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /10

21 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Overview Sizes S00 and S0, up to 18.5 kw Contactor size S00 with spring-type terminals and contactor size S0 with screw terminals Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The RT contactors are climate-proof and are suitable and tested for use worldwide. If the devices are used in ambient conditions which deviate from common industrial conditions (EN Stationary Use, Weather-Protected ), information must be obtained about possible restrictions with regard to the reliability and endurance of the device and possible protective measures. In this case contact our Technical ssistance. uxiliary contact complement Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic unit. The basic units size S0 contain two integrated auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC). ll basic units (except coupling contactors) can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks. For size S0 and higher, complete units with NO + NC are available (terminal designation according to EN 5001); the auxiliary switch block can be removed. dditional auxiliary switches with a maximum of four auxiliary contacts can be mounted. The combination of a -pole auxiliary switch for mounting on the front and an auxiliary switch for mounting on the side is not permitted. Of the maximum number of auxiliary contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible on the device, no more than four NC contacts are permitted for both sizes. Contact reliability the auxiliary contacts of the RT contactor or RH1 contactor relay should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact reliability. These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits with Connection methods The RT contactors are available with screw terminals or springtype terminals. Short-circuit protection of the contactors For more information about short-circuit protection of contactors /16 and /. For short-circuit protection of the contactors with overload relay see Overload Relays. To assemble fuseless motor feeders you must select combinations of motor starter protector and contactor. Motor protection RU1 thermal overload relays or RB0 solid-state overload overload. The overload relays must be ordered separately (see Overload Relays ). Ratings of induction motors The quoted rating (in kw) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (according to the nameplate). Control supply voltage ll contactors are available with C or DC operation. vailable in addition on the contactors size S0 is a UC operating mechanism which can be operated with C (45 to 70 Hz) as well as with DC. Surge suppression suppressor diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00 contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary switch block. The surge suppressors can be plugged onto the front of size S0 contactors. Note: The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor and suppressor diode + to 5 ms). S00 and S0 contactors with communication interface The S00 and S0 contactors with communication interface are essential for mounting the SIRIUS function modules for connection to the control system through IO-Link or S-Interface. /11

22 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th SIRIUS power contactors R T Innovations Device type (e. g. 0 = -pole motor contactor, = 4-pole C-1 contactor) Contactor size (1 = S00, = S0) Power dependent on size (e. g. 7 = 15 kw) Connection type (1 = screw, = spring) Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. = C standard / without) Rated control supply voltage (e. g. P0 = 0 V, 50 Hz) uxiliary switches (e. g. S0: 0 = 1 NO + 1 NC integrated) Special version Example R T P 0 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. ccessories uxiliary switch blocks Various auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the RT basic units depending on the application: Size S00, RT0 1. contactors Terminal designations according to EN 5001 or EN Size S00 contactors have an auxiliary contact (NO or NC) integrated in the basic unit. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. Contactors with one NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw expanded into contactors with,, 4 and 5 auxiliary contacts according to EN 5001 using auxiliary switch blocks. The EN 5001, e. g. 11, apply to the basic device plus mounted auxiliary switch. ll contactors of size S00 with one auxiliary contact contacts can be expanded into contactors with to 5 auxiliary numbers 40 to 04 (in the case of contactors with 4 main contacts: 1 to 4 auxiliary contacts) according to EN Of the auxiliary contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible on the device, no more than four NC contacts are permitted. Single- or -pole auxiliary switch blocks with connection options from above or below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring especially for the installation of network access junctions. These auxiliary switch blocks are offered only with screw terminals. If the installation space is limited in depth, -pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw or spring-type terminals) can be attached laterally for use on the right or on the left. The solid-state compatible RH NF.. auxiliary switch blocks for contactors of size S00 include enclosed contacts. They are suitable in particular for switching small voltages and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and for operation in dusty atmospheres. The NC auxiliary contacts are not mirror contacts. ll the previously mentioned auxiliary switch variants can be block has a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly. Contactor, size S00, with 4-pole auxiliary switch block /1

23 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Size S0, RT0. contactors Terminal designations according to EN or EN Size S0 contactors have auxiliary contacts (1 NO and 1 NC) integrated in the basic unit. Contactor, size S0, with 4-pole auxiliary switch block diverse range of auxiliary switch blocks is available for various applications. One 4-pole auxiliary switch block (screw or spring-type terminals) can be snapped onto the front of the contactors. When the then the NO contacts are closed. SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw lso available are 1- or -pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw terminals) for cable entry from above or below in the design of a quad block (feeder auxiliary switch). If the installation space is limited in depth, -pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw or spring-type terminals) can be attached laterally for use on the right or on the left. The auxiliary switch blocks attached to the front can be disassembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever; the laterally attached auxiliary switch blocks are easy to remove by pressing on the checkered surfaces. The terminal designation of the individual auxiliary switch blocks corresponds to EN or EN 5001, that of the complete contactor with auxiliary switch block NO + NC corresponds to EN The laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks are snapped onto the front. s auxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC are already integrated in the basic device, mounting according to EN 5001 is permitted only on the right of the device. The front 1- or -pole auxiliary switch blocks with connection auxiliary switch blocks are available only with screw terminals. If the 4-pole and solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks noted. Two enclosed contacts are available with the RH9 11-.NF11 solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, which can be attached to the front. The RH9 1-DE11 laterally mountable, solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block likewise contains enclosed contacts (1 NO + 1 NC). The enclosed contacts are suitable in particular for switching small voltages and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and for operation in dusty atmospheres. The front NC auxiliary contacts are not mirror contacts. maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary switch blocks used can be of any version. Of the auxiliary contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible on the device, no more than four NC contacts are permitted. For 4-pole contactors see RT and RT5. /1

24 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT S00 and S0 Rated data of the auxiliary contacts cc. to IEC /EN The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary switch blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S0 1) Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Conventional thermal current I th = 10 Rated operational current I e /C-1 C load Rated operational current I e /C-15/C-14 U e 4 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 0 V 10 1) 10 1) 10 1) 10 1) 10 1) DC load Rated operational current I e /DC-1 U e Rated operational current I e /DC-1 U e 80 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 690 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 m cc. to EN Endurance of the auxiliary contacts It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. The characteristic curves apply to: 1) Frequency of contact faults < 10-8 i. e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles Diagram legend: I a = Breaking current I e = Rated operational current 1) Integrated auxiliary contacts in size S0 and auxiliary switches for snapping onto the front and for mounting onto the side in size S00 and S0: I e = 6 for C-15/C-14. /14

25 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT S00 and S0 Endurance of the main contacts The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when switching resistive and inductive C loads (C-1/C-) depending on the breaking current and rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. The rated operational current I e complies with utilization category C-4 (breaking six times the rated operational current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least operating cycles. current I e /C-4 can be increased. If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i. e. normal switching (breaking the rated operational current according to utilization category C-) in combination with intermittent inching (breaking several times the rated operational current according to utilization category C-4), the contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the following equation:characters in the equation: Size S00 X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles Contact endurance for normal operation (I a = I e ) in operating cycles B Contact endurance for inching (I a = multiple of I e ) in operating cycles C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations Size S0 Diagram legend: P N = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 415 V I a = Breaking current I e = Rated operational current /15

26 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Type Size RT0 1 5, RT0 16 S00 Dimensions (W x H x D) 1) mm 45 x 57.5 x 7 / 45 x 70 x 7 mm 45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 11 mm 45 x 57.5 x 14 / 45 x 70 x 14 RT0 1 7, RT0 18 S00 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 0 million Operating 10 million cycles Operat. 5 million cycles Electrical endurance ) Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts acc. to V 415 EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, this applies to both the basic unit as well as to between the basic unit and the mounted auxiliary switch block acc. to EN , ppendix F Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F no mirror contacts. mbient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 IP0, coil assembly IP40 Finger-safe Shock resistance rectangular pulse g/ms 6.7/5 and 4./10 7./5 and 4.7/10 g/ms 6.7/5 and 4./10 7./5 and 4.7/10 Shock resistance sine pulse g/ms 10.5/5 and 6.6/ /5 and 7./10 g/ms 10.5/5 and 6.6/ /5 and 7./10 Conductor cross-sections ) Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays Main circuit acc. to IEC / EN Type of coordination 1 - Type of coordination - Weld-free 4) Short-circuit current 1 k, type of coordination 1 uxiliary circuit protection for I k Short-circuit current I k < ) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals. ) For endurance of the main contacts see page /15. ) For conductor cross-sections see page /18. 4) Test conditions according to IEC /16

27 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Control circuit Coil operating range Type Size 50 Hz 60 Hz Up to 50 C Up to 60 C RT0 1 5, RT0 1 6 S x U s x U s x U s x U s RT0 1 7, RT0 1 8 S00 Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V 7/4. 0.8/ /. 0.5/0.5 7/ 0.8/ / /0.5 W 4 4 Operating times 1) Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time U s U s Closing delay Opening delay Closing delay Opening delay ms ms ms ms ms Operating times for 1.0 x U s 1) Closing delay Opening delay ms ms Closing delay Opening delay ms ms ) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor + to 5 ms). Contactor Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1 Switching resistive loads I e Type Size t 40 C up to 690 V t 60 C up to 690 V RT0 15 S RT0 16 S00 0 RT0 17 S00 1) P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C) 415 V kw I e t 40 C t 60 C Utilization categories C- and C- I e 50 and 60 Hz Up to 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V t 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V mm.5 mm.5 Thermal load capacity 10 s current ) ) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account). ) ccording to IEC For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. kw kw kw kw RT0 18 S /17

28 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT0 15 S00 RT0 16 S00 RT0 17 S00 Main circuit C capacity Power loss per conducting path t Ie/C- W Utilization category C-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) 1) Ie Up to 415 V with 50 Hz and 60 Hz Up to 415 V kw cycles: - Rated operational currents Ie Up to 415 V 690 V - Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour Dependence of the switching frequency z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z (Ie/I ) (400 V/U )1.5 1/h t 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V No-load switching frequency C No-load switching frequency DC Rated operation C-1 (C/DC) C- (C/DC) C- (C/DC) C-4 (C/DC) h kw kw kw kw h-1 h-1 h-1 h-1 h-1 h RT0 18 S ) The data only apply to RT5 16 and RT5 17 ( NO + NC) up to a rated operational voltage of 415 V. Contactor Type Size RT0 15 S00 RT0 16 S00 RT0 17 S00 Conductor cross-sections Main conductors and auxiliary conductors Screw terminals (1 or conductors can be connected) mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) according to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) ; x 1 M (for standard screwdriver size and Pozidriv ) Nm ( lb.in) Main conductors, auxiliary conductors and coil terminals Spring-type terminals (1 or conductors can be connected) mm.0 x 0.5;.5 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG 1 x (0... 1) uxiliary conductors for front and laterally mounted auxiliary switches (1 or conductors can be connected) mm.0 x 0.5;.5 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) RT0 18 S00 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping /18

29 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Type Size RT0 S0 RT0 4 S0 RT0 5 S0 RT0 6 S0 RT0 7 S0 RT0 8 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) for C operation 1) mm 45 x 85 x 97 / 45 x x 97 mm 45 x 85 x 141 / 45 x x x 85 x 166 / 45 x x 166 Dimensions (W x H x D) for DC operation 1) mm 45 x 85 x 107 / 45 x x 107 mm 45 x 85 x 151 / 45 x x x 85 x 176 / 45 x x 176 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operating cycles Operating cycles 10 million 10 million Operat. 5 million cycles Electrical endurance ) Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts V 415 (acc. to EN , ppendix N) Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 IP0, coil assembly IP0 Finger-safe Shock resistance rectangular pulse g/ms 7.5/5 and 4.7/10 8./5 and 5.10 g/ms >10/5 and 7.5/10 >10/5 and 7.5/10 Shock resistance sine pulse g/ms 11.8/5 and 7.4/10 1.5/5 and 8./10 g/ms >15/5 and >10/10 >15/5 and >10/10 Conductor cross-sections ) Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays Main circuit 5SE acc. to IEC / EN For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. - Type of coordination Type of coordination Weld-free 4) k, type of coordination 1 ) uxiliary circuit 10 (weld-free protection for I k (short-circuit current I k < 400 ) 10 1) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals. ) For endurance of the main contacts see page /15. ) For conductor cross-sections see page /18. 4) Test conditions according to IEC /19

30 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type RT0... RT0 5 RT RT0 8 RT0. -.NB RT0. -.NF.. RT0. -.NP Size S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 Control circuit Coil operating range C/DC x U s x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V 68/67 0.7/ / /0.8 81/79 0.7/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /0.45 W 5.9/ / /0.8 1./ /1.8 Operating times for x U s 1) Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Closing delay ms Opening delay ms ms Operating times for 1.0 x U s 1) - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor + ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: to 6 times). /0

31 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e 1) P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) Type Size t 40 C up to 690 V t 60 C up to 690 V t 40 C cross-section for loads with I e t 60 C Utilization categories C- and C- I e motors at 50 and 60 Hz RT0 S RT0 4 S0 RT0 5 S0 RT0 6 S0 415 V kw 8 Up to 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V t 110 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 660 V/690 V mm 10 mm 10 kw kw kw kw kw RT0 7 S0 Thermal load capacity 10 s current ) Power loss per conducting path t I e /C- W Utilization category C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) I e Up to 415 V t 415 V kw with 50 Hz and 60 Hz endurance of about operating cycles: - Rated operational currents I e Up to 415 V 690 V - Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour Dependence of the switching frequency z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z (I e /I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h t 110 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V No-load switching frequency C No-load switching frequency DC C-1 (C/DC) C- (C/DC) C- (C/DC) C-4 (C/DC) kw kw kw kw kw h h h h -1 h -1 h -1 h RT0 8 S ) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account). ) ccording to IEC For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /1

32 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type RT0 RT0 4 RT0 5 RT0 6 RT0 7 RT0 8 Size Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors connectable) S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 Main conductors Screw terminals Conductor cross-section mm² x (1....5) 1) ; x ( ) 1) according to IEC mm² x (1....5) 1) ; x ( ) 1) ; 1 x 10 WG x ( ); x ( ) M4 (Pozidriv size ) - Tightening torque Nm....5 (18... lb.in) uxiliary conductors mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) according to IEC mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) ; 1 x 1 M - Tightening torque Nm ( lb.in) Main conductors Spring-type terminals mm.0 x 0.5;.5 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x (1... 6) mm x (1... 6) WG x ( ) uxiliary conductors.0 x 0.5;.5 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping Contactor Size S00 S0 Screw or spring-type terminals Integrated or snap-on auxiliary switch block Screw or spring-type terminals 1- and 4-pole snap-on auxiliary switch block Screw or spring-type terminals Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block and rating of the auxiliary contacts Rated voltage V C Switching capacity 600, Q , Q , Q 00 Uninterrupted current t 40 V C /

33 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type RT0 15 RT0 16 RT0 17 RT0 18 Size S00 S00 S00 S00 and rating Rated insulation voltage V C 600 Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed 0 Maximum horsepower ratings ( and approved values) t 00 V 0 V 460 V 575 V hp hp hp hp Short-circuit protection (contactor or overload relay) t 600 V k ) ) ) ) NEM/EEMC ratings NEM/EEMC size hp 0 - Open - Enclosed t 00 V 0 V 460 V 575 V Overload relays RU1 1 / RB / hp hp hp hp Contactor Type RT0 RT0 4 RT0 5 RT0 6 RT0 7 RT0 8 Size S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 and rating Rated insulation voltage V C Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed 5 4 Maximum horsepower ratings ( and approved values) t 00 V 0 V 460 V 575 V hp hp hp hp Short-circuit protection t 600 V k (contactor or overload relay) ) t 480 V Type k t 600 V Type k NEM/EEMC ratings RV0 RV0 NEM/EEMC size hp 1 - Open - Enclosed t 00 V 0 V 460 V 575 V Overload relays RU1 / RB / hp hp hp hp /

34 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Selection and ordering data C operation RT RT Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s at 50/60 Hz C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e up to 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to 690 V Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals kw NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 1) Terminal designations according to EN RT0 15-1B01 RT0 15-1F01 RT0 15-1P01 RT0 15-1B0 RT0 15-1F0 RT0 15-1P0 RT0 16-1B01 RT0 16-1F01 RT0 16-1P01 RT0 16-1B0 RT0 16-1F0 RT0 16-1P0 RT0 17-1B01 RT0 17-1F01 RT0 17-1P01 RT0 17-1B0 RT0 17-1F0 RT0 17-1P0 RT0 18-1B01 RT0 18-1F01 RT0 18-1P01 RT0 18-1B0 RT0 18-1F0 RT0 18-1P0 RT0 15-B01 RT0 15-F01 RT0 15-P01 RT0 15-B0 RT0 15-F0 RT0 15-P0 RT0 16-B01 RT0 16-F01 RT0 16-P01 RT0 16-B0 RT0 16-F0 RT0 16-P0 RT0 17-B01 RT0 17-F01 RT0 17-P01 RT0 17-B0 RT0 17-F0 RT0 17-P0 RT0 18-B01 RT0 18-F01 RT0 18-P01 RT0 18-B0 RT0 18-F0 RT0 18-P0 Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /151. 1) For size S00: Coil operating range U s, U s. /4

35 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw C operation RT RT Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s at 50/60 Hz C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e up to 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to 690 V Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals kw NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S0 Terminal designations according to EN ) RT0-1C0 RT0-1G0 RT0-1L0 RT0 4-1C0 RT0 4-1G0 RT0 4-1L0 RT0 5-1C0 RT0 5-1G0 RT0 5-1L0 RT0 6-1C0 RT0 6-1G0 RT0 6-1L0 RT0 7-1C0 RT0 7-1G0 RT0 7-1L0 RT0 8-1C0 RT0 8-1G0 RT0 8-1L0 RT0 8-1C0-0J0 RT0 8-1G0-0J0 RT0 8-1L0-0J0 RT0 -C0 RT0 -G0 RT0 -L0 RT0 4-C0 RT0 4-G0 RT0 4-L0 RT0 5-C0 RT0 5-G0 RT0 5-L0 RT0 6-C0 RT0 6-G0 RT0 6-L0 RT0 7-C0 RT0 7-G0 RT0 7-L0 RT0 8-C0 RT0 8-G0 RT0 8-L0 Other voltages on request. 1) T u : upto 50 C For accessories, see page /151. For spare parts, see page /168. /5

36 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw DC operation RT B... RT0 1. -B... RT BB4.-0CC0 RT0 1. -BB4.-0CC0 Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e up to 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to 690 V Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals kw NO NC V DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 Terminal designations according to EN For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 Contactors with communications interface Terminal designations according to EN 5001 RT0 15-1BB41 RT0 15-1BM41 RT0 15-1BB4 RT0 15-1BM4 RT0 16-1BB41 RT0 16-1BM41 RT0 16-1BB4 RT0 16-1BM4 RT0 17-1BB41 RT0 17-1BM41 RT0 17-1BB4 RT0 17-1BM4 RT0 18-1BB41 RT0 18-1BM41 RT0 18-1BB4 RT0 18-1BM4 RT0 15-BB41 RT0 15-BM41 RT0 15-BB4 RT0 15-BM4 RT0 16-BB41 RT0 16-BM41 RT0 16-BB4 RT0 16-BM4 RT0 17-BB41 RT0 17-BM41 RT0 17-BB4 RT0 17-BM4 RT0 18-BB41 RT0 18-BM41 RT0 18-BB4 RT0 18-BM RT0 15-1BB41-0CC0 RT0 15-BB41-0CC RT0 15-1BB4-0CC0 RT0 15-BB4-0CC RT0 16-1BB41-0CC0 RT0 16-BB41-0CC RT0 16-1BB4-0CC0 RT0 16-BB4-0CC RT0 17-1BB41-0CC0 RT0 17-BB41-0CC RT0 17-1BB4-0CC0 RT0 17-BB4-0CC RT0 18-1BB41-0CC0 RT0 18-BB41-0CC RT0 18-1BB4-0CC0 RT0 18-BB4-0CC0 Other voltages on request. /6

37 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw DC operation RT0. -1B. 40 RT0. -B. 40 RT0.-1BB40-0CC0 RT0.-BB40-0CC0 Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e up to 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to 690 V Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals kw NO NC V DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S0 Terminal designations according to EN RT0-1BB40 RT0 -BB ) For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S0 Contactors with communication interface Terminal designations according to EN 5001 RT0 4-1BB40 RT0 4-1BM40 RT0 5-1BB40 RT0 5-1BM40 RT0 6-1BB40 RT0 6-1BM40 RT0 7-1BB40 RT0 7-1BM40 RT0 8-1BB40 RT0 8-1BM40 RT0 8-1BB40-0J0 RT0 8-1BB40-0J0 RT0 4-BB40 RT0 4-BM40 RT0 5-BB40 RT0 5-BM40 RT0 6-BB40 RT0 6-BM40 RT0 7-BB40 RT0 7-BM40 RT0 8-BB40 RT0 8-BM RT0-1BB40-0CC0 RT0 -BB40-0CC RT0 4-1BB40-0CC0 RT0 4-BB40-0CC RT0 5-1BB40-0CC0 RT0 5-BB40-0CC RT0 6-1BB40-0CC0 RT0 6-BB40-0CC RT0 7-1BB40-0CC0 RT0 7-BB40-0CC RT0 8-1BB40-0CC0 RT0 8-BB40-0CC0 Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /151. 1) T u : upto 50 C /7

38 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw UC operation C or DC operation Extended operating range of the solenoid coils x U s Integrated coil circuit RT0. -1N. 0 RT0. -N. 0 Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e up to 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to 690 V kw NO NC V C/DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S0 1) Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals With integrated coil circuit (varistor) Terminal designations according to EN ) ) ) ) ) RT0 4-1NB0 RT0 4-1NF0 RT0 4-1NP0 RT0 5-1NB0 RT0 5-1NF0 RT0 5-1NP0 RT0 6-1NB0 RT0 6-1NF0 RT0 6-1NP0 RT0 7-1NB0 RT0 7-1NF0 RT0 7-1NP0 RT0 8-1NB0 RT0 8-1NF0 RT0 8-1NP0 RT0 4-NB0 RT0 4-NF0 RT0 4-NP0 RT0 5-NB0 RT0 5-NF0 RT0 5-NP0 RT0 6-NB0 RT0 6-NF0 RT0 6-NP0 RT0 7-NB0 RT0 7-NF0 RT0 7-NP0 RT0 8-NB0 RT0 8-NF0 RT0 8-NP0 1) t 80 V: upper limit =1.1 x U s. /8

39 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 contactors, -pole, kw Options Rated control supply voltages (the 10th and 11th position of the order number must be changed) Rated control supply voltage U s Contactor type Sizes S00... S0 C operation 1) Solenoid coils for 50 Hz (exception: Size S00: 50 and 60 Hz ) ) 4 V C 4 V C 48 V C 110 V C 0 V C 400 V C Solenoid coils for 50 and 60 Hz ) 4 V C 4 V C 48 V C 110 V C 0 V C 0 V C 40 V C DC operation 1) 1 V DC 4 V DC 4 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 15 V DC 0 V DC 0 V DC Examples C operation RT0-1P00 RT0-1G0 DC operation RT0 5-BB40 RT0 5-BG40 Size RT0 1 S00 B0 D0 H0 F0 P0 V0 B0 D0 H0 F0 N P0 P 4 B4 D4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4 P4 RT0 5) S0 B0 D0 H0 F0 P0 V0 C D H G N L P B4 D4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4 P4 RT 1, 5) RT5 1 5) S00 B0 D0 H0 F0 P0 V0 B0 D0 H0 F0 N P0 P 4 B4 D4 W4 F4 G4 M4 P4 RT, 5) RT5 5) S0 Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50 Hz for rated control supply voltage 0 V C. Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50/60 Hz for rated control supply voltage 110 V C. Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 4 V DC. Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 15 V DC. B0 F0 P0 V0 C D H G N L P B4 D4 F4 G4 M4 Rated control supply Contactor type RT..-.N voltage U s min... U ) s max Size S00 S0 Size S0 UC operation (C 45 to 70 Hz, DC) V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC 4) B F P 1) For deviating coil voltages and coil operating ranges of sizes S00 and S0, the 4 V DC SITOP Power power supply unit with wide range input (9 to 64 V C; 0 to 64 V DC) can be used for coil excitation. ) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s at 60 Hz: x U s. ) Coil operating range: 0.7 x U s min...1. x U s max. 4) t 80 V: upper limit =1.1 x U s. 5) Wideband coil voltages available. /9

40 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) according to EN Contact reliability the auxiliary contacts of the RT1 contactor or RH11 contactor relay should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact reliability. These auxiliary contacts are particularly suitable for solid-state Short-circuit protection of the contactors For more information about short-circuit protection of contactors short-circuit protection of the contactors with overload relay see Overload Relays. To assemble fuseless motor feeders you must select combinations of motor starter protector and contactor as explained in Fuseless Load Feeders. Motor protection RU11 thermal overload relays or RB0/RB1 solid-state against overload. The overload relays must be ordered separately. Ratings of induction motors The quoted rating (in kw) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (according to the nameplate). Surge suppression diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. Note: The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor + to 5 ms). Sizes S00 and S0, up to 11 kw The RT1 devices in these sizes can be found in SIRIUS datasheet 009. Sizes S and S, up to 45 kw uxiliary contact complement The basic units of sizes S and S are delivered only with the main contacts and can be extended with auxiliary switch blocks. Surge suppression For size S and S contactors, varistors and RC elements can be snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. Diode assemblies are available in different versions on account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can be connected either only at the bottom (assembly with motor starter protector) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay). The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is Exceptions: RT19 6-1T. 00 and RT19 6-1T. 00, in this case the plug-in direction is marked with + and -. Sizes S6 to S1, > 45 to 50 kw RT10, contactors for switching motors, RT1, vacuum contactors for switching motors, RT14, contactors for C-1 applications. Operating mechanism types Two types of solenoid operation are available: Conventional operating mechanism Solid-state operating mechanism (with performance levels) Control supply voltage The contactors have a UC operating mechanism which can be operated with C (40 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC. Withdrawable coils For simple coil replacement, e. g. if the application is replaced, the solenoid coil can be pulled out upwards after the release mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any other coil of the same size. uxiliary contact complement Contactor sizes S6 to S1 are supplied with mounted auxiliary switch blocks. RT10 and RT14 contactors: uxiliary contacts mounted laterally and on front RT1 vacuum contactors: uxiliary contacts mounted laterally Contactors with conventional operating mechanism Version RT : The solenoid coil is switched directly on and off with the control supply voltage U s by way of terminals 1/. Multi-voltage range for the control supply voltage U s : Only one coil covers several close-lying control supply voltages which are used worldwide, e. g V C/DC or V C/DC. llowance is made in addition for am operating range of 0.8 times the lower (U s min ) and 1.1 times the upper (U s max ) rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switches reliably and no thermal overload occurs. Contactors with solid-state operating mechanism The solenoid coil is supplied selectively with the power required for reliable switching and holding by upstream control electronics. Wide voltage range for the control supply voltage U s : Compared with the conventional operating mechanism, the solid-state operating mechanism covers an even broader range of control supply voltages used worldwide within one coil variant. For example, the coil for 00 to 77 V C/DC (U s min to U s max ) covers the voltages V used worldwide. Extended operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s : The wide range for the rated control supply voltage and the additionally allowed coil operating range of 0.8 x U s min to 1.1 x U s max results in an extended coil operating range of at least 0.7 to 1.5 x U s, within which the contactors will operate reliably, for the most common control supply voltages of 4, 110 and 0 V. /0

41 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Bridging temporary voltage dips: Control voltage failures dipping to 0 V (at 1/) are bridged for up to approx. 5 ms to avoid unintentional tripping. For voltages above 0.8 x U s min the electronics will reliably switch the contactor ON, and for voltages below the value 0.5 x U s min it is reliably switched OFF. The hysteresis in the switching thresholds prevents the main contacts from chattering as well as increased wear or welding when operated in weak, unstable networks. This also prevents thermal overloading of the contactor coil if the voltage applied is too low (contactor does not close properly and is continuously operated with overexcitation). Low control power consumption when closing and in the closed state. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism conform to the requirements for operation in industrial plants: Interference immunity - Burst (IEC ): 4 kv - Surge (IEC ): 4 kv - Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC ): 8/15 kv - Emitted interference - Limit value class according to EN Note: In connection with converters, the control cables must be routed separately from the load cables to the converter. Indication of remaining lifetime (RLT) Main contactor contacts are working parts which therefore must be replaced in good time when the end of their service life has been reached. The degree of contact erosion and thus the electrical endurance (= number of operating cycles) depends on the loading, utilization category, operating mode, etc. Up to now, routine checks/visual inspections by the maintenance personnel were needed in order to gain an insight into the state of the main contacts. The remaining lifetime indication function now takes over this task. It does not count the number of operating cycles which does not provide information about contact erosion but progress of erosion of each one of the three main contacts, and data are not lost even if the control supply voltage for 1/ fails. fter replacement of the main contacts, measurement the remaining lifetime must be reset using the RESET button (hold down RESET button for about seconds using a pen or similar tool). dvantages: Signaling through relay contact or S-i when remaining lifetime is 0 %, i. e. contact material wear is 80 %. SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw dditional visual indication of various levels of erosion by means of LEDs on the laterally mounted solid-state module when remaining lifetime is 60 % (green), 40 % (orange) and 0 % (red). Early warning to replace contacts Optimum utilization of contact material Visual inspection of the condition of contacts no longer necessary Reduction of ongoing operating costs Optimum planning of maintenance measures voidance of unforeseen plant downtimes Version RT N: for 4 V DC PLC output control options: Control without a coupling link directly through a 4 V DC/ of -pole plug-in connection. The screwless spring-type connection is part of the scope of supply. The control supply voltage which supplies the solenoid operating mechanism must be connected to 1/. Note: Before start-up, the slide switch for PLC operation must be moved to the PLC ON position (setting ex works: PLC OFF ). Conventional control by applying the control supply voltage at 1/ through a switching contact. Note: The slide switch must be in the PLC OFF position (= setting ex works). /1

42 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Version RT P: for 4 V DC PLC output or PLC relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT). SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw control options: Contactor control without a coupling link directly through terminals IN+/IN-. Possibility of switching from automatic control to local control by way of terminals H1/H, i. e. automatic control through PLC or SIMOCODE/PROFIBUS DP can be deactivated e. g. at start-up or in the event of a fault and the contactor can be controlled manually. To supply the solenoid and the remaining lifetime indicator with power, the control supply voltage U s must be connected to terminals 1/ of the laterally mounted solid-state module. The control inputs of the contactor are connected to a 7-pole plug-in connection; the screwless spring-type connection is part of the scope of supply. The Remaining Lifetime RLT status signal is available at plated, enclosed) and can be input to SIMOCODE, PLC or other devices for processing, for example. Permissible current-carrying capacity of the R1/R relay output: - I e /C-15/4 to 0 V: - I e /DC-1/4 V: 1 LED indications The following states are indicated by means of LEDs on the laterally mounted solid-state module: - Contactor ON (energized state): green LED ( ON ) - Indication of remaining lifetime Contactor control through relay outputs at connections H1/ H, e. g. by - PLC or - SIMOCODE. Contact loading: U s /approx. 5 m. When operated through SIMOCODE, a communication link to PROFIBUS DP is also provided. Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th SIRIUS power contactors R T 1st generation 1 Device type (e. g. 0 = -pole motor contactor, = 4-pole C-1 contactor) Size of the contactor ( = S, 4 = S, 5 = S6, etc.) Power dependent on size (e. g. 45 = 7 kw) Connection type (1 = screw, = spring-type) Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. = C standard / without) Rated control supply voltage (e. g. P0 = 0 V, 50 Hz) uxiliary switches (e. g. S: 0 = without auxiliary switches) Special version Example R T P 0 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog and in the Industry Mall. /

43 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Endurance of the main contacts The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when switching resistive and inductive C loads (C-1/C-) depending on the breaking current and rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. The rated operational current I e complies with utilization category C-4 (breaking six times the rated operational current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least operating cycles. current I e /C-4 can be increased. I e If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i. e. normal switching (breaking the rated operational current according to utilization category C-) in combination with intermittent inching (breaking several times the rated operational current according to utilization category C-4), the contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the following equation: Size S Characters in the equation: X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles Contact endurance for normal operation (I a = I e ) in operating cycles B Contact endurance for inching (I a = multiple of I e ) in operating cycles C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations Size S Diagram legend: P N = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 415 V I a = Breaking current = Rated operational current I e /

44 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Endurance of the main contacts Sizes S6 to S1 RT1 vacuum contactors Sizes S10 and S1 Diagram legend: P N = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 415 V I a = Breaking current = Rated operational current I e /4

45 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Type Size RT10 4 S RT10 5 RT10 6 RT10 44 S RT10 45 RT10 46 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 55 x 11 x x 146 x 14 mm 55 x 11 x x 146 x 18 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10 million Operating 10 million cycles Operating 5 million cycles Electrical endurance 1) Rated insulation voltage U i V (pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 6 Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts acc. to V EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 (terminal compartment IP00), C coil assembly IP40, DC coil assembly IP0 Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe Shock resistance (C and DC operation) g/ms 10/5 and 5/10 6.8/5 and 4/10 g/ms 15/5 and 8/ /5 and 6./10 Conductor cross-sections ) Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. Main circuit Fuse links gg, type NH N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE according to IEC / EN ) uxiliary circuit 10 (weld-free protection at I k (short-circuit current I k 10 1) For endurance of the main contacts see page /. ) For conductor cross-sections see page /8. ) Test conditions acc. to IEC /5

46 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT10 4 S RT10 5 S RT10 6 S RT10 44 S RT10 45 S RT10 46 S Control circuit Coil operating range C/DC x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V V V /11 0.7/ / / / /0.7 15/ / /11 0.6/0.57 5/18 0.7/0. - Closing = Closed W /74 0.7/0.6 7/0 0.9/0.1 Operating times for x U s 1) Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms Operating times for 1.0 x U s 1) - Closing delay - Opening delay Closing delay - Opening delay ms ) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor + ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: to 6 times). /6

47 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT10 4 S RT10 5 S RT10 6 S RT10 44 S RT10 45 S RT10 46 S Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1 Switching resistive loads I e - t 40 C up to 690 V - t 60 C up to 690 V 1) with p.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C) - t 415 V kw I e - t 40 C - t 60 C mm 16 mm Utilization categories C- and C- I e - Up to 500 V - t 690 V - t 0 V - t 415 V - t 500 V - t 690 V kw kw kw kw Thermal current-carrying capacity, 10 s current ) Power loss per conducting path at I e /C- W Utilization category C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) I e - Up to 415 V t 415 V kw The following applies to a contact endurance of about operating cycles: I e - Up to 415 V - Up to 690 V - t 0 V - t 415 V - t 500 V - t 690 V Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays h h z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z (I e /I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h - C-1 - C- - C- - C-4 Contactors with overload relays h kw kw kw kw h -1 h -1 h -1 h ) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account). ) ccording to IEC For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /7

48 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors connectable) Main conductors: (1 or conductors can be connected) Box terminals Front clamping point connected RT10. S Screw terminals RT10 4. S mm² mm² mm² mm² mm 6 x 9 x x 9 x 0.8 (number x width x thickness) WG /0 Rear clamping point connected mm² mm² mm² mm² mm 6 x 9 x x 9 x 0.8 (number x width x thickness) WG /0 Both clamping points connected mm² x ( ) x ( ) mm² x ( ) x (4... 5) mm² x ( ) x ( ) mm² x ( ) x ( ) mm x (6 x 9 x 0.8) x (6 x 9 x 0.8) (number x width x thickness) WG x (18... ) x ( /0) - Tightening torque Nm uxiliary conductors: M6 (Pozidriv ) ( lb.in) M6 (hexagon socket, /F 4) ( lb.in) mm² x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) according to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm² x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) ; 1 x 1 - Tightening torque Nm M ( lb.in) 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply. /8

49 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Type RT10 54 RT10 55, RT10 56 RT10 64, RT10 65, RT10 66 RT10 75 RT10 76 Size S6 S10 S1 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 10 x 17 x x 10 x x 14 x 5 mm 10 x 17 x x 10 x x 14 x 71 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operating 10 million cycles Electrical endurance 1) Rated insulation voltage U i V 1000 (pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Protective separation between the coil and the V 690 main contacts acc. to EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature C C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP0 Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe with cover Shock resistance g/ms 8.5/5 and 4./10 g/ms 1.4/5 and 6.5/10 Conductor cross-sections ) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ) Short-circuit protection For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. Main circuit Fuse links gg, type NH N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE according to IEC / EN ) uxiliary circuit 10 (weld-free protection at I k (I k < 400 ) 1) For endurance of the main contacts see page /4. ) For conductor cross-sections see page /4. ) For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) see page /1. 4) Test conditions according to IEC /9

50 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT10 5. S6 RT10 6. S10 RT10 7. S1 Control circuit Operating range of the solenoid C/DC (UC) 0.8 x U s min x U s max Power consumption of the solenoid (when coil is cool and rated range U s min... U s max ) Conventional operating mechanism - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. 50/0.9 00/ / / / / / / /0.9 80/ /0.9 9./0.9 - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max W W W W Solid-state operating mechanism - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. 190/0.8 80/0.8.5/ / /0.8 50/0.8 4/0.5 5/ / / /0.8 7/0.8 - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max W W W W PLC control input acc. to EN Type V DC 4 V DC m Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time) Conventional operating mechanism U s min x U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms U s min... U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via 1/ U s min x U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms U s min... U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Solid-state operating mechanism, actuated via PLC input U s min x U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms U s min... U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms /40

51 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT10 54 S6 RT10 55 S6 RT10 56 S6 RT10 64 S10 RT10 65 S10 RT10 66 S10 RT10 75 S1 RT10 76 S1 Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1 Switching resistive loads I e - t 40 C up to 690 V t 60 C up to 690 V - t 60 C up to 1000 V 1) with p.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C) t 415 V kw I e - t 40 C - t 60 C mm 70 mm x x 185 x 185 Utilization categories C- and C- I e - Up to 500 V - t 690 V - t 1000 V and 60 Hz - t 0 V - t 415 V - t 500 V - t 690 V - t 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Thermal current-carrying capacity, 10 s current ) Power loss per main current path W at I e /C-/500 V Utilization category C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) I e - Up to 415 V with 50 Hz and 60 Hz - t 415 V kw The following applies to a contact endurance of about operating cycles: I e - Up to 500 V - Up to 690 V - Up to 1000 V with 50 Hz and 60 Hz - t 0 V - t 415 V - t 500 V - t 690 V - t 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays h z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z (I e /I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h - C-1 - C- - C- - C-4 h -1 h -1 h -1 h Contactors with overload relays h ) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account). ) ccording to IEC For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /41

52 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Conductor cross-sections Main conductors: (1 or conductors can be connected) Box terminals Type Size RT10 5. S6 Screw terminals RT G (55 kw) box terminals RT G box terminals RT10 6. S10 RT G box terminals Front clamping point connected mm² mm² mm² (number x width x thickness) mm Min. x 9 x 0.8, max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 Min. x 9 x 0.8, max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8 / kcmil WG 6... / kcmil Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 0 x 4 x 0.5 Rear clamping point connected mm² mm² mm² (number x width x thickness) mm Min. x 9 x 0.8, max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 Min. x 9 x 0.8, max. 10 x 15.5 x kcmil RT10 7. S1 WG 6... / kcmil Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 0 x 4 x 0.5 Both clamping points connected mm² Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 10 Min. x 50, max. x 185 mm² Max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 10 Min. x 50, max. x 185 mm² Max. x 70 Max. x 10 Min. x 70, max. x 40 (number x width x thickness) mm Max. x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) Max. x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8) Min. x /0, max. x 500 kcmil WG Max. x 1/0 Max. x /0 Max. x (0 x 4 x 0.5) - Tightening torque Nm M10 (hexagon socket, /F 4) ( lb.in) M10 (hexagon socket, /F 4) ( lb.in) M1 (hexagon socket, /F 5) 0... ( lb.in) uxiliary conductors: mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) according to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) M (PZ ) - Tightening torque Nm ( lb.in) 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply. /4

53 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT10 4 S RT10 5 S RT10 6 S RT10 44 S RT10 45 S and rating Rated insulation voltage V C Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed Maximum horsepower ratings ( and approved values) - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V Short-circuit protection hp hp hp hp k t 480 V Type RV10 RV t 600 V Type RV10 4 RV10 4 NEM/EEMC ratings NEM/EEMC size hp - Open - Enclosed - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V Overload relays Type RU11 RU k k hp hp hp hp RT10 46 S Contactor Size S to S1 S to S1 Screw terminals Screw terminals Snap-on auxiliary switch block (1- and 4-pole) Laterally mountable auxiliary switch block and rating of the auxiliary contacts Rated voltage V C Switching capacity 600, Q , Q /4

54 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type RT10 54 RT10 55 RT10 56 RT10 64 RT10 65 RT10 66 Size S6 S6 S6 S10 S10 S10 and rating Rated insulation voltage V C Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed Maximum horsepower ratings ( - and approved values) - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V Short-circuit protection hp hp hp hp k NEM/EEMC ratings NEM/EEMC size hp Open - Enclosed - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V Overload relays Type RB0 56 RB0 66 hp hp hp hp Contactor Type RT10 75 RT10 76 Size S1 S1 and rating Rated insulation voltage V C 600 Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed Maximum horsepower ratings ( - and approved values) - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V Short-circuit protection k NEM/EEMC ratings NEM/EEMC size hp 6 - Open - Enclosed - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V hp hp hp hp Overload relays Type RB0 66 hp hp hp hp /44

55 Power Contactors for Switching Motors RT10 contactors, -pole, kw RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Selection and ordering data C operation RT RT Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s at C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C C-1, T u : 40 C 50/60 Hz Operational current I e up to 500 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V Operational current I e up to 690 V Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. kw NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm and 75 mm standard mounting rail Size S RT10 4-1C0 RT10 4-1G0 RT10 4-1L0 RT10 5-1C0 RT10 5-1G0 RT10 5-1L0 RT10 6-1C0 RT10 6-1G0 RT10 6-1L0 RT C0-8K RT G0-8K RT L0-8K RT C0-8K RT G0-8K RT L0-8K RT C0-8K RT G0-8K RT L0-8K Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. /45

56 Power Contactors for Switching Motors RT10 contactors, -pole, kw RT10 contactors, -pole, kw DC operation DC solenoid system RT10. -1B. 40 RT B. 40 Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U C- and C-, T s u : Up to 60 C C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to 500 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 415 V Operational current I e up to 690 V Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. kw NO NC V DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm and 75 mm standard mounting rail Size S Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. RT10 4-1BB40 RT10 4-1BM40 RT10 5-1BB40 RT10 5-1BM40 RT10 6-1BB40 RT10 6-1BM40 RT BB40 RT BM40 RT BB40 RT BM40 RT BB40 RT BM40 /46

57 Power Contactors for Switching Motors RT10 contactors, -pole, kw RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Contactors without coils C/DC operation (40 Hz to 60 Hz, DC) Conventional operating mechanism / Solid-state operating mechanism for 4 V DC PLC output RT1. 5. RT1. 6. RT1. 7. Size Rated data uxiliary contacts, lateral C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and 500 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V Operational current I e up to 690 V Version Screw terminals Order No. kw kw kw kw NO NC V C/DC S RT L06-8K RT L06-8K RT L06-8K S RT L06-8K RT L06-8K RT L06-8K S RT L06-8K RT L06-8K For coils, see table below For other accessories see page /176 For spare parts see page /18 For contactors Rated control supply Screw terminals Rated control supply Screw terminals voltage U s voltage U s Size Type Order No. Type Order No. Withdrawable coils Conventional operating mechanism Solid-state operating mechanism For 4V DC PLC output S6 RT B1 RT V C/DC RT F1 RT V C/DC RT NF1 RT V C/DC RT P1 RT V C/DC RT NP41 S10 RT B1 RT V C/DC RT F1 RT V C/DC RT NF1 RT V C/DC RT P1 RT V C/DC RT NP1 RT B1 RT V C/DC RT F1 RT V C/DC RT NF1 vacuum contactors V C/DC RT P1 vacuum contactors V C/DC RT NP1 S1 RT B1 RT V C/DC RT F1 RT V C/DC RT NF1 RT V C/DC RT P1 RT V C/DC RT NP1 RT1 7 vacuum vacuum contactors contactors For 4 V DC PLC output/plc relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT) (Withdrawable coil with lateral solid-state module) S6 RT V C/DC RT PF1 RT V C/DC RT PP1 S10 RT V C/DC RT PF1 RT V C/DC RT PP1 S1 RT V C/DC RT PF1 RT V C/DC RT PP1 /47

58 Power Contactors for Switching Motors RT10 contactors, -pole, kw RT10 contactors, -pole, kw C/DC operation (40 Hz to 60 Hz, DC) uxiliary and control conductors: screw terminals Withdrawable coils Integrated coil circuit (Varistor) Main conductors: busbar connections Remaining lifetime indicator (RLT) RT P.. Size Rated data uxiliary contacts, lateral C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C C-1, T u : 40 C Rated control supply voltage Us Screw terminals Operational current I e up to Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Operational current I e up to Version Order No. 500 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V 690 V kw kw kw kw NO NC V C/DC Solid-state operating mechanism for 4 V DC PLC output/plc relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT) S S S For accessories see page /176. For spare parts see page /18. RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 RT PF5 RT PP5 /48

59 Power Contactors for Switching Motors RT10 contactors, -pole, kw RT10 contactors, -pole, kw Options Rated control supply voltages (the 10th and 11th position of the order number must be changed) Rated control supply Contactor type RT10, ) RT14 4 RT1, ) voltage U s RT10 4 ) RT1 4, ) RT15 Sizes S and S C operation Solenoid coils for 50 Hz 1) 4 V C 4 V C 48 V C 110 V C 0 V C 40 V C 400 V C Solenoid coils for 50 and 60 Hz 1) 4 V C 4 V C 48 V C 110 V C 0 V C 0 V C 40 V C DC operation 1 V DC 4 V DC 4 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 15 V DC 0 V DC 0 V DC Examples C operating mechanism DC operating mechanism RT10 4-1P00 RT10 4-1G0 RT10 4-BB40 RT10 4-BG40 RT16 17, RT16 7, RT16 47 Size S, S S S, S S00, S0, S B0 D0 H0 F0 P0 U0 V0 C D H G N L P B4 D4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4 P4 B0 D0 H0 F0 P0 U0 V0 C D H G N L P B4 D4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4 P4 B0 F0 P0 U0 V0 C D H G N L P B4 D4 F4 G4 M4 Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50 Hz for rated control supply voltage 0 V C. Contactor with screw terminals; with solenoid coil for 50/60 Hz for rated control supply voltage 110 V C. B0 F0 P0 U0 V0 C G N L P Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 4 V DC. Contactor with spring-type terminals; for rated control supply voltage 15 V DC. Rated control supply Contactor type RT voltage U s RT RT Rated control supply Contactor type RT N voltage U s RT N RT N RT P/Q RT P/Q RT P/Q U s min... U s max 5) Size S6, S10, S1 U s min... U s max ) Size S6, S10, S1 S6, S10, S1 Sizes S6 to S1 UC operation (C Hz, DC) Conventional operating mechanism... 6 V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC B D F M P U V R S T Solid-state operating mechanism V C/DC V C/DC V C/DC B F P F P 1) Coil operating range: at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x U s U s. ) Operating range: 0.8 x U s min U s max. ) Wideband coil voltages available. /49

60 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Overview UC operation The contactors can be operated with C (40 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC. Two types of solenoid operation are available: Conventional operating mechanism, version RT Solid-state operating mechanism, version RT N Withdrawable coils For simple coil replacement, e. g. if the application is replaced, the solenoid coil can be pulled out upwards after the release mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any other coil of the same size. Vacuum interrupters In contrast with the RT10 contactors the main contacts operate in air under atmospheric conditions the contact gaps of the RT1 vacuum contactors are contained in hermetically enclosed vacuum contact tubes. Neither arcs nor arcing gases are however, is that their electrical endurance is at least twice as long as that of RT10 contactors. They are therefore particularly well suited to frequent switching in jogging/mixed operation, e. g. in crane control systems. Note: Vacuum contactors are basically unsuitable for switching DC voltage. uxiliary contact complement (identical auxiliary switch blocks from S to S1). Of these, no more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts. Type Size RT1 64 S10 RT1 65 S1 RT1 66 RT1 75 RT1 76 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 145 x 10 x x 14 x 5 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operating 10 million cycles Electrical endurance 1) Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 8 Protective separation between the coil and the main contacts acc. to V 690 EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature C /+55 with S-Interface C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 IP00/open, coil assembly IP0 Finger-safe with cover Shock resistance g/ms 8.5/5 and 4./10 g/ms 1.4/5 and 6.5/10 Conductor cross-sections ) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ) Short-circuit protection Main circuit with fuse links gg, NH N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE according to IEC / EN ) uxiliary circuit 10 (weld-free protection at I k (short-circuit current I k 1) For endurance of the main contacts see page /4. ) For conductor cross-sections see page /5. ) For electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) see page /1. 4) Test conditions according to IEC /50

61 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type RT1 64 RT1 65 RT1 66 RT1 75 RT1 76 Size S10 S10 S10 S1 S1 Control circuit Operating range of the solenoid C/DC (UC) Power consumption of the solenoid (when coil is cool and rated range U s min... U s max ) Conventional operating mechanisms - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max Solid-state operating mechanism - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max - Closing at U s min - Closing at U s max - Closed at U s min - Closed at U s max Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time) Conventional operating mechanisms V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. W W W W V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. W W W W 0.8 x U s min x U s max 50/0.9 60/ / / / /0.8 4./ / /0.9 80/ /0.9 9./ / / /0.8 7/ U s min x U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms U s min... U s max - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms /51

62 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type RT1 64 RT1 65 RT1 66 RT1 75 RT1 76 Size S10 S10 S10 S1 S1 Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1 Switching resistive loads I e - t 40 C up to 1000 V - t 60 C up to 1000 V ) with p.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C) - t 415 V kw I e - t 40 C - t 60 C Utilization categories C- and C- mm 185 mm 185 x 185 x 185 I e - Up to 1000 V t 0 V - t 415 V - t 500 V - t 690 V - t 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Thermal load capacity 10 sec current ) Power loss per conducting path at I e /C- W Utilization category C-4 (for I a = 6 x I e ) I e - Up to 690 V t 415 V kw The following applies to a contact endurance of about operating cycles: I e - Up to 690 V - Up to 1000 V t 0 V - t 415 V - t 500 V - t 690 V - t 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour Contactors without overload relays h z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z (I e /I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h - C-1 - C- - C- - C-4 h -1 h -1 h -1 h Contactors with overload relays h ) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account). ) ccording to IEC For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. /5

63 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size RT1 6. S10 Conductor cross-sections Main conductors: Screw terminals RT1 7. S1 Box terminals RT G box terminals Front clamping point connected mm² mm² mm² WG / kcmil mm Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8; max. 0 x 4 x 0.5 (number x width x thickness) Rear clamping point connected mm² mm² mm² WG kcmil mm Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8; max. 0 x 4 x 0.5 (number x width x thickness) Both clamping points connected mm² Min. x 50, max. x 185 mm² Min. x 50, max. x 185 mm² Min. x 70, max. x 40 WG Min. x 1/0, max. x 500 kcmil (number x width x thickness) mm Max. x (0 x 4 x 0.5) - Tightening torque Nm uxiliary conductors: M1 (hexagon socket, /F 5) 0... ( lb.in) mm² x ( ) ) ; x ( ) ) according to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm² x ( ) ) ; x ( ) ) WG x ( ) - Tightening torque Nm M (PZ ) ( lb.in) 1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 464, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 40 mm² and more as well as DIN 465 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to keep the phase clearance. ) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping sections are used, this restriction does not apply. Contactor Type Size RT1 64 S10 RT1 65 S10 RT1 66 S10 and rating Rated insulation voltage V C Uninterrupted current, at 40 C, open and enclosed Maximum horsepower ratings ( - and approved values) - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V hp hp hp hp RT1 75 S1 Short-circuit protection 1) k NEM/EEMC ratings hp Open - Enclosed - t 00 V - t 0 V - t 460 V - t 575 V Overload relays Type RB0 66 RB0 66 hp hp hp hp RT1 76 S /5

64 Power Contactors for Switching Motors SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw SIRIUS RT1 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Selection and ordering data C/DC operation (40 Hz to 60 Hz, DC) uxiliary and control conductors: screw terminals Withdrawable coils Integrated coil circuit (Varistor) Main conductors: busbar connections RT1 7. RT1 7. Size Rated data uxiliary contacts, lateral C- and C-, T u : Up to 60 C C-1, T u : 40 C Operational current I e up to Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Operational current I e up to 1000 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V Version Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Order No. kw kw kw kw NO NC V C/DC Conventional operating mechanism S S For accessories, see page /176 For spare parts, see page /18 1) Built-in surge suppression: varistor circuit. RT1 64-6B6 RT1 64-6F6 RT1 64-6P6 RT1 64-6V6 RT1 65-6B6 RT1 65-6F6 RT1 65-6P6 RT1 65-6V6 RT1 66-6B6 RT1 66-6F6 RT1 66-6P6 RT1 66-6V6 RT1 75-6B6 RT1 75-6F6 RT1 75-6P6 RT1 75-6V6 RT1 75-6B6 RT1 76-6F6 RT1 76-6P6 RT1 75-6V6 /54

65 Power Contactors for Switching Motors TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Overview IEC , EN (VDE 0660 Part 10) other devices (see ccessories and Spare Parts). Function Main contacts Contact erosion indication with TF68/69 vacuum contactors The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of white double slides on the contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all vacuum interrupters. uxiliary contacts Contact reliability The auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits With currents 1 m nd voltages from 17 V. Surge suppression Control circuit Protection of coils against overvoltages: C operation Fitted with varistors as standard DC operation With varistors If TF68/TF69 is to be used for DC operation, an additional reversing contactor is required; this is included in the scope of supply in the same packaging as the vacuum contactor. Electromagnetic compatibility TF68/ C electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a high interference immunity. Contactor type TF C.., TF C.. Rated control supply voltage U s Overvoltage type (IEC 60801) V Burst Surge V Burst Surge V Burst Surge Degree of severity (IEC 60801) 4 6 kv Overvoltage strength kv kv 5 kv kv 6 kv Note: During operation in installations in which the emitted interference limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output contactors in converters, TF68/ Q contactors without a main conductor path circuit are recommended (see description below). pplication The standard TF C and TF C contactors with electronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high resistance to electromagnetic interference. TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw The TF Q and TF Q contactors have been designed for use in installations in which the C control supply voltage is subject to very high levels of interference. Causes for such interference can be, for example: Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors. High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmospheric discharges can cause interference on the control cables. To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency converters, the manufacturer recommends the use of e.g. Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage damping: Feeding the contactors using control transformer according to EN rather than directly from the network Use of surge arresters, if required For operating conditions where there are high interference voltages and no measures that reduce interference voltage coupling to the control voltage level have been taken, use of TF Q and TF Q contactors is highly recommended. Version The magnetic systems of the TF Q and TF Q economy circuit. TC44 reversing contactor with a mounted series resistor is used to switch to the holding excitation. contactors is connected to the TF6 main contactor by means of a one-meter connecting cable with plug-in connectors. Connection Control circuit Main circuit s standard TF6 contactors with integrated RC varistors. Protection of the main current paths n integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltage rises to safe values. This prevents multiple restriking. The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that the motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages with steep voltage rises. Important note: The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if TF68/69 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers, frequency converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms, for example. It could be damaged by the voltage peaks and harmonics which are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in the contactors. Solution: Order special contactor version without overvoltage damping. The Order No. must include -Z and the order code 0. Without additional charge. /55

66 Power Contactors for Switching Motors TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type TF68 and TF69 Rated data of the auxiliary contacts cc. to IEC (VDE 0660 Part 00) Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (degree of pollution ) Continuous thermal current 10 Ith =Rated operational current Ie/C-1 C load Rated operational current Ie/C-15/C-14 for rated operational voltage Ue DC load Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 for rated operational voltage U e Rated operational current I e /DC-1 for rated operational voltage Ue CS and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts Rated voltage 4 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 0 V 80 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 690 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V V C, max Switching capacity 600, P Endurance of the auxiliary contacts The contact endurance for utilization category C-1 or C-15/ C-14 depends mainly on the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. TF68 and TF69 contactors at 0 V C Contact erosion indication with TF68 and TF69 vacuum contactors The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of white double slides on the contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all vacuum interrupters. /56

67 Power Contactors for Switching Motors TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Endurance of the main contacts Contactor General data Permissible mounting position, installation instructions1) ) The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Type Size C operation and DC operation Operating cycles TF million Electrical endurance Operating ) cycles Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution ) kv 1 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 8 Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts kv 1 acc. to EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. One NC contact each must be connected in series for the right and left auxiliary switch block respectively. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature During operation During storage Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C Touch protection acc. to EN 5074 Shock resistance C operation DC operation C operation DC operation Conductor cross-sections Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Short-circuit protection Main circuit Fuse links, gl/gg LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE - acc. to IEC / EN ) C C g/ms g/ms g/ms g/ms uxiliary circuit 10 free protection at Ik Ik < 400 ) 10 1) To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 0 mm between the contactors. ) If mounted at a 90 angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the normal values IP00/open, coil assembly IP40 Finger-safe with cover 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9/5 and 5.7/10 1.8/5 and 7.4/ /5 and 9.1/10 See Conductor Cross-Sections See Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) TF68 and TF69 contactors Legend for the diagrams: PN = Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V Ia = Breaking current Ie = Rated operational current TF /5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10 1.5/5 and 7.8/10 1.5/5 and 7.8/ ) See endurance of the auxiliary contacts. 4) Test conditions according to IEC /57

68 Power Contactors for Switching Motors TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size TF68 14 TF69 14 Control Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 x Us min x Us max Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us) Us max - Closing - Closed V/p.f. V/p.f. 1850/1 49/ / /0.1 Us min - Closing - Closed V/p.f. V/p.f. 100/1 1.5/ / /0.4 1) - Closing at 4 V - Closed W W Operating times at 0, x Us (Values apply to cold and warm coil) (Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time) - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms (... 65)) Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms Operating times at 1.0 x U s (Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time) - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ( )) Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Minimum command duration for closing Standard Reduced make-time ms ms Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1Switching resistive loads Rated operational currents Ie at 40 C up to 690 V at 55 C up to 690 V at 55 C up to 1000 V Rated power for C loads with p.f. = 0.95 at 55 C 415 V kw Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads with Ie Utilization category C- and C- Rated operational currents Ie at 40 C at 55 C mm mm x 40 x 185 up to 690 V 1000 V Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Utilization category C-4 (for Ia = 6 x Ie) Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz at 415 V kw Rated operational currents Ie Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz up to 690 V 1000 V at 0 V kw 415 V kw 500 V ) kw 690 V ) kw 1000 V ) Utilization category C-6a switching C transformers Rated operational currents Ie up to 400 V Rating P For inrush current n = V kv For inrush current n = 0 4) 415 V kv 6 97 Utilization category C-6b, switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) C capacitors Rated operational currents Ie up to 415 V 4 Rated power for single capacitors at 50 and 60 Hz Rated power for banks of capacitors (minimum inductance is 6 μh between capacitors connected in parallel) at 50 and 60 Hz at 0 V kvar 415 V kvar 500 V kvar 690 V kvar at 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kvar kvar kvar kvar Ie Ie < 800 : x ) t 4 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to ±10 % are possible. ) Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times. ) Max. permissible rated operational current Ie/C-4 = Ie/C- up to 500 V, for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency. 4) For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: Px = Pn0 0/x. /58

69 Power Contactors for Switching Motors TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Contactor Type Size Main circuit C capacity Short-time current carrying capacity ( s) TF68 14 Thermal current-carrying capacity s-current 1) Power loss per conducting path at Ie/C- /690 V W Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour No-load switching frequency C 1/h No-load switching frequency DC C-1 C- C- C-4 1/h Conductor cross-sections Main conductors: Screw terminals 1/h 1/h 1/h 1/h 1/h TF Busbar connections - stranded with cable lug - solid or stranded - connecting bar (max. width) mm mm WG mm / MCM / MCM 60 (Ue 50 (Ue > 690 V) M10 x 0 M1 x 40 - tightening torque Nm ( lb.in) ( lb.in) With box terminal ) - connectable copper bars - width - max. thickness - terminal screw - tightening torque uxiliary conductors: mm mm Nm mm mm mm WG Nm x 6 or x 11 /F 6 (hexagon socket) ( lb.in) x ( ) ) / x (1....5) ) x ( ) ) / x ( ) ) x ( ) x ( ) ( lb.in) CS and UL rated data Rated insulation voltage V C Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed Maximum horsepower ratings (CS and UL approved values) Rated power for induction motors at 60 Hz at 00 V 0 V 460 V 575 V NEM/EEMC ratings SIZE hp 6 7 Uninterrupted current Open Enclosed Rated power for induction motors at 60 Hz at 00 V 0 V 460 V 575 V hp hp hp hp hp hp hp hp Overload relays Type RB1 Setting range For short-circuit protection with overload relays see Protection Equipment: Overload Relays. 1) ccording to IEC ) See ccessories and Spare Parts x 46 or x 18 /F 8 (hexagon socket) ( lb.in) ) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping sections are used, this restriction does not apply. /59

70 Power Contactors for Switching Motors TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw TF6 vacuum contactors, -pole, kw Selection and ordering data uxiliary and control conductors: screw terminals Main conductors: busbar connections Size 14 IEC , EN (VDE 0660 Part 10) The TF68/69 contactors are climate-proof. ccessories and Spare Parts on page /56). TF68 Rated data uxiliary Rated control C- and C-, T contacts u : Up to 55 C C-1, Operational Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Operational Version current I e up to 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V current I e up to 690 V (at 40 C) kw kw kw kw kw NO NC V C operation 1) ) 50/60 Hz C C C C C C DC operation DC economy circuit DC 110 DC 0 DC DC 110 DC 0 DC C operation 50/60 Hz Version for C controls which are subject to strong electromagnetic interference C C C C C C For accessories, see page /188 For spare parts, see page /191 Screw terminals Order No. TF CF7 TF CM7 TF CQ7 TF CF7 TF CM7 TF CQ7 TF68-1DB4 TF68-1DF4 TF68-1DM4 TF69-1DB4 TF69-1DF4 TF69-1DM4 TF68-1QG7 TF68-1QL7 TF68-1QV7 TF69-1QG7 TF69-1QL7 TF69-1QV7 1) Built-in surge suppression: varistor circuit. TF68/69 for 1000V application is available on request. /60

71 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Overview The R contactor assemblies for reversing can be ordered as follows: Size S00 and S0 Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. For assemblies with C operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V; a dead interval of 0 ms is recommended for use with voltages 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation. s individual parts for customer assembly. There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately. For overload relays for motor protection see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. The R contactor assemblies have screw or spring-type terminals (main and control circuits) and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 5mm standard mounting rails. Complete reversing contactor assemblies The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for The contactor assemblies size S00 and S0 each consist of contactors with the same power, with one NC contact (S00) or one NO contact and one NC contact (S0) in the basic unit. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock). For motor protection, either RU or RB overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation or thermistor motor protection tripping units must be ordered separately. Screw terminals Rated data C- and C- for 50 Hz 415 V C Size Order No. Rating Operational current I e interlock 1) assemblies kw 7 S00 RT R9 1-1 R 15-8XB RT R 16-8XB RT R 17-8XB RT R 18-8XB S0 RT0 4-1 R9-1 R 4-8XB RT0 5-1 R 5-8XB RT0 6-1 R 6-8XB RT0 7-1 R 7-8XB RT0 8-1 R 8-8XB0-1.. Spring-type terminals Rated data C- and C- for 50 Hz 415 V C Size Order No. Rating Operational current I e interlock 1) assemblies kw 7 S00 RT0 15- R9 1- ) R 15-8XB RT0 16- R 16-8XB RT0 17- R 17-8XB RT0 18- R 18-8XB S0 RT0 4- R9 - ) R 4-8XB RT0 5- R 5-8XB RT0 6- R 6-8XB RT0 7- R 7-8XB RT0 8- R 8-8XB0-.. 1) The interlock can only be ordered with assembly kit. ) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom (main, control and auxiliary circuits). Reversing contactor assemblies with communication interface The reversing contactor assemblies with communication interface are essential for mounting the SIRIUS function modules for connection to the control system. Components for customer assembly ssembly kits for all sizes are available for customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies. Contactors, overload relays and for momentary-contact operation auxiliary switch blocks for latching (required only for S00; with S0 the NO contacts integrated in the basic device can be used) must be ordered separately. ) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom (main circuits). Operating times The operating times of the individual RT0 contactors are rated in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making and the arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, providing they are interlocked by way of their auxiliary switches (NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. For assemblies with C operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V; a dead interval of 0 ms is recommended for use with voltages 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation. The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected by the mechanical interlock. /61

72 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th SIRIUS contactor assemblies R Innovations Device type (e. g. = reversing contactor assembly) Contactor size (1 = S00, = S0) Power dependent on size (e. g. 7 = 15 kw) Type of overload relay (8X = without) ssembly (B = ready-assembled, E = ready-assembled with communication) Interlock ( = mechanical and electrical) Free auxiliary switches (e. g. S00: 0 = none, S0: 0 = NO total) Connection type (1 = screw, = spring) Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. = C standard / without) Rated control supply voltage (e. g. L = 0 V, 50/60 Hz) Example R 7 8 X B 0 1 L Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. Using wiring kits for reversing starters has the following advantages: Notable reduction of wiring in the control circuit Integrated mechanical interlocking Prevention of wiring errors in the main circuit Connecting combs for screw terminals also result in: Prevention of wiring errors in the control circuit Reduction of testing costs Ready-jumpered actuation of the auxiliary switches and the frame () Integrated electrical interlocking ccessories Selecting the auxiliary switches The following points should be noted: Size S00 For maintained-contact operation: Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock. For momentary-contact operation: Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary switch block with at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor. Size S0 For maintained-contact operation: The contactors have two integrated auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC); the NC contact can be used for electrical interlocking. For momentary-contact operation: Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; the NO contact in the basic device can be used for the latching. Surge suppression Sizes S00 and S0 varistors for damping opening surges in the coil. s with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (S00) or be plugged into the front of the contactors (S0). /6

73 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Selection and ordering data Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S00 up to 7.5 kw Mountable accessories Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies ccessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page Q11 Q1 11 uxiliary switch block, front 1) RH /151 1 Contactor, kw RT0 15 RT0 15 /4 1 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH9 1-1D.. /161 1 Contactor, 4 kw RT0 16 RT0 16 /4 1 Surge suppressors RT /164 1 Contactor, 5.5 kw RT0 17 RT0 17 /4 14 Function module for connection to the control system 1) uxiliary switch block according to EN must be used. ) RT0 1. contactors with one NC contact in the basic unit are required for the electrical interlock. R7 1.-1B00 /145 1 Contactor, 7.5 kw RT0 18 RT0 18 / ssembly kit comprising: 4 Mechanical interlocks 5 connecting clips for contactors R9 1-1 /141 6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main current paths, electrical interlock included ), interruptible (NC contact interlock) /6

74 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies ) Size S00 up to 7.5 kw R 18-8XE0-1 BB4 R 1. -8XB R 1. -8XB0-. 0 Rated data C- and C- Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Operational current I e up to Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Order No. Order No. 415 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C DC operation R 15-8XB0-1B0 R 15-8XB0-1F0 R 15-8XB0-1P0 R 16-8XB0-1B0 R 16-8XB0-1F0 R 16-8XB0-1P0 R 17-8XB0-1B0 R 17-8XB0-1F0 R 17-8XB0-1P0 R 18-8XB0-1B0 R 18-8XB0-1F0 R 18-8XB0-1P0 R 15-8XB0-B0 R 15-8XB0-F0 R 15-8XB0-P0 R 16-8XB0-B0 R 16-8XB0-F0 R 16-8XB0-P0 R 17-8XB0-B0 R 17-8XB0-F0 R 17-8XB0-P0 R 18-8XB0-B0 R 18-8XB0-F0 R 18-8XB0-P DC R 15-8XB0-1BB4 R 15-8XB0-BB DC R 16-8XB0-1BB4 R 16-8XB0-BB DC R 17-8XB0-1BB4 R 17-8XB0-BB DC R 18-8XB0-1BB4 R 18-8XB0-BB4 With communication interface DC R 15-8XE0-1BB4 R 15-8XE0-BB DC R 16-8XE0-1BB4 R 16-8XE0-BB DC R 17-8XE0-1BB4 R 17-8XE0-BB DC R 18-8XE0-1BB4 R 18-8XE0-BB4 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. ) The contactors integrated in the contactor assemblies have no unassigned auxiliary contacts. /64

75 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S0 up to 18.5 kw Mountable accessories Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Individual parts Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page Q11 Q1 11 uxiliary switch block, front RH /151 1 Contactor, 5.5 kw RT0 4 RT0 4 /5 1 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH9 1-1D.. /161 1 Contactor, 7.5 kw RT0 5 RT0 5 /5 1 Surge suppressors RT /164 1 Contactor, 11 kw RT0 6 RT0 6 /5 15 Function module for connection to 1 Contactor, 15 kw RT0 7 RT0 7 /5 the control system 1 Contactor, 18.5 kw RT0 8 RT0 8 / ssembly kit comprising: 4 Mechanical interlocks 5 connecting clips for contactors R9-1 /141 6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main current paths, electrical interlock included (NC contact interlock) /65

76 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S0 up to 18.5 kw R 4-8XE0-1 BB4 R. -8XB0-1. R. -8XB0-. Rated data C- and C- Operational current I e up to Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Order No. Order No. 415 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C DC operation R 4-8XB0-1C R 4-8XB0-1G R 4-8XB0-1L R 5-8XB0-1C R 5-8XB0-1G R 5-8XB0-1L R 6-8XB0-1C R 6-8XB0-1G R 6-8XB0-1L R 7-8XB0-1C R 7-8XB0-1G R 7-8XB0-1L R 8-8XB0-1C R 8-8XB0-1G R 8-8XB0-1L Spring-type terminals R 4-8XB0-C R 4-8XB0-G R 4-8XB0-L R 5-8XB0-C R 5-8XB0-G R 5-8XB0-L R 6-8XB0-C R 6-8XB0-G R 6-8XB0-L R 7-8XB0-C R 7-8XB0-G R 7-8XB0-L R 8-8XB0-C R 8-8XB0-G R 8-8XB0-L DC R 4-8XB0-1BB4 R 4-8XB0-BB DC R 5-8XB0-1BB4 R 5-8XB0-BB DC R 6-8XB0-1BB4 R 6-8XB0-BB DC R 7-8XB0-1BB4 R 7-8XB0-BB DC R 8-8XB0-1BB4 R 8-8XB0-BB4 With communication interface DC R 4-8XE0-1BB4 R 4-8XE0-BB DC R 5-8XE0-1BB4 R 5-8XE0-BB DC R 6-8XE0-1BB4 R 6-8XE0-BB DC R 7-8XE0-1BB4 R 7-8XE0-BB DC R 8-8XE0-1BB4 R 8-8XE0-BB4 1) Coil operating range U s U s. /66

77 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Components for customer assembly R9-1 R9 - For contactors Size Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Type Order No. Order No. ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies RT0 1 S00-S00 The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 1-1 R9 1- RT0 S0-S0 The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9-1 1) R9 - Wiring modules (single) RT0 1 S00-S00 Top (in-phase) R9 1-D1 R9 1-D Bottom (with phase reversal) R9 1-E1 R9 1-E RT0 S0-S0 Top (in-phase) R9 -D1 R9 -D Bottom (with phase reversal) R9 -E1 R9 -E Mechanical connectors For lateral interlock, without switching interval RT0 1 S00-S00 For - and 4-pole contactors R9 1-H R9 1-H RT0 S0-S0 For - and 4-pole contactors R9 -H R9 -H 1) Version in size S0 with spring-type terminals: Only the wiring modules for the main circuit are included. No connectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit. /67

78 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R reversing contactor assemblies Components for customer assembly R7 11-1B00 R7 11-B00 For contactors Size Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Type Order No. Order No. Function modules for connection to the control system RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 S00, S0 IO-Link connection Comprising one basic and one coupling module and an additional module connector for assembling an IO-Link group S00, S0 S-Interface connection Comprising one basic and one coupling module ccessories for R7 function modules RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 Module connectors S00, S0 14-pole, 8 cm S00, S0 14-pole, 1 cm S00, S0 10-pole, 8 cm within an IO-Link group R7 11-1B00 R7 1-1B00 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE04 R7 11-B00 R7 1-B00 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE04 S00, S0 Sealable covers R R /68

79 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies Overview The R1 reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as follows: Sizes S and S Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. For assemblies with C operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V; a dead interval of 0 ms is recommended for use with voltages 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation. Sizes S to S1 s individual parts for customer assembly. There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately. For overload relays for motor protection see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays. The R1 contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rails. Complete units The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for The contactor assemblies consist of contactors with the same power, with one NC contact in the basic unit. The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock). For motor protection, either RU11 or RB. overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation or thermistor motor protection tripping units must be ordered separately. Components for customer assembly ssembly kits for all sizes are available for customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies. Contactors, overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of size S) and for momentary-contact operation auxiliary switch blocks for latching must be ordered separately. Rated data C- and C- for 50 Hz 400 V C Rating Size Order No. Operational Contactor Mechanical current I e interlock 1) Mechanical interlock ) Mechanical ssembly kit Fully wired and tested interlock ) contactor assemblies kw 15 S RT10 4 R R19 4-B R19-4) R1 4-8XB RT10 5 R1 5-8XB RT10 6 R1 6-8XB S RT10 44 R R19 4-B R19 4-4) R1 44-8XB RT10 45 R1 45-8XB RT10 46 R1 46-8XB S6 RT10 54 R R19 5-M 5) RT RT S10 RT10 64 R R19 6-5) 1 65 RT RT S1 RT10 75 R R19 7-5) RT ) Can be mounted onto the front. ) Laterally mountable with one auxiliary contact. ) Laterally mountable without auxiliary contact. 4) ssembly kit contains: connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom. 5) ssembly kit contains: wiring module on the top and bottom. /69

80 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies Selection and ordering data Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S up to kw Rated data C- and C- Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Operational current I e up to 500 V Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz 40 R1. -8XB ) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s C 0 C C 0 C C 0 C DC operation DC 4 DC 4 DC Order No. R1 4-8XB0-1G R1 4-8XB0-1L R1 5-8XB0-1G R1 5-8XB0-1L R1 6-8XB0-1G R1 6-8XB0-1L R1 4-8XB0-1BB4 R1 5-8XB0-1BB4 R1 6-8XB0-1BB4 Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following components: The connecting cables are not shown. ccessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page K1 K 1 Mechanical interlock, front R /7 1 Contactors, 15 kw RT10 4 RT10 4 /45 14 uxiliary switch block, front RH19 1-1C.. /176 1 Contactors, 18.5 kw RT10 5 RT10 5 /45 15 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH19 1-1E.. /177 1 Contactors, kw RT10 6 RT10 6 /45 16 Surge suppressors RT RT /179 /179 4 Mechanical interlock, lateral R19 4-B /7 5 6 Installation kit R19 - /7 The installation kit contains: 5 connecting clips for contactors with a clearance of 10 mm 6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main current paths /70

81 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S up to 45 kw Rated data C- and C- Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Operational current I e up to 500 V Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and Order No. 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz C 0 C R1 44-8XB0-1G R1 44-8XB0-1L C 0 C R1 45-8XB0-1G R1 45-8XB0-1L C 0 C DC operation R1 46-8XB0-1G R1 46-8XB0-1L R XB DC 4 DC 4 DC R1 44-8XB0-1BB4 R1 45-8XB0-1BB4 R1 46-8XB0-1BB4 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following components: The connecting cables are not shown. ccessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page K1 K 1 Mechanical interlock, front R /7 1 Contactors, 0 kw RT10 44 RT10 44 /45 14 uxiliary switch block, front RH19 1-1C.. /176 1 Contactors, 7 kw RT10 45 RT10 45 /45 15 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH19 1-1E.. /177 1 Contactors, 45 kw RT10 46 RT10 46 /45 16 Surge suppressors RT RT /179 /179 4 Mechanical interlock, lateral R19 4-B /7 5 6 Installation kit R19 4- /7 The installation kit contains: 5 connecting clips for contactors with a clearance of 10 mm 6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main current paths /71

82 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies Selection and ordering data Mechanical interlocks For contactors Type RT10 RT10 4 RT1 RT1 RT1 4 RT15 RT15 Size Version Order No. S S For lateral mounting 1) Each with one auxiliary contact (1 NC contact) per contactor (can only be used to connect contactors which are not more than 1 size larger or smaller. The mounting depth of the smaller contactor has to be adapted.) R19 4-B R mounted onto contactors RT10 RT10 4 S S For mounting to the front ) Onto contactors with sizes S0 to S (for contactors of the same size) Note: Sizes S and S: Use R19 -C mechanical connectors R RT1. 5 to RT1. 7 S6 S10 S1 For lateral mounting Without auxiliary contacts; size S6, S10 and S1 contactors can be interlocked with each other as required; no adaptation of mounting depth is necessary. Contactor clearance 10 mm. R R RT with RT10 5 S with S6 dapters, laterally mountable For mechanical interlocking of contactor S (only for C operation) with contactor S6 using R locking device (must be ordered separately) incl. connecting clips. R19 54-C R19 54-C Base plates RT10 5 RT1. 6 RT1. 7 S6 S10 S1 For customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies R19 5- R19 6- R19 7-1) Can also be used for 4-pole contactors with sizes S and S. ) Can also be used for size S0 4-pole contactors. /7

83 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies For Size Version Order No. contactors Type Installation kits for making -pole contactor assemblies RT10 S The installation kit contains: R19 - connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom R19 - RT10 4 S The installation kit contains: connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom R19 4- R19 4- RT10 5 S6 The installation kit contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom (for connection with box terminal) R19 5- RT10 5 RT1. 6 RT1. 7 S6 S10 S1 The installation kit contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom (for connection without box terminal) R19 5-M R19 6- R19 7- /7

84 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies SIRIUS R1 reversing contactor assemblies Wiring modules, single For contactors Type Size Contactor clearance mm Version RT10 S-S 10 top (in-phase) bottom (with phase reversal) RT10 4 S-S 10 top (in-phase) bottom (with phase reversal) RT10 5 S6-S6 10 top (in-phase, for connection with box terminal) Order No. R19 -D R19 -E R19 4-D R19 4-E R19 5-D R19 5-D top (with phase reversal, for connection without box terminal) R19 5-P R19 5-P Mechanical connectors For contactors Type RT1. RT1. 4 Size S-S S-S Contactor clearance mm 0 mountable on front Interlocking Version Order No. for -pole contactors 1 pack = 10 sets for 10 assemblies R19 -C R19 -C RT1. RT1. 4 RT1. 5 S-S S-S S6-S6 10 laterally mountable for -pole contactors R19 -D R19 -D RT1. S-S 10 laterally mountable for 4-pole contactors R19 -G R19 -G RT1. 4 S-S 10 laterally mountable for 4-pole contactors R19 4-G R19 4-G /74

85 SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Overview These R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are designed for standard applications. Note: Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting 1) or wye-delta starting of special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available from Technical ssistance. The R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be ordered as follows: Sizes S00 and S0 Fully wired and tested, with electrical and mechanical interlock. s individual parts for customer assembly. Screw terminals dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the function module for wye-delta starting. There is also a range of accessories (lateral auxiliary switch blocks, etc.) that must be ordered separately. For overload relays for motor protection see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays > RB Solid-State Overload Relays. The R4 contactor assemblies have screw or spring-type terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 5 mm standard mounting rails. With the fully wired and tested R4 contactor assemblies, the auxiliary contacts included in the basic devices are unassigned. Rated data at 50 Hz 415 V C Rating Size Operational Motor current Line/delta current I e contactor Star contactor Order No. complete kw S00-S00-S00 RT RT R4 15-8XF RT RT R4 16-8XF RT RT R4 17-8XF S0-S0-S0 RT0 4-1 RT0 4-1 R4-8XF RT0 6-1 RT0 4-1 R4 5-8XF RT0 6-1 RT0 4-1 R4 5-8XF RT0 7-1 RT0 6-1 R4 6-8XF-1... Spring-type terminals Rated data at 50 Hz 415 V C Rating Size Operational Motor current Line/delta current I e contactor Star contactor Order No. complete kw S00-S00-S00 RT0 15- RT0 15- R4 15-8XF RT0 17- RT0 15- R4 16-8XF RT0 18- RT0 16- R4 17-8XF S0-S0-S0 RT0 4- RT0 4- R4-8XF RT0 6- RT0 4- R4 5-8XF RT0 6- RT0 4- R4 5-8XF RT0 7- RT0 6- R4 6-8XF-... Note: Motor protection Overload relays or thermistor motor protection releases can be used for overload protection. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor current. Surge suppression Sizes S00 and S0 Surge suppression (varistor) is included in the function modules for wye-delta starting. Function modules for wye-delta starting The R8 16-0EW0 wye-delta function module replaces the complete wiring in the control circuit and can be used in the voltage range from 4 to 40 V C/DC. It is snapped onto the front of the contactor assembly size S00 or S0. One function module comprises a complete module kit: One R9 1-0 basic module with integrated control logic and time setting, and two R coupling modules with related connecting cables. The scope of supply thus comprises a complete module kit for one contactor assembly for wye-delta starting size S00 or S0, regardless of the connection method. /75

86 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Components for customer assembly ssembly kits with wiring modules and mechanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting. Contactors, overload relays, function modules for wye-delta starting or wye-delta timing relays, auxiliary switches for electrical interlock if required also feeder terminals and base plates must be ordered separately. The wiring kits for sizes S00 and S0 contain the top and bottom main conducting path connections between the line and delta contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors (bottom). Control circuit Features: Time setting range 0.5 to 60 s ( selectable settings) Wide voltage range 4 to 40 V C/DC Dead interval of 50 ms, non-adjustable. Screw terminals Rating ccessories for customer assembly Function modules for wye-delta starting ssembly kit B, for single infeed Overload relay, thermal (CLSS 10 trip class) Overload relay, solid-state (CLSS 10 trip class) Star jumper Setting range Order No. Setting range Order No. kw 5.5 R8 16-0EW0 R9 1-BB1 1) RT9 16-4B RU1 16-1HB RB0 16-1TB RU1 16-4B0 11 R8 16-0EW0 R9 -BB1 ) RT9 6-4B RU1 6-4B RB0 6-1QB RU1 6-4BB RU1 6-4DB RU1 6-4DB0 Spring-type terminals Rating ccessories for customer assembly Function modules for wye-delta starting ssembly kit B, for single infeed Overload relay, thermal (CLSS 10 trip class) Overload relay, solid-state (CLSS 10 trip class) Star jumper Setting range Order No. Setting range Order No. kw 5.5 R8 16-0EW0 R9 1-BB 1) RT9 16-4B RU1 16-1HC RB0 16-1TE RU1 16-4C0 11 R8 16-0EW0 R9 -BB ) RT9 6-4B RU1 6-4C RB0 6-1QE RU1 6-4BC RU1 6-4DC RU1 6-4DC0 1) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper and auxiliary circuit wiring. Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd ) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor); star jumper. 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th SIRIUS contactor assemblies R Innovations Device type (e. g. 4 = contactor assembly for wye-delta starting) 4 Contactor size (1 = S00, = S0) Power dependent on size (e. g. 5 = 15 kw) Type of overload relay (8X = without) ssembly (B = ready-assembled, E, H = ready-assembled with communication) Interlock ( = mechanical and electrical) Free auxiliary switches (e. g. S00: 1 = NO total, S0: = NO + NC total) Connection type (1 = screw, = spring) Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. = C standard / without) Rated control supply voltage (e. g. L = 0 V, 50/60 Hz) Example R X F 1 L Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. /76

87 SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting identical to those of the individual RT contactors and RU overload relays Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Type R4 15 R4 16 R4 17 R4 R4 5 R4 6 Sizes S..-S..-S Dimensions (W x H x D) with function module 1) C operation mm 15 x 68 x 145 / 15 x 84 x x101 x 171 / 15 x114 x 171 DC operation mm 15 x 68 x 145 / 15 x 84 x x101 x 181 / 15 x114 x 181 General data Individual contactors Q11 line contactor Q1 delta contactor Q1 star contactor Mechanical endurance Short-circuit protection Main circuit without overload relays ) Type Type Type Operating cycles RT0 15 RT0 15 RT0 15 million RT0 17 RT0 17 RT0 15 RT0 18 RT0 18 RT0 16 RT0 4 RT0 4 RT0 4 RT0 6 RT0 6 RT0 4 Fuse links, operational class gg : Type NH N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE with single or double infeed Highest rated current of the fuse acc. to IEC /EN Type of coordination Type of coordination Control circuit Fuse links, operational class gg : Type DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (short-circuit current I k 1 k) Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic Main circuit Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s Rated operational current I e Rated power for induction motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz t 400 V 500 V 690 V t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V V kw kw kw kw kw 10 6 ), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected in the contactor coil circuit 10 6 ), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected in the contactor coil circuit Switching frequency with overload relay h Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 15 s Rated operational current I e t 400 V 500 V 690 V Rated power for induction motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V V kw kw kw kw kw Switching frequency with overload relay h Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 0 s Rated operational current I e t 400 V 500 V 690 V Rated power for induction motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V V kw kw kw kw kw Switching frequency with overload relay h RT0 7 RT0 7 RT ) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals. ) For short-circuit protection with overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays > RB Solid-State Overload Relays. ) Up to I k < 0.5 k; 60 V. /77

88 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Selection and ordering data Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S00-S00-S00 up to 11 kw SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Mountable accessories Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Individual parts Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page Q11 1) Q1 ) Q1 ) 16 Three-phase feeder terminal ) R9 1-K /8 1 Contactor, 5.5 kw RT0 15 RT0 15 RT0 15 /4 1 Contactor, 7.5 kw RT0 17 RT0 17 RT0 15 /4 1 Contactor, 11 kw RT0 18 RT0 18 RT0 16 / ssembly kit comprising: R9 1-BB1 /8 4 Mechanical interlock 5 4 connecting clips 6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main current paths 7 Function modules for wye-delta starting R8 16-0EW0 1) Use version with 1 NO. ) Use version with 1 NC. ) Part 16 can only be mounted with contactors with screw terminal. Note: When using the function modules for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. /78

89 SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S00-S00-S00 up to 11 kw SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting R XE1-BB4 R XF R XF1-.0 Rated data C- Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Operational current I e up to Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Order No. Order No. 415 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C DC operation R4 15-8XF1-1B0 R4 15-8XF1-1F0 R4 15-8XF1-1P0 R4 16-8XF1-1B0 R4 16-8XF1-1F0 R4 16-8XF1-1P0 R4 17-8XF1-1B0 R4 17-8XF1-1F0 R4 17-8XF1-1P0 R4 15-8XF1-B0 R4 15-8XF1-F0 R4 15-8XF1-P0 R4 16-8XF1-B0 R4 16-8XF1-F0 R4 16-8XF1-P0 R4 17-8XF1-B0 R4 17-8XF1-F0 R4 17-8XF1-P DC R4 15-8XF1-1BB4 R4 15-8XF1-BB DC R4 16-8XF1-1BB4 R4 16-8XF1-BB DC R4 17-8XF1-1BB4 R4 17-8XF1-BB4 For IO-Link connection DC R4 15-8XE1-1BB4 R4 15-8XE1-BB DC R4 16-8XE1-1BB4 R4 16-8XE1-BB DC R4 17-8XE1-1BB4 R4 17-8XE1-BB4 For S-Interface connection DC R4 15-8XH1-1BB4 R4 15-8XH1-BB DC R4 16-8XH1-1BB4 R4 16-8XH1-BB DC R4 17-8XH1-1BB4 R4 17-8XH1-BB4 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. /79

90 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S0-S0-S0 up to kw SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Mountable accessories Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Individual parts Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page Q11 Q1 Q1 16 Three-phase feeder terminal 1) RV9 5-5B /8 1 Contactor, 11 kw RT0 4 RT0 4 RT0 4 /5 17 Three-phase busbar 1) RV B /8 1 Contactor, 15/18.5 kw RT0 6 RT0 6 RT0 4 /5 1 Contactor, kw RT0 7 RT0 7 RT0 6 / ssembly kit R9 -BB1 /8 The assembly kit contains: 4 Mechanical interlock 5 Connecting clips 6 Wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the main current paths 7 Function modules for wye-delta starting R8 16-0EW0 1) The parts 16 and 17 Can only be mounted with contactors with screw terminal. Note: When using the function modules for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. /80

91 SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S0-S0-S0 up to kw SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting R4. -8XE-1BB4 R4. -8XF-1. R4. -8XF-. Rated data C- Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Operational current I e up to Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Order No. Order No. 415 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz C 110 C 0 C / / C 110 C 0 C C 110 C 0 C DC operation R4-8XF-1C R4-8XF-1G R4-8XF-1L R4 5-8XF-1C R4 5-8XF-1G R4 5-8XF-1L R4 6-8XF-1C R4 6-8XF-1G R4 6-8XF-1L R4-8XF-C R4-8XF-G R4-8XF-L R4 5-8XF-C R4 5-8XF-G R4 5-8XF-L R4 6-8XF-C R4 6-8XF-G R4 6-8XF-L DC R4-8XF-1BB4 R4-8XF-BB4 / / DC R4 5-8XF-1BB4 R4 5-8XF-BB DC R4 6-8XF-1BB4 R4 6-8XF-BB4 For IO-Link connection DC R4-8XE-1BB4 R4-8XE-BB4 / / DC R4 5-8XE-1BB4 R4 5-8XE-BB DC R4 6-8XE-1BB4 R4 6-8XE-BB4 For S-Interface connection DC R4-8XH-1BB4 R4-8XH-BB4 / / DC R4 5-8XH-1BB4 R4 5-8XH-BB DC R4 6-8XH-1BB4 R4 6-8XH-BB4 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. /81

92 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Components for customer assembly SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting R9 -BB1 R9 -BB For contactors Size Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Type Order No. Order No. ssembly kits 1) for making -pole contactor assemblies RT0 1 S00 The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips, star jumper, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 1-BB1 R9 1-BB RT0 S0 The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips, star jumper, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 -BB1 ) R9 -BB RV9 5-5B RV B RT B1 RT9 16-4B Three-phase feeder terminals Feeder terminal blocks for the line contactor for large conductor cross-sections RT0 1 S00 R9 1-K RT0 S0 RV9 5-5B Three-phase busbars RT0 S0 Bridging phase-by-phase of all input terminals of the line contactor (Q11) and the delta contactor (Q1) Links for paralleling, -pole (star jumpers) RV B RT0 1 S00 Without connection terminal RT B1 RT9 16-4B RT0 S0 (the links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole) RT19 6-4B1 RT9 6-4B 1) When using the function modules for wye-delta starting, the wiring modules for the auxiliary current are not required. ) Version in size S0 with spring-type terminals: Only the wiring modules for the main circuit are included. No connectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit. /8

93 SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Components for customer assembly Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R4 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting R8 16-0EW0 R7 1-1C00 R7 11-C00 For contactors Size Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Type Order No. Order No. Function modules for wye-delta starting RT0 1, RT0 S00, S0 Comprising one basic module and two coupling modules Rated control supply voltage V C/DC Time setting range s (10, 0, 60 s selectable) ccessories for R8 function modules RT0 1, RT0 R8 16-0EW0 R8 16-0EW0 S00, S0 Sealable covers R R Function modules for wye-delta starting for connection to the control system RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 S00, S0 IO-Link connection Comprising one basic module and two coupling modules, plus an additional module connector for assembling an IO-Link group S00, S0 S-Interface connection Comprising one basic module and two coupling modules ccessories for R7 function modules RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 RT0 1, RT0 Module connectors S00, S0 14-pole, 8 cm long S00, S0 14-pole, 1 cm long S00, S0 10-pole, 8 cm long within an IO-Link group R7 11-1C00 R7 1-1C00 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE04 R7 11-C00 R7 1-C00 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE0 R7 11-0EE04 S00, S0 Sealable covers R R Note: When using the function modules for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. /8

94 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Overview These R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are designed for standard applications. Note: Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting 1) or wye-delta starting of special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available from Technical ssistance. The R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be ordered as follows: Sizes S and S: Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, reversing time up to 10 s. Sizes S to S1: s individual parts for customer assembly. dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the time relay function. There is also a range of accessories (auxiliary switch blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately. For overload relays for motor protection see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays > SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays. The R14 contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rails. Fully wired and tested R14 contactor assemblies have one unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the K delta contactor. With the preassembled contactor assembly sizes S and S, 11 to 75 kw, a timing relay is mounted on the side. Rated data at 50 Hz 415 V C Rating P kw Operational current I e Motor current Size Line/delta contactor Star contactor Order No. complete S-S-S0 RT10 4 RT10 6 R14 4-8XC RT S-S-S RT10 4 R14 5-8XC RT10 6 R14 6-8XC S-S-S RT10 44 RT10 5 R XC RT10 45 RT10 6 R XC S6-S6-S RT10 54 RT RT10 55 RT RT10 56 RT S10-S10-S6 RT10 64 RT RT10 65 RT S1-S1-S10 RT10 75 RT RT RT10 76 RT10 66 /84

95 SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Components for customer assembly ssembly kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timing relays, auxiliary switches for electrical interlock if required also feeder terminals, mechanical interlocks and base plates must be ordered separately. In the case of sizes S to S1 only the bottom main conducting path connection between the delta and star contactors is included in the wiring module, owing to the larger conductor cross-section at the infeed. Motor protection Overload relays or thermistor motor protection releases can be used for overload protection. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line contactor current. P kw ccessories for customer assembly Timing relays ssembly kit, for double infeed ssembly kit B, for single infeed Star jumper Base plates Setting range Overload relay, thermal (CLSS 10 trip class) Order No. Overload relay, solid-state (CLSS 10 trip class) Setting range Order No. RP N. 0 R19 -C 1) RV RT19 6-4B1 R19 -E RU11 6-4DB RB0 6-1UB RU11 6-4FB0 7 RP N. 0 R19 -B 1) RV RT19 6-4B1 R19 -F RU11 6-4GB RB0 6-1UB RU11 6-4HB0 55 RP N. 0 R19 4-C 1) RT19 6-4B1 R19 4-E RB0 46-1EB RU LB0 90 RP N. 0 R19 5-D ) RT B1 R19 5-E RB0 56-1FC RP N. 0 RT B1 R19 6-E RB0 66-1GC RB0 66-1MC 15 RP N. 0 RT B1 R19 7-E RB0 66-1MC ) ssembly kit contains wiring module on the bottom (connection between delta and star contactor) and star jumper. ) Wiring module on top from reversing contactor assembly (note conductor cross-sections). /85

96 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting identical to those of the individual RT1 contactors and RU1 overload relays SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Type R14 5 R14 6 R14 44 R14 45 Size S-S-S S-S-S S-S-S S-S-S Dimensions (W x H x D) with base plate mm 198 x 140 x x 180 x 07 mm 198 x 140 x x 180 x 194 General data Individual contactors Mechanical endurance Short-circuit protection Main circuit without overload relays 1) Fuse links gg Type NH N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE, with single or double infeed Highest rated current of the fuse acc. to IEC /EN Control circuit Type DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE (short-circuit current I k 1 k) Main circuit Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s I e 60 Hz and t 400 V 500 V 690 V t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V Type Type Type Operating cycles kw kw kw kw kw RT10 5 RT10 5 RT10 4 million 15 6 RT10 6 RT10 6 RT RT10 44 RT10 44 RT RT10 45 RT10 45 RT ), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected in the contactor coil circuit 10 6 ), if the auxiliary contact of the overload relay is connected in the contactor coil circuit Switching frequency with overload relay h Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 15 s I e t 400 V 500 V 690 V Hz and t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Switching frequency with overload relay h Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 0 s I e t 400 V 500 V 690 V Hz and t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V kw kw kw kw kw Switching frequency with overload relay h ) For short-circuit protection with overload relays see Protection Equipment > Overload Relays > SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays. ) Up to I k < 0.5 k; 60 V. /86

97 SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Selection and ordering data Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S-S-S0 up to 0 kw Rated data C- Operational current I e up to 415 V Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Order No. 50 / / C R14 4-8XC1-1L DC operation 50 / / DC R14 4-8XC1-1BB4 R14 4-8XC ) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following components: RT19 6-G... /17 uxiliary switch block ccessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page K1 K K 4 Mechanical interlock, lateral R19 4-B /7 1 Contactors, /0 kw RT10 4 RT10 4 RT10 6 /45 Depth compensation required K: 1.5 mm; K: 0 mm 1) 8 Timing relay, lateral RP N. 0 /176 7 Solid-state time-delay RH19 1-1C10 /176 auxiliary switch block, front ) 9 with 1 unassigned NO contact 15 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH19 1-1E.. / uxiliary switch block for local control 16 Surge suppressors RT RT /179 /179 units units RH19 1-1C01 RH19 1-1C phase feeder terminal RV /90 11 Base plate R19 -E / phase busbars RV /90 6 Installation kit R19 -C /90 19 Push-in lug ) for timing relay screw mounting The connecting cables are not shown. /176 /176 RP19 0 Chap 6 The installation kit contains the star jumper on the top and the wiring module on the bottom for connecting the main current paths. ) Generally possible. If a solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted onto the front of K, a standard auxiliary switch block can only be mounted onto the side. ) Not part of the scope of supply of the preassembled contactor assemblies; can be ordered as an accessory. /87

98 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S-S-S up to 45 kw SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting R14. -8XC Rated data C- Operational current I e up to 415 V Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Order No C R14 5-8XC1-1L C R14 6-8XC1-1L DC operation DC R14 5-8XC1-1BB DC R14 6-8XC1-1BB4 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following components: The connecting cables are not shown. ccessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page K1 K K 4 Mechanical interlock, lateral R19 4-B /7 1 Contactors, 7 kw RT10 5 RT10 5 RT10 4 /45 7 Solid-state time-delay auxiliary RT19 6-G... /17 1 Contactors, 45 kw RT10 6 RT10 6 RT10 4 /45 switch block, front 1) 8 Timing relay, lateral RP N. 0 /176 1 Mechanical interlock, front R /7 9 uxiliary switch block with 1 unassigned NO contact 15 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH19 1-1E.. / uxiliary switch block for local control 16 Surge suppressors RT RT /179 /179 units units RH19 1-1C10 /176 RH19 1-1C01 RH19 1-1C phase feeder terminals RV /90 11 Base plate R19 -F / phase busbars RV /90 6 Installation kit R19 -B /90 19 Push-in lug ) for timing relay screw mounting 1) Generally possible. If a solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted onto the front of K, a standard auxiliary switch block can only be mounted onto the side. /176 /176 RP19 0 Chap 6 The installation kit contains the star jumper on the top and the wiring module on the bottom for connecting the main current paths. ) Not part of the scope of supply of the preassembled contactor assemblies; can be ordered as an accessory. /88

99 SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies Fully wired and tested contactor assemblies Size S-S-S up to 75 kw Rated data C- Operational current I e up to 415 V Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw V C operation, 50/60 Hz SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals Order No C R XC1-1L C R XC1-1L DC operation DC R XC1-1BB DC R XC1-1BB4 R XC ) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s ; at 60 Hz: x U s. Mountable accessories (to be ordered separately): The fully wired and tested contactor assembly includes the following components: The connecting cables are not shown.... ccessories Order No. Page Individual parts Order No. Page K1 K K 4 Mechanical interlock, lateral R19 4-B /7 1 Contactors, 55 kw RT10 44 RT10 44 RT10 5 /45 Depth compensation required K: 0 mm; K: 7.5 mm 1) 1 Contactors, 75 kw RT10 45 RT10 45 RT10 6 /45 7 Solid-state time-delay auxiliary RT19 6-G /178 8 Timing relay, lateral RP N. 0 switch block, front ) 15 uxiliary switch block, lateral RH19 1-1E.. /177 9 uxiliary switch block with RH19 1-1C10 /176 1 unassigned NO contact 16 Surge suppressors RT / uxiliary switch block for local control 19 Push-in lug ) for timing relay RP19 0 Chap 6 screw mounting units RH19 1-1C01 /176 units RH19 1-1C10 / phase feeder terminal R19 4-L /90 11 Base plate R19 4-E /90 6 Installation kit R19 4-C /90 The installation kit contains the star jumper on the top and the wiring module on the bottom for connecting the main current paths. ) Not part of the scope of supply of the preassembled contactor assemblies; ) Generally possible. If a solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is can be ordered as an accessory. mounted onto the front of K, a standard auxiliary switch block can only be mounted onto the side. /89

100 Contactor ssemblies R, R1, R4, R14 Contactor ssemblies SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Components for customer assembly SIRIUS R14 contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting Version Size Order No. ssembly kits R19 5-B The assembly kit contains: star jumper, wiring module on the bottom (Wiring module on the top is not included in the scope of supply. double infeed between the line contactor and the delta contactor is recommended.) S-S-S0 S-S-S S-S-S R19 -C R19 -B R19 4-C S-S-S R19 4-B S6-S6-S6 R19 5-B S6-S6-S6 R19 5-N S10-S10-S10 R19 6-B S1-S1-S1 R19 7-B R19 5-N, R19 6-B, R19 7-B Single-phase feeder terminals Conductor cross-section: 95 mm S R19 4-L Three-phase feeder terminals Feeder terminal block for the line contactor for large conductor cross-sections Conductor cross-section: 50 mm S RV Three-phase busbars Bridging phase-by-phase of all input terminals of the line contactor (K1) and the delta contactor (K) S RV Links for paralleling, -pole (star jumpers) Without connection terminal (the links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole) S S S6 1) S10, S1 1) RT19 6-4B1 RT B1 RT B1 RT B1 RT19 6-4B1 Base plates For customer assembly of contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting with a laterally mounted timing relay Side-by-side mounting 10 mm distance between K and K Side-by-side mounting S, S, S0 S, S, S S, S, S 10 mm distance between K1, K and K S6, S6, S S6, S6, S6 S10, S10, S6 S10, S10, S10 S1, S1, S10 S1, S1, S1 For customer assembly of contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting with a front-mounted timing relay, 10 mm distance between K1, K and K S, S, S0 S, S, S S, S, S R19 -E R19 -F R19 4-E R19 5-E R19 5-F R19 6-E R19 6-F R19 7-E R19 7-F R19 -B R19 -B R19 4-B 1) The RT E1 (S6) or RT E1 (S10, S1) cover can be used for touch protection. /90

101 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are RT14 contactors are used for switching resistive loads (C-1) or as contactors, for example for variable-speed operating mechanisms that normally only have to carry the current. Size S: C or DC operation Sizes S6 to S1: C/DC operation The following applies for sizes S6 to S1: Withdrawable coils Integrated coil circuit (varistor) Main conductors: busbar connections uxiliary and control conductors: Screw terminals The accessories for the RT10 contactors can also be used here. For more detailed descriptions about the sizes S to S1, see RT10 Contactors, -pole, to 50 kw. Type RT14 46 RT14 56 RT14 66 RT14 76 Size S S6 S10 S1 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 70 x 146 x x 17 x x 10 x x 14 x 5 block mm 70 x 146 x x 17 x x 10 x x 14 x 71 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance in operating cycles Utilization category C-1 at I e Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) Operating cycles Operating cycles 10 million 0.5 million V Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 8 Protective separation between the coil and the main V 690 contacts acc. to EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 (terminal compartment IP00), C coil assembly IP40, IP00/open, coil assembly IP0 DC coil assembly IP0 Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe Finger-safe with cover Shock resistance g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10 8.5/5 and 4./10 g/ms 10.6/5 and 6./10 1.4/5 and 6.5/10 Conductor cross-sections 1) 1) 1) For conductor cross-sections see pages /94 to /95. /91

102 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Contactor Type RT14 46 RT14 56 RT14 66 RT14 76 Size S S6 S10 S1 Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays Main circuit - Type of coordination Type of coordination uxiliary circuit (weld-free protection at I k Type DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE 10 I k < 400 ) 10 Control circuit Coil operating range (C/DC) x U s 0.8 x U s min x U s max Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) Standard version: Closing P.f. Closed P.f. Closing P.f. Closed P.f. V V 0.7 V 98/74 0.7/0.6 V 7/0 0.9/0.1 Closing = Closed W 15 1) Operating times for x U s Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time - Closing delay - Opening delay - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms ms ms Operating times for 1.0 x U s 1) - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor + ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: to 6 times). /9

103 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Contactor Type RT14 46 RT14 56 RT14 66 RT14 76 Size S S6 S10 S1 Control circuit Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time) - For 0.8 x U s min x U s max Closing delay Opening delay - For U s min... U s max Closing delay Opening delay - For 0.8 x U s min x U s max Closing delay Opening delay - For U s min... U s max Closing delay Opening delay - For 0.8 x U s min x U s max Closing delay Opening delay - For U s min... U s max Closing delay Opening delay ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms Contactor Type RT14 46 RT14 56 RT14 66 RT14 76 Size S S6 S10 S1 Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e ) with p.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C) t 40 C up to 690 V t 60 C up to 690 V t 1000 V t 40 C for loads with I e t 60 C ) 50 t 415 V kw mm 50 mm 50 Utilization categories C- and C- With an electrical endurance of 1. million operating cycles I e Up to 690 V squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz (at 60 C) t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw Power loss per conducting path t I e /C-1 W Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour Dependence of the switching frequency z on the operational current I and operational voltage U :z = z (I e /I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h. No-load switching frequency C No-load switching frequency DC cc. to C-1 (C/DC) cc. to C- (C/DC) 1/h 1/h 1/h 1/h 1) 600 for RT14 76-N contactor. ) Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account) x x 40 x /9

104 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Contactor Type RT14 46 Size S Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors can be connected) Front clamping point connected Rear clamping point connected Both clamping points connected Connection for drilled copper bars Main conductors: Screw terminals With box terminal mm² mm² mm² mm² mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 (number x width x thickness) WG /0 mm² mm² mm² mm² mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 (number x width x thickness) WG /0 mm² max. x 5 mm² max. x 5 mm² max. x 16 mm² max. x 50 mm x (6 x 9 x 0.8) (number x width x thickness) WG x ( /0) - Tightening torque Nm lb.in Max. width 1) mm 10 Main conductors: Without box terminal with cable lugs ) mm² ) mm² ) M6 (hexagon socket, /F 4) WG /0 uxiliary conductors: mm² x ( ) 4) ; x ( ) 4) acc. to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm² x ( ) 4) ; x ( ) 4) WG x ( ); x ( ); 1 x 1 - Tightening torque Nm lb.in M ) If bars larger than 1 x 10 mm are connected, a RT E1 terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. ) When connecting rails which are larger than 5 mm², he RT E1 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. ) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 464. Cable lug max. 0 mm wide. 4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply. /94

105 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Contactor Type RT14 56 RT14 66 RT14 76 Size S6 S10 S1 Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors can be connected) Front or rear clamping point connected Both clamping points connected Front clamping point connected Rear clamping point connected Both clamping points connected Main conductors Screw terminals With RT G box terminal mm² mm² mm² WG 6... /0 (number x width x thickness) mm x 9 x x 15.5 x 0.8 mm² 1 x 50, 1 x 70 mm² 1 x 50, 1 x 70 mm² x 70 WG x 1/0 mm x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) (number x width x thickness) - Tightening torque Nm lb.in With RT G box terminal mm² mm² mm² WG kcmil / kcmil (number x width x thickness) mm x 9 x x 15.5 x 0.8 Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 0 x 4 x 0.5 mm² mm² mm² WG kcmil kcmil (number x width x thickness) mm x 9 x x 15.5 x 0.8 Min. 6 x 9 x 0.8, max. 0 x 4 x 0.5 mm² Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 10 Min. x 50, max. x 185 mm² Max. 1 x 95, 1 x 10 Min. x 50, max. x 185 mm² Max. x 10 Min. x 70, max. x 40 WG Max. x /0 Min. x /0, max. x 500 kcmil (number x width x thickness) mm Max. x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8) Max. x (0 x 4 x 0.5) - Tightening torque Nm lb.in Without box terminal/busbar connection M10 (hexagon socket, /F4) ) ) M1 (hexagon socket, /F 5) mm² mm² WG kcmil / kcmil mm Tightening torque Nm uxiliary conductors M8 x 5 (/F 1) ( ) lb.in M10 x 0 (/F 17) ( lb.in) mm² x ( ) ) ; x ( ) ) according to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm² x ( ) ) ; x ( ) ) WG x ( ) - Tightening torque Nm lb.in 1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 465, use RT E1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm to ensure phase spacing. ) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 464, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 40 mm² and more as well as DIN 465 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to keep the phase clearance. ) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply. M (PZ ) M (PZ ) /95

106 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Selection and ordering data Size S: C or DC operation RT Size Rated data C-1, T u : 40 C uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage Us Screw terminals Operational current I e up to Rating of C loads (p f. = 0.95) at Version Order No. 690 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw NO NC V For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 and TH 75 standard mounting rail C operation S C, 50 Hz 110 C, 50 Hz 0 C, 50 Hz DC operation DC solenoid system S DC 0 DC Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. RT B00-8K RT F00-8K RT P00-8K RT BB40 RT BM40 /96

107 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, SIRIUS RT14 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), -pole, Sizes S6 to S1: UC operation (C/DC) Integrated coil circuit (varistor) Main conductors: Busbar connections uxiliary and control conductors: Screw terminals RT14 6. Size Rated data C-1, T u : 40 C uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Operational current I e up to Rating of C loads (p f. = 0.95) at Version Order No. 690 V 0 V 415 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw NO NC V Conventional operating mechanisms S S S RT F6-8K RT P6-8K RT F6-8K RT P6-8K RT F6-8K RT P6-8K Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. /97

108 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are The accessories for the -pole SIRIUS RT0 contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions. Size S0 contactors have auxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC integrated in the basic unit. Mountable auxiliary contacts Size S00 4 auxiliary contacts, including no more than NC. Size S0 4 additional auxiliary contacts. pplication The contactors are suitable for: Switching resistive loads Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral conductors System transfers when alternative C power supplies are used Use as contactors which only carry current and do not have to switch in case of inductive loads e. g.variable-speed operating mechanisms Switching mixed loads in distribution systems (e. g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors, PC power supply units) with p.f. > 0.8 according to IEC , test conditions for -utilization category C-1. Type RT 16 RT 17 RT 5 RT 6 RT 7 Size S00 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) 1) mm 45 x 57.5 x 7 / 45 x 70 x 7 mm 45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x 11 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. 60 x 85 x 97 / 60 x x x 85 x 141 / 60 x x 144 Mechanical endurance Operating 0 million 10 million cycles Electrical endurance at I e /C-1 Operating pprox. 0.5 million cycles Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (pollution degree ) Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 IP0 IP00 Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays Main circuit Fuse links, operational class gg : Type LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE cc. to IEC /EN ) 5 6 1) ) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals Size S0 for C operation. DC operation: Depth + 10 mm. /98

109 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Type RT 16 RT 17 RT 5 RT 6 RT 7 Size S00 S0 Control circuit Coil operating range t 50 Hz t 60 Hz t 50 C t 60 C x U s x U s x U s x U s x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V V 7/4. 0.8/0.75 V 4./. 0.5/0.5 7/ 0.8/ / /0.5 W /79 0.7/ / /0.8 1) Operating times for x U s Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms - Closing delay ms ms ms Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 C) t 40 C, up to 690 V t 60 C, up to 690 V t 0 V 415 V t 40 C for loads with I e t 60 C kw kw mm.5 mm Utilization categories C- and C- I e t 60 C, up to 400 V motors at 50 and 60 Hz t 0 V 415 V 1) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at x U s. kw kw /99

110 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Selection and ordering data C operation RT RT RT RT Rated data C-1, T u : 40/60 C uxiliary contacts Rated control supply Screw terminals Spring-type terminals voltage U s Operational current I e Ratings of C loads (p.f. = 0.95) at 50 Hz and 415 V Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. kw NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 1) 18 / 16 1 / 11 4, 50/60 Hz 110, 50/60 Hz 0, 50/60 Hz / / 1 4, 50/60 Hz 110, 50/60 Hz 0, 50/60 Hz Size S , 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz 5 / 0 ) / , 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz 40 / 5 ) 6 / , 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz 50 ) , 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz RT 16-1B00 RT 16-1F00 RT 16-1P00 RT 17-1B00 RT 17-1F00 RT 17-1P00 RT 4-1B00 RT 4-1F00 RT 4-1P00 RT 5-1B00 RT 5-1F00 RT 5-1P00 RT 6-1B00 RT 6-1F00 RT 6-1P00 RT 7-1B00 RT 7-1F00 RT 7-1P00 RT 16-B00 RT 16-F00 RT 16-P00 RT 17-B00 RT 17-F00 RT 17-P00 RT 5-B00 RT 5-F00 RT 5-P00 RT 6-B00 RT 6-F00 RT 6-P00 RT 7-B00 RT 7-F00 RT 7-P00 Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /158. For spare parts, see page /168. 1) For size S00: Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s, at 60 Hz: x U s. ) Minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm². /100

111 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, DC operation DC solenoid system RT RT RT RT Rated data C-1, T u : 40/60 C Operational current I e Ratings of C loads (p.f. = 0.95) at 50 Hz and 415 V uxiliary contacts Rated control supply Screw terminals Spring-type terminals voltage U s Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. kw NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 18 / 16 1 / / / Size S / 0 1) / / 5 1) 6 / ) RT 16-1BB40 RT 16-1BM40 RT 17-1BB40 RT 17-1BM40 RT 4-1BB40 RT 4-1BM40 RT 5-1BB40 RT 5-1BM40 RT 6-1BB40 RT 6-1BM40 RT 7-1BB40 RT 7-1BM40 RT 16-BB40 RT 16-BM40 RT 17-BB40 RT 17-BM40 RT 5-BB40 RT 5-BM40 RT 6-BB40 RT 6-BM40 RT 7-BB40 RT 7-BM40 Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /158. For spare parts, see page /168. 1) Minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm². /101

112 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are The accessories for the -pole SIRIUS RT10 contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions. The contactors are also suitable for switching mixed loads in distribution systems (e. g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors, PC power supply units) with p.f. > 0.8 according to IEC , test conditions for utilization category C-1. Type RT1 6 RT1 44 RT1 46 Size S S S Dimensions (W x H x D) 1) mm 61 x 85 x 86 7 x 11 x x 146 x 14 mm 61 x 85 x 15 7 x 11 x x 146 x 18 General data Permissible mounting position 1) Mechanical endurance Electrical endurance at I e /C-1 Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) Permissible ambient temperature Degree of protection cc. to EN , ppendix C Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Device Connection range Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays Main circuit Fuse links, operational class gg Type LV HRC, N, DIZED, 5SB, NEOZED, 5SE cc. to IEC /EN Control circuit Coil operating range (C/DC) 1) 1) Operating cycles Operating cycles V 690 C C 10 million pprox. 0.5 million IP0 IP00 Finger-safe x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V V V Closing V 170/155 - P.f. 0.76/0.7 - Closed V 15/ P.f. 0.5/0.8 - Closing = Closed W /74 0.7/0.6 7/0 0.9/ ) Operating times for x U s Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time - Closing delay - Opening delay - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms ms ms Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 C) t 40 C, up to 690 V t 60 C, up to 690 V t 0 V 415 V I e t 40 C t 60 C Utilization categories C- and C- I e t 60 C, up to 400 V 6 or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz t 0 V 400 V 1) In accordance with the corresponding -pole RT1 contactors. ) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at x U s. kw kw mm² mm² kw kw /10

113 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Selection and ordering data C operation, 4 NO contacts Rated data C-1, T u : 40/60 C Operational current I e Ratings of C loads (p.f. = 0.95) at 50 Hz and RT Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Order No. 415 V kw V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 and EN / 55 9 / 6 4, 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz Size S Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 and EN , 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz 110 / / 66 4, 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz 140 / 10 9 / 79 4, 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. RT1 6-1B00 RT1 6-1F00 RT1 6-1P00 RT1 4-1B00 RT1 4-1F00 RT1 4-1P00 RT1 44-1B00 RT1 44-1F00 RT1 44-1P00 RT1 46-1B00 RT1 46-1F00 RT1 46-1P00 /10

114 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, SIRIUS RT1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, DC operation DC solenoid system, 4 NO contacts Rated data C-1, T u : 40/60 C Operational current I e Ratings of C loads (p.f. = 0.95) at 50 Hz and RT RT Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Order No. 415 V kw V DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 or EN / 55 9 / Size S Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 or EN / / / 10 9 / Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. RT1 6-1BB40 RT1 6-1BM40 RT1 4-1BB40 RT1 4-1BM40 RT1 44-1BB40 RT1 44-1BM40 RT1 46-1BB40 RT1 46-1BM40 /104

115 Contactors for Special pplications TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The contactors also comply with the requirements of the standards NFC and NFC The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are The contactors are also suitable for switching mixed loads in distribution systems (e. g. for supplying heaters, lamps, motors, PC power supply units) with p.f. > 0.8 according to IEC , test conditions for utilization category C-1. Solenoid coils for TK10 to TK1 contactors: as withdrawable coils. Surge suppression Control circuit elements. Contactor Type TK1 Rated data of the auxiliary contacts cc. to IEC Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (pollution degree ) Conventional thermal current I th = 10 Rated operational current I e /C-1 C load Rated operational current I e /C-15/C-14 U e DC load Rated operational current I e /DC-1 U e Rated operational current I e /DC-1 U e and rating of the auxiliary contacts Rated voltage 4 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 0 V 80 V 400 V 500 V 660 V 690 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V V C, max. Switching capacity 600, P /105

116 Contactors for Special pplications TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Type TK10 TK11 TK1 TK1 TK14 TK15 TK17 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 165 x x x 198 x x 7 x 6 x 155 x 155 General data Permissible mounting positions Upright mounting position also permissible Mechanical endurance Operating cycles Mill Electrical endurance for I e /C-1 at 55 C Operating cycles Mill Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V mbient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP00 Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe with cover Shock resistance, sine pulse g/ms 10/15 Short-circuit protection Main circuit Fuse links gg, type NH N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE according to IEC / EN uxiliary circuit (short-circuit current I k 1 k), fuse links gg, type DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE Control circuit Coil operating range Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f V V V V x U s Operating times at 1.0 x U s ms ms ms Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e with p.f. = 0.95 (at 40 C) t 40 C up to 690 V t 50 C up to 690 V t 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V kw kw kw kw t 40 C mm² for load with I e Utilization categories C- and C- I e Up to 400 V slipring motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz t 0 V 400 V kw kw Switching frequency 1) Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour No-load switching 1/h 600 frequency C-1 1/h 00 C- 1/h 00 1) Dependence of the switching frequency z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z (I e /I ) (400 V/U ) 1.5 1/h /106

117 Contactors for Special pplications TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, TK1 contactors for resistive loads (C-1), 4-pole, 4 NO, Type TK10 TK11 TK1 TK1 TK14 TK15 TK17 General data Main conductors: Screw terminals mm x 70 x 10 x 10 x 00 MCM x 00 x 50 x 50 x 600 mm M6 M10 M10 M10 - Tightening torque Nm lb.in uxiliary conductors: mm x ( ) mm x ( ) MCM Tightening torque Nm 1. (10 lb.in) Selection and ordering data Screw terminals Rated data C-1 Operational current I e up to 690 V (at 40 C) uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s TK1 Screw terminals Ratings of C loads (p.f. = 0.95) at Version Order No. 0 V 415 V 690 V 1000 V kw kw kw kw NO NC V C C operation , 50 Hz , 50 Hz 110/10, 50/60 Hz 4, 50 Hz , 50 Hz , 50 Hz 110/10, 50/60 Hz 4, 50 Hz , 50 Hz , 50 Hz 110/10, 50/60 Hz 4, 50 Hz , 50 Hz , 50 Hz 110/10, 50/60 Hz 4, 50 Hz , 50 Hz 1) , 50 Hz 110/10, 50/60 Hz , 50 Hz 1) , 50 Hz 110/10, 50/60 Hz , 50 Hz 1) , 50 Hz 110/10 50/60 Hz For accessories see page /188 onwards. For spare parts, see page /191 onwards. 1) t 60 Hz: 40 V. TK10 4-0P0 TK10 4-0U0 TK10 4-0F0 TK10 4-0B0 TK11 4-0P0 TK11 4-0U0 TK11 4-0F0 TK11 4-0B0 TK1 4-0P0 TK1 4-0U0 TK1 4-0F0 TK1 4-0B0 TK1 4-0P0 TK1 4-0U0 TK1 4-0F0 TK1 4-0B0 TK14 4-0P0 TK14 4-0U0 TK14 4-0F0 TK15 4-0P0 TK15 4-0U0 TK15 4-0F0 TK17 4-0P0 TK17 4-0U0 TK17 4-0F0 /107

118 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are The accessories for the -pole SIRIUS RT0 contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions. pplication The contactors are suitable for: Changing the polarity of hoisting gear motors Switching two separate loads Note: Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty. RT5 contactors are not suitable for switching a load between current sources. Size S0 contactors have auxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC integrated in the basic unit. Mountable auxiliary contacts Size S00 and S0 4 additional auxiliary contacts, including no more than NC. Type RT5 16 RT5 17 RT5 18 RT5 6 Size S00 S00 S00 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) 1) mm 45 x 57.5 x 7 / 45 x 70 x 7 mm 45 x 57.5 x 116 / 45 x 70 x x 85 x 97 / 60 x x x 85 x 141 / 60 x x 144 General data Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operat. cycles 0 million 10 million Electrical endurance at I e /C-1 Operat. pprox. 0.5 million cycles Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 IP0 IP0 IP00 Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays Main circuit Fuse links, operational class gg Type LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE acc. to IEC /EN Control circuit Coil operating range t 50 Hz t 60 Hz t 50 Hz t 60 Hz x U s x U s x U s x U s x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils See RT 16 See RT 17 See RT 6 (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) Operating times for x U s Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time See RT 16 See RT 17 See RT 6 1) Dimensions for devices with screw terminals / spring-type terminals. Size S0 for C operation. DC operation: Depth +10 mm. /108

119 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw Type RT5 16 RT5 17 RT5 18 RT5 6 Size S00 S00 S00 S0 Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) t 40 C up to 690 V t 60 C up to 690 V t 0 V 415 V t 40 C mm for loads with I e Utilization categories C- and C- kw kw I e (at 60 C) motors at 50 and 60 Hz Up to 415 V / 0 1) t 0 V NO contacts at 415 V NC contacts at 415 V Load rating with DC Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive load (L/R 1 ms) I e (at 60 C) - 1 conducting path Up to 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V - conducting paths in series Up to 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V Utilization category DC-/DC-5 ), shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms) I e (at 60 C) - 1 conducting path Up to 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V - conducting paths in series Up to 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V kw kw kw ) For C operation: 5 ; for DC operation: 0. ) For U s >4 V the rated operational currents I e for the NC contact conducting paths are 50 % of the values for the NO contact conducting paths. /109

120 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw Selection and ordering data C operation, NO + NC 1) RT RT RT RT Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Spring-type terminals C-/C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and C-1, T u : 40/60 C Operational current I e Ident. No. Version t 415 V 415 V kw NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 ) / 16 4, 50/60 Hz 110, 50/60 Hz 0, 50/60 Hz ) / 0 4, 50/60 Hz 110, 50/60 Hz 0, 50/60 Hz ) / 0 4, 50/60 Hz 110, 50/60 Hz 0, 50/60 Hz Size S / , 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /158. For spare parts, see page /168. 1) Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty. ) For size S00: Coil operating range at 50 Hz: x U s at 60 Hz: x U s. ) The NC contact can switch no more than 4 kw. Order No. RT5 16-1B00 RT5 16-1F00 RT5 16-1P00 RT5 17-1B00 RT5 17-1F00 RT5 17-1P00 RT5 18-1B00 RT5 18-1F00 RT5 18-1P00 RT5 6-1B00 RT5 6-1F00 RT5 6-1P00 Order No. RT5 16-B00 RT5 16-F00 RT5 16-P00 RT5 17-B00 RT5 17-F00 RT5 17-P00 RT5 18-B00 RT5 18-F00 RT5 18-P00 RT5 6-B00 RT5 6-F00 RT5 6-P00 /110

121 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw SIRIUS RT5 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, kw DC operation NO + NC 1) RT RT RT RT Rated data uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Spring-type terminals C-/C-, T u : Up to 60 C Operational current I e Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and C-1, T u : 40/60 C Operational current I e Ident. No. Version t 415 V 415 V kw NO NC V DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S / Order No. RT5 16-1BB40 RT5 16-1BM ) / 0 4 RT5 17-1BB40 RT5 17-1BM ) / 0 4 RT5 18-1BB40 RT5 18-1BM40 Size S0 Order No. RT5 16-BB40 RT5 16-BM40 RT5 17-BB40 RT5 17-BM40 RT5 18-BB40 RT5 18-BM / DC 0 DC Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /158. For spare parts, see page /168. 1) Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty. ) The NC contact can switch no more than 4 kw. RT5 6-1BB40 RT5 6-1BM40 RT5 6-BB40 RT5 6-BM40 /111

122 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT15 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, 18.5 kw SIRIUS RT15 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, 18.5 kw Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are Note: Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty. RT15 contactors are not suitable for switching a load between two current sources. The accessories for the -pole SIRIUS RT10 contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions. Mountable auxiliary contacts Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts can be either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top (auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 or EN 50005). Type RT15 5 Size S Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 7 x 11 x 110 mm 7 x 11 x 160 General data Permissible mounting position 1) Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10 million Electrical endurance at I e /C-1 Operating pprox. 0.5 million cycles Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 (IP00 terminal compartment) Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Finger-safe Short-circuit protection of contactors without overload relays Main circuit With fuse links gg Type LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE acc. to IEC /EN Control circuit Coil operating range (C/DC) x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V V V Closing - P.f. - Closed - P.f. V V V V 170/ /0.7 15/ /0.8 W 1. ) Operating times for x U s Total break time = Opening delay + rcing time - Closing delay - Opening delay - Closing delay - Opening delay ms ms ms ms ms ) In accordance with the corresponding -pole RT1 contactors. ) With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at x U s /11

123 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT15 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, 18.5 kw SIRIUS RT15 contactors, 4-pole, NO + NC, 18.5 kw Contactor Type RT5 16 Size S00 Main circuit C capacity Utilization category C-1, switching resistive loads I e t 40 C up to 690 V t 60 C up to 690 V t 0 V 400 V I e t 40 C mm² 16 Utilization categories C- and C- I e (at 60 C) Up to 400 V 40 at 50 and 60 Hz t 0 V 400 V kw kw kw kw Selection and ordering data C and DC operation, NO contacts + NC contacts 1) Rated data C-/C-, T u : Up to 60 C C-1, T u : 40/60 C Operational current I e t 415 V Ratings of induction motors at 50 Hz and Operational current I e 415 V kw V Rated control supply voltage U s For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail C operation Size S Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 or EN / 50 4, 50 Hz 110, 50 Hz 0, 50 Hz DC operation DC solenoid system Size S Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 or EN / 50 4 DC 0 DC RT Screw terminals Order No. RT15 5-1B00 RT15 5-1F00 RT15 5-1P00 RT15 5-1BB40 RT15 5-1BM40 Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. For spare parts, see page /18. 1) Single device for pole reversal; not suitable for reversing duty. /11

124 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are Function The RT16 capacitor contactors are special version of the size S00 to S SIRIUS contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors. Capacitor switching capacity of the basic RT10 contactor version. uxiliary switches The auxiliary switch block which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the case of S00 one standard NC contact and in the case of S0 and S one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size S00 also contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a -pole auxiliary switch block can be mounted laterally on the RT16 47 capacitor contactors ( NO, NC or auxiliary switches for RT16 17 and RT16 7 is not expandable. are identical to those of the RT10 17 contactors for size S00, to those of the RT10 6 contactors for size S0 and to those of the RT10 45 contactors for size S. Type RT RT RT Size S00 S0 S Dimensions (W x H x D) mm including auxiliary switches and connecting cables General data Capacitor rating at rated power (utilization category C-6b) 0 V, 50/60 Hz 400 V, 50/60 Hz 55 V, 50/60 Hz 690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar kvar kvar kvar uxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO uxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes S00 and S0 NC + NO or 1 NO + 1 NC Coil operating range x U s Max. switching frequency h Electrical endurance Operating > > > cycles mbient temperature C 60 Standards IEC 60947/EN (VDE 0660) Short-circuit protection x I e Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors connectable) Main conductors Screw terminals mm² x ( ); x ( ) acc. to IEC 60947; max. x (1... 4) mm² x ( ); x ( ) - Solid - Solid or stranded - Stranded WG WG WG x ( ) x ( ) 1 x 1 x (1....5); x ( ) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10 1) x (1....5); x ( ) 1) x ( ) x ( ) 1 x 8 M M4 (Pozidriv size ) - Tightening torque Nmlb.in ) RV19 5-5B feeder terminal for 16 mm. /114

125 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar Contactor Type RT RT RT Size S00 S0 S Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors connectable) Front clamping point connected Main conductors: With box terminal (number x width x thickness) mm² mm² mm² mm² Screw terminals mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 WG /0 Rear clamping point connected (number x width x thickness) mm² mm² mm² mm² mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 WG /0 Both clamping points connected (number x width x thickness) mm² mm² mm² mm² max. x 5 max. x 5 max. x 16 max. x 50 mm x (6 x 9 x 0.8) WG x ( /0) - Tightening torque Nm lb.in Connection for drilled Max. width mm 10 copper bars 1) M6 (hexagon socket, /F 4) Without box terminal with cable lugs ) (1 or conductors can be connected) mm² mm² ) ) WG /0 uxiliary conductors: mm² x ( ) 4) ; x ( ) 4) acc. to IEC 60947; max. x (1... 4) mm² x ( ) 4) ; x ( ) 4) WG x ( ) 4) ; x ( ) 4) ; 1 x 1 - Tightening torque Nm lb.in cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. ) When connecting conductors which are larger than 5 mm, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. ) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 464. Cable lug max. 0 mm wide. 4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping sections are used, this restriction does not apply. M x ( ) 4) ; x ( ) 4) acc. to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) /115

126 Contactors for Special pplications SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar SIRIUS RT16 capacitor contactors, kvar Selection and ordering data C operation Screw terminals RT RT RT Utilization category C-6b Switching of C capacitors for an ambient temperature of 60 C 1) uxiliary contacts, unassigned Rated control supply voltage U s ) Screw terminals Capacitor rating at operational voltage 50/60 Hz Version Order No. t 0 V t 415 V t 55 V t 690 V kvar kvar kvar kvar NO NC V C Hz For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S Size S0 ) Size S / 60 RT B0 RT F0 RT P0 50 RT16 7-1B01 RT16 7-1F01 RT16 7-1P01 50 RT B01 RT F01 RT P01 Other voltages on request. For accessories, see page /176. 1) For size S: 55 C. ) Operating range: x U s. ) For conductor cross-sections > 6 mm use RV19 5-5B terminals ( units). /116

127 TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Contactors for Special pplications Contactors for Switching DC Voltage TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Overview TC4 and TC5 EN (VDE 0660 Part 10). The DC motor ratings given in the tables are applicable to the DC- and DC-5 utilization categories with two-pole switching of the load or with the two conducting paths of the contactor connected in series. One contactor conducting path can switch full power up to 0 V. The ratings for higher voltages are available on request. Contactor Type TC4 TC5 Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution ) Continuous thermal current Ith = Rated operational current Ie/C-1 C load Rated operational current Ie/C-15/C-14 for rated operational voltage Ue DC load Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 for rated operational voltage Ue Rated operational current Ie/DC-1 for rated operational voltage Ue 4 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 0 V 80 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 690 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 15 V 0 V 440 V 600 V V Contactor Type TC44... TC56 CS and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts Rated voltage V C, 600 max. Switching capacity 600, P 600 /117

128 Contactors for Special pplications Contactors for Switching DC Voltage TC contactors, 1- and -pole, TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Contactor Type TC44... TC56 Endurance of the main contacts TC44 and TC56 contactors Legend for the diagrams: Ia = Breaking current Contactor Type Size TC44 General data Permissible mounting position The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 10 million Electrical endurance Operating cycles 1) TC48 4 TC5 8 Rated insulation voltage Ui (degree of pollution ) V Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V up to 00 Up to 660 acc. to EN , ppendix N Mirror contacts ) mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed simultaneously with a NO main contact. Yes, acc. to EN , ppendix F Permissible ambient temperature During operation During storage C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP00/open, for C operation, coil assembly IP40 Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 7.5/5 and.4/10 10/5 and 5/10 1/5 and 5.5/10 1/5 and 5.6/10 Short-circuit protection Main circuit Fuse links gl/gg LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE Type of coordination 1 Type of coordination 50 5 uxiliary circuit (short-circuit current Ik 16 DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE TC ) See the endurance diagram above. ) For TC44, one NC contact each must be connected in series for the right and left auxiliary switch block respectively. /118

129 TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Contactors for Special pplications Contactors for Switching DC Voltage TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Contactor Control Magnetic coil operating range Type Size TC x Us Power consumption of the magnetic coils (for cold coil and 1.0 x Us) DC operation W C operation, 50 Hz coil V/p.f. V/p.f. 68/ /0.9 00/0.5 6/ / /0. C operation, 60 Hz coil V/p.f. 95/ / /0.8 V/p.f. 1/0. 5/0.6 56/0.4 C operation, 50/60 Hz coil V/p.f. 79/7/0.8/0.78 V/p.f. 11/9/0.8/0.7 Operating times (at x Us) (The values apply up to and including 0 % undervoltage, Total break time = opening delay + rcing time 10 % overvoltage, as well as when the coil is cold and warm) Closing delay ms Opening delay 1) ms Closing delay ms Opening delay 1) ms DC-1 ms 0 DC-/DC-5 ms 0 Main circuit DC capacity Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms) Rated operational currents Ie up to Ue 750 V (at 55 C) Minimum conductor cross-section mm Rated power at Ue at 0 V kw V kw V kw V kw Utilization category DC- and DC-5 Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms) Rated operational currents Ie (at 55 C) Rated power at Ue up to 0 V 440 V 600 V 750 V at 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 750 V Switching frequency Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour C/DC operation With resistive load DC-1 For inductive load DC-/DC-5 Conductor cross-sections Screw terminals Main conductors: (1 or conductors can be connected) uxiliary conductors: kw kw kw kw kw h h mm mm mm mm mm mm mm TC Screw terminals x ( ) x ( ) x 16 x (1... 6) M5 x (1....5) x ( ) x ( ) x 5 15 x.5 M6 TC x 10 5 x 4 M10 TC /0. 11/0. 140/0. 140/ x 150 x (5 x ) M10 1) The opening delay times can increase if the contactor coils are damped diodes. /119

130 Contactors for Special pplications Contactors for Switching DC Voltage TC contactors, 1- and -pole, TC contactors, 1- and -pole, Selection and ordering data TC44 TC48 Size Rated data DC- and DC-5 uxiliary Rated control supply Screw terminals Operational ) current I e Ratings of DC motors at contacts 1) Version voltage U s 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 750 V Order No. kw kw kw kw kw NO NC V TC44 to TC56 two-pole contactors DC operation Screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail DC 110 DC 0 DC Screw mounting DC 110 DC 0 DC 8 0) DC 110 DC 0 DC DC 110 DC 0 DC C operation, 50 Hz Screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail / 0 C 4) 110 / 110 C / 0 C 4) 110 C 8 0 ) / 0 C 4) 110 C / 0 C 4) 110 C TC B4 TC F4 TC M4 TC B4 TC F4 TC M4 TC5 17-0B4 TC5 17-0F4 TC5 17-0M4 TC B4 TC F4 TC M4 TC BP0 TC BF0 TC BP0 TC BF0 TC5 17-0BP0 TC5 17-0BF0 TC BP0 TC BF0 contactors. ) The following rated operational currents are permitted for reversing duty with TC44 to TC56 contactors: Contactor Rated operational voltage Type 110 V, 0 V 440 V TC44 7 TC TC TC ) t > 600 V: Ie = ) Operating range at 0 V: 0.85 to 1.15 x Us. /10

131 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole Overview Contactor relays and coupling relays Size S00 with accessories /11

132 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN The RH contactor relays have screw, ring terminal lug or spring-type terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit. The RH contactor relays are suitable for use in any climate. ring terminal lug connection comply with degree of protection Contact reliability High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for Surge suppression RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all contactor relays from the front for damping opening surges in the coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding device. Note: The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor + to 5 ms). uxiliary switch blocks The RH contactor relays can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of snap-on auxiliary switch blocks. The auxiliary switch block can easily be snapped onto the front of the contactors. The auxiliary switch block has a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly. The contactor relays with 4 contacts according to EN 50011, with auxiliary switch blocks to obtain contactor relays with 8 contacts on the auxiliary switch blocks apply to the complete contactors. These auxiliary switch blocks (RH9 11 1G..) cannot be and E; they are coded. ll contactor relays with 4 contacts according to EN 50011, auxiliary switch blocks 40 to 0 to obtain contactor relays with 6 or 8 contacts in accordance with EN Order No. scheme SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole only to the attached auxiliary switch blocks. In addition, fully mounted RH 8-pole contactor relays are available; the mounted 4-pole auxiliary switch block in the nd tier is not removable. The terminal designations are according to EN These versions are built according to special Swiss regulations SUV and are distinguished externally by a red labeling plate. Of the auxiliary contacts (integrated plus mountable) possible on the device, no more than four NC contacts are permitted. Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th SIRIUS contactor relays R H Innovations Device type (e. g. 1 = 4-pole contactor relay, = 8-pole contactor relay) Number of NO contacts (e. g. = NO) Number of NC contacts (e. g. = NC) Connection type (1 = screw, = spring) Operating range / solenoid coil circuit (e. g. = C standard / without) Rated control supply voltage (e. g. P0 = 0 V, 50 Hz) Special version Example R H 1 1 P 0 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. /1

133 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole Contactor Permissible mounting positions The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface. Type Size RH S00 Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays RH: Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the basic unit and the front-mounted auxiliary switch block (removable) acc. to: RH: Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary switch block as well as between the basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary switch block (permanently mounted) acc. to: Note: RH NF. solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks have no positively-driven contacts. Contact reliability Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 m acc. to EN Contact endurance for C-15/C-14 and DC-1 utilization categories The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i. e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system. If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves are present, e. g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits are necessary, e. g. in the form of RC elements and freewheel diodes. The characteristic curves apply to: 1) max. 4-pole and for mounting onto the side in size S00 Explanations: There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO contacts cannot be closed at the same time. ZH1/457 Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metal-working industry. EN , ppendix L Low-Voltage Controlgear, Control Equipment and Switching Elements. Special requirements for positively-driven contacts Frequency of contact faults <10-8 i. e. < 1 fault per 100 million operating cycles Diagram legend: I a = Breaking current I e = Rated operational current 1) I e = 6 for C-15/C-14. /1

134 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole Type Size Dimensions (W x H x D) with screw terminals mm 45 x 57.5 x 7 90 x 57.5 x 7 mm 45 x 57.5 x x 57.5 x 116 RH1 S00 RH S00 RH4 S00 General data Mechanical endurance Operat. cycles Operat. cycles 0 million 5 million 10 million Operat. 5 million cycles Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Protective separation between the coil and the contacts in the basic V 415 unit acc. to EN , ppendix N Permissible ambient temperature Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C Touch protection acc.to EN 5074 Shock resistance Short-circuit protection (weld-free protection at I k - DIZED, Type 5SB - NEOZED, Type 5SE (short-circuit current I k < 400 ) Conductor cross-sections - C operation - DC operation - C operation - DC operation C C g/ms g/ms g/ms g/ms IP0, coil assembly IP40 Finger-safe 7./5 and 4.7/10 >10/5 and >5/ /5 and 7./10 >15/5 and >8/10 uxiliary conductors and coil terminals Screw terminals (1 or conductors can be connected) mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) according to IEC 60947; max. x ( ) mm x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) M (for standard screwdriver size and Pozidriv ) - Tightening torque Nm ( lb.in) uxiliary conductors and coil terminals Spring-type terminals (1 or conductors can be connected) mm.0 x 0.5;.5 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x (0... 1) uxiliary conductors for front and laterally mounted auxiliary switches mm.0 x 0.5;.5 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) n insulation stop must be used for conductor cross-sections. Note: Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation:.6 mm. 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping /14

135 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole Contactor Control circuit Coil operating range Type Size t 50 Hz t 60 Hz t 50 C t +60 C Power consumption of the solenoid coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U s ) - Closing - Closed - Closing - Closed V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. V/p.f. W 4.0 RH. S x U s x U s x U s x U s 7/ /0.5 / /0.5 Operating times 1) (Total break time = OFF-delay + rcing time) Values apply with coil in cold state and at operating temperature for operating range C operation - ON-delay of NO contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s RH4 minimum operating time - OFF-delay of NC contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s - OFF-delay of NO contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s RH4 minimum operating time - ON-delay of NC contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s DC operation - ON-delay of NO contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s RH4 minimum operating time - OFF-delay of NC contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s - OFF-delay of NO contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s RH4 minimum operating time ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ON-delay of NC contact With x U s With 1.0 x U s ms Dependence of the switching frequency z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z I e /I (U e /U ) 1.5 1/h 1) The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor + to 5 ms). /15

136 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole Contactor Load side Type Size RH. S00 Rated operational currents I e C-1 10 C-15/C-14 For rated operational voltage U s DC-1 For rated operational voltage U s DC-1 For rated operational voltage U s Switching frequency z utilization category Up to 0 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V 4 V 60 V 110 V 0 V 440 V 600 V C-1/DC-1 C-15/C-14 DC-1 h -1 h -1 h ) h Dependence of the switching frequency z on the operational current I and operational voltage U : z = z I e /I (U e /U ) 1.5 1/h /16

137 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole Selection and ordering data C operation Size S00 RH RH Rated operational current I e /C-15/C-14 at 0 V Contacts Ident. No. Version Rated control supply Screw terminals Spring-type terminals voltage U s at 50/60 Hz ) Order No. Order No. NO NC V C For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Terminal designations according to EN E E E RH1 40-1B00 RH1 40-1F00 RH1 40-1P00 RH1 1-1B00 RH1 1-1F00 RH1 1-1P00 RH1-1B00 RH1-1F00 RH1-1P00 RH1 40-B00 RH1 40-F00 RH1 40-P00 RH1 1-B00 RH1 1-F00 RH1 1-P00 RH1 -B00 RH1 -F00 RH1 -P00 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x U s at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x U s. /17

138 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole DC operation DC solenoid system Size S00 RH RH Rated operational current I e /C-15/C-14 at 0 V Contacts Ident. No. Version Rated control supply Screw terminals Spring-type terminals voltage U s Order No. Order No. NO NC V DC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Terminal designations according to EN E E E 4 0 RH1 40-1BB40 RH1 40-1BM40 RH1 1-1BB40 RH1 1-1BM40 RH1-1BB40 RH1-1BM40 RH1 40-BB40 RH1 40-BM40 RH1 1-BB40 RH1 1-BM40 RH1 -BB40 RH1 -BM40 /18

139 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4- and 8-pole SIRIUS RH contactor relays, 4-pole Options Rated control supply voltages (the 10th and 11th position of the order number must be changed) Contactor type RH1 Rated control supply voltage U s C operation Solenoid coils for 50/60 Hz and 60 Hz 50/60 Hz 1) 60 Hz 4 V C 4 V C 48 V C 110 V C 0 V C 0 V C Control supply voltage at B0 D0 H0 F0 N P0 400 V C V0 DC operation 1 V DC 4 V DC 4 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 15 V DC 0 V DC 0 V DC 4 B4 D4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4 P4 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x U s at 60 Hz: 0.85 to 1.1 x U s. /19

140 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH4 latched contactor relays, 4-pole Overview Standards IEC , EN , IEC , EN The terminal designations comply with EN uxiliary switches The number of auxiliary contacts can be extended by means of front auxiliary switch blocks (max. 4 contacts). Control circuit SIRIUS RH4 latched contactor relays, 4-pole The contactor coil and the coil of the release solenoid are both designed for uninterrupted duty. both coils from the front for damping opening surges in the coil. The contactor relay can also be switched on and released manually (for minimum actuating times see Technical. Selection and ordering data RH Rated operational current I e /C-15/C-14 at 0 V Contacts Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Ident. No. acc. to EN Version Order No. NO NC V For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail C operation C 50/60 Hz 1) E E E DC operation DC solenoid system DC E E E For accessories see pages /158. 1) Coil operating range at 50 Hz: 0.8 to 1.1 x U s U s. RH4 40-1B00 RH4 40-1F00 RH4 40-1P00 RH4 1-1B00 RH4 1-1F00 RH4 1-1P00 RH4-1B00 RH4-1F00 RH4-1P00 RH4 40-1BB40 RH4 40-1BF40 RH4 40-1BM40 RH4 1-1BB40 RH4 1-1BF40 RH4 1-1BM40 RH4-1BB40 RH4-1BF40 RH4-1BM40 /10

141 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH1 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole SIRIUS RH1 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole pplication DC operation IIEC , EN , IEC , EN The RH1 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls. The RH1 coupling relays cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks. Coupling relays have a low power consumption and an extended coil operating range. identical to those of the RH1 contactor relays. Contactor type RH HB40 RH JB40 RH KB40 Size S00 S00 S00 Control circuit Coil operating range x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coil (for cold coil) Closing = Closed U s = 17 V W 1.4 U s = 4 V W.8 U s = 0 V W 4.4 Permissible residual current of the electronics for 0 signal < 10 m x (4 V/U s ) No overvoltage damping With diode With suppressor diode Operating times Closing at 17 V - ON-delay NO - OFF-delay NC ms ms ON-delay NO - OFF-delay NC ms ms ON-delay NO - OFF-delay NC ms ms Closing at V - OFF-delay NO - ON-delay NC ms ms /11

142 Contactor Relays SIRIUS RH1 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole SIRIUS RH1 coupling relays for switching auxiliary circuits, 4-pole Selection and ordering data DC operation Low power consumption Extended operating range of the solenoid coil Integrated coil circuit Rated operational current I e /C-15/C-14 at 0 V RH B40 RH B40 uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Ident. No. acc. to EN Version Order No. Order No. NO NC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 Terminal designations according to EN (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils.8 W at 4 V 10 40E 1E E Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x U s Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 4 V 10 40E 1E E With integrated coil circuit (diode) Terminal designations according to EN (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils.8 W at 4 V 10 40E 1E E Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x U s Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 4 V 10 40E 1E E With integrated coil circuit (suppressor diode) Terminal designations according to EN (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils.8 W at 4 V 10 40E 1E E Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x U s Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 4 V 10 40E 1E E RH1 40-1HB40 RH1 1-1HB40 RH1-1HB40 RH1 40-1MB40-0KT0 RH1 1-1MB40-0KT0 RH1-1MB40-0KT0 RH1 40-1JB40 RH1 1-1JB40 RH1-1JB40 RH1 40-1VB40 RH1 1-1VB40 RH1-1VB40 RH1 40-1KB40 RH1 1-1KB40 RH1-1KB40 RH1 40-1SB40 RH1 1-1SB40 RH1-1SB40 RH1 40-HB40 RH1 1-HB40 RH1 -HB40 RH1 40-MB40-0KT0 RH1 1-MB40-0KT0 RH1 -MB40-0KT0 RH1 40-JB40 RH1 1-JB40 RH1 -JB40 RH1 40-VB40 RH1 1-VB40 RH1 -VB40 RH1 40-KB40 RH1 1-KB40 RH1 -KB40 RH1 40-SB40 RH1 1-SB40 RH1 -SB40 /1

143 Coupling Contactors SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw pplication DC operation IEC , EN , IEC , EN , IEC , EN (auxiliary switches) The RT0 1 coupling contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary switch blocks. Coupling contactors have a low power consumption and an extended solenoid coil operating range. The RT0 coupling contactors for switching motors are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls. identical to those of the RT0 contactors for switching. Contactor General data Mechanical endurance Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts acc. to EN , ppendix N Control circuit Coil operating range Power consumption of the solenoid coil (for cold coil) Closing = Closed Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) Type Size Operating cycles V 415 RT HB4. S00 RT JB4. S00 RT KB4. S00 RT0. -. KB4. S0 0 million 10 million x U s t U s 17 V W V W V W < 10 m x (4 V/U s ) < 6 m x (4 V/U s ) No overvoltage damping With diode With suppressor diode With varistor Operating times - t 17 V ON-delay NO OFF-delay NC ms ms t 4 V ON-delay NO OFF-delay NC ms ms t 0 V ON-delay NO OFF-delay NC ms ms OFF-delay NO ON-delay NC ms ms /1

144 Coupling Contactors SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw Selection and ordering data DC operation Low power consumption Extended operating range of the solenoid coil RT B4. RT B4. Rated data C- and C- T u : Up to 60 C uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Operational current I e up to 415 V 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. kw NO NC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 Terminal designations according to EN 5001 (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils.8 W at 4 V RT0 15-1HB41 RT0 15-1HB4 RT0 15-HB41 RT0 15-HB RT0 16-1HB41 RT0 16-1HB4 RT0 16-HB41 RT0 16-HB RT0 17-1HB41 RT0 17-1HB4 RT0 17-HB41 RT0 17-HB4 Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x U s Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 4 V RT0 15-1MB41-0KT0 RT0 15-1MB4-0KT0 RT0 15-MB41-0KT0 RT0 15-MB4-0KT RT0 16-1MB41-0KT0 RT0 16-1MB4-0KT0 RT0 16-MB41-0KT0 RT0 16-MB4-0KT RT0 17-1MB41-0KT0 RT0 17-1MB4-0KT0 RT0 17-MB41-0KT0 RT0 17-MB4-0KT0 For surge suppressors see page /158. /14

145 Coupling Contactors SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw DC operation Low power consumption Extended operating range of the solenoid coil Integrated coil circuit RT B4. RT B4. Rated data C- and C- T u : Up to 60 C uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Operational current I e up to 415 V 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. kw NO NC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S00 With integrated coil circuit (diode) Terminal designations according to EN 5001 (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils.8 W at 4 V RT0 15-1JB41 RT0 15-1JB4 RT0 15-JB41 RT0 15-JB RT0 16-1JB41 RT0 16-1JB4 RT0 16-JB41 RT0 16-JB RT0 17-1JB41 RT0 17-1JB4 RT0 17-JB41 RT0 17-JB4 Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x U s Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 4 V With integrated coil circuit (suppressor diode) Terminal designations according to EN 5001 (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) RT0 15-1VB41 RT0 15-1VB4 RT0 16-1VB41 RT0 16-1VB4 RT0 17-1VB41 RT0 17-1VB4 RT0 15-VB41 RT0 15-VB4 RT0 16-VB41 RT0 16-VB4 RT0 17-VB41 RT0 17-VB4 Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils.8 W at 4 V RT0 15-1KB41 RT0 15-1KB4 RT0 15-KB41 RT0 15-KB RT0 16-1KB41 RT0 16-1KB4 RT0 16-KB41 RT0 16-KB RT0 17-1KB41 RT0 17-1KB4 RT0 17-KB41 RT0 17-KB4 Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.85 to 1.85 x U s Power consumption of the coils 1.6 W at 4 V RT0 15-1SB41 RT0 15-1SB4 RT0 15-SB41 RT0 15-SB RT0 16-1SB41 RT0 16-1SB4 RT0 16-SB41 RT0 16-SB RT0 17-1SB41 RT0 17-1SB4 RT0 17-SB41 RT0 17-SB4 /15

146 Coupling Contactors SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw SIRIUS RT0 coupling contactors (interface), -pole, kw DC operation Low power consumption Extended operating range of the solenoid coil Integrated coil circuit RT0. -1KB40 RT0. -KB40 Rated data C- and C- T u : Up to 60 C uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Operational current I e up to 415 V 415 V Rating of induction motors at 50 Hz and Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. kw NO NC For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Size S0 With integrated coil circuit (varistor) Terminal designations according to EN 5001 (no auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted) Rated control supply voltage U s = 4 V DC, coil operating range 0.7 to 1.5 x U s Power consumption of the coils 4.5 W at 4 V RT0 4-1KB40 RT0 4-KB RT0 5-1KB40 RT0 5-KB RT0 6-1KB40 RT0 6-KB RT0 7-1KB40 RT0 7-KB40 /16

147 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors Introduction Introduction Overview The function modules for mounting onto contactors enable the assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-online, reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated wiring of the individual components. They include the key control functions required for the particular feeder, e. g. timing and interlocking, and can be connected to the control system by either parallel wiring or through IO-Link or S-Interface. Version SIRIUS function modules SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link 1) SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface 1) For direct-on-line starting Timing relays: ON-delay or OFF-delay with semiconductor output With screw or spring-type terminals With screw or spring-type terminals With screw or spring-type terminals For reversing starting Wiring modules for sizes S00 and S0 With screw or spring-type terminals (with screw terminals for main and control circuit) 1 function module for size S00 and S0, screw and spring-type connection, plus the respective wiring modules 1) 1 function module for size S00 and S0, screw and spring-type connection, plus the respective wiring modules 1) For wye-delta starting 1 function module for size S00 and S0, screw and spring-type connection of the contactors, plus the respective wiring modules ) For wye-delta starting: 1 function module for size S00 and S0, screw and spring-type connection, plus the respective wiring modules ) For wye-delta starting: 1 function module for size S00 and S0, screw and spring-type connection, plus the respective wiring modules ) ccessories Sealable covers Operator panel for autonomous controlling of up to 4 feeders Module connector for the grouping of starters Connection cable between the operator panel and the feeder group Sealable covers S-Interface addressing units Sealable covers 1) Use of the communication-capable function modules for IO-Link or S-Interface requires contactors with communication interface (see pages /6 and /7). ) The modules for the control current wiring, which are included in the wiring kit, are not required. Note: When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. /17

148 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules SIRIUS function modules Overview Simply by being plugged in place, the SIRIUS function modules enable different functionalities required for the assembly of starters to be realized in the feeder. The function modules and wiring kits thus help to reduce the wiring work within the feeder practically to zero. SIRIUS function modules for direct-on-line starting ll solid-state timing relays which can be mounted onto the contactor are designed for applications in the range from 4 to 40 V C/DC (wide voltage range). Both the electrical and mechanical connection are made by simple snapping on and locking. protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in each module. The solid-state timing relay with semiconductor output uses two contact legs to actuate the contactor underneath by means of a semiconductor after the set time t has elapsed. The switching state feedback is performed by a mechanical switching state indicator (plunger). In addition, the auxiliary switches in the contactors are freely accessible and can be used for feedbacks to the control system or for signal lamps. sealable cover is available to protect against careless adjustment of the set times. SIRIUS function modules for reversing starting The wiring kits for reversing starters enable the cost-effective assembly of contactor assemblies. They can be used for all applications with reversing duty up to 18.5 kw. For a detailed description see page /61. SIRIUS function modules for wye-delta starting Both interlocking and timing functions are required for the assembly of wye-delta starters. With the function modules for wye-delta starting and the matching link modules for the main circuit, these starters can be assembled easily and with absolutely no errors. The entire sequence in the control circuit is integrated in the snap-on modules. This covers: n adjustable star time t from 0.5 to 60 s non-adjustable dead interval of 50 ms Electrical contacting to the contactors by means of coil pickoff (contact legs) Feedback of the switching state at the contactor using a mechanical switch position indicator (plunger) Electrical interlocking between the contactors These modules do not require their own terminals and can therefore be used for contactors with both screw and spring-type terminals in the two sizes S00 and S0. To start the wye-delta actuated. ll other functions then take place inside the individual modules. This also offers advantages if the timing function was previously reduction in the number of PLC outputs, the programming work and the wiring outlay. The kits for the main circuit include the mechanical interlock, the star jumper, the wiring modules at the top and at the bottom, and the required connecting clips. protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in the basic module. pplication The snap-on function modules for direct-on-line starting are used above all for realizing timing functions independently of the control system. With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay it is possible for example for the fan motor for cooling a main drive to operation is guaranteed even if the plant and its control system have already been switched off. The ON-delay timing relays enable for example the time-delayed starting of several drives so that the summation starting current does not rise too high, which could result in voltage failure. The function modules for wye-delta starting are mostly used where current-limiting measures for starting a drive are required, e. g. for large fans and ventilators, and a high level of availability is essential at the same time. This technology has been used with success for several decades and has the additional advantage of requiring relatively little know-how. Through the use of function modules, the assembly work with simple standard components is even easier and error-free. The use of snap-on function modules for direct-on-line starting (timing relays) results in the following advantages: Reduction of control current wiring Prevention of wiring errors Reduction of testing costs Implementation of timing functions independently of the control system Less space required in the control cabinet compared to a separate timing relay No additive protection circuit required (varistor integrated) For the advantages of using wiring kits for the assembly of reversing starters see page /6. The use of function modules for wye-delta starting results in the following advantages: Operation solely through the line contactor 1/ no further wiring needed Reduction of the control current wiring inside the contactor assembly and to the higher-level control system where applicable Prevention of wiring errors Reduction of testing costs Integrated electrical interlocking saves costs and prevents errors Less space needed in the control cabinet compared to using a separate timing relay djustable starting in star mode from 0.5 to 60 s Independent of the contactor s control supply voltage (4 to 40 V C/DC) Varistor integrated no additive protection circuit required No control current wiring thanks to plug-in technology and connecting cables reliable wiring Fewer versions one module kit for screw and spring-type connection and for the two sizes S00 and S0 Mechanical interlocking (with wiring kit for the main circuit) /18

149 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules SIRIUS function modules Type R8 11 R8 1 R8 16 Function With ON-delay OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage Wye-delta function Dimensions See RT0 contactors, pages /16 and /. General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III V C 00 Operating range of excitation x U s, times the rated frequency Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated Rated power W 1 1 V 1 Rated operational currents I e t V, 50 Hz 0.4 t V 0.4 t V, 50 Hz - t 4 V 1 - t 15 V 0. - t 50 V 0.1 DIZED fuse Operational class gg 4 Switching frequency for load I e at 0 V C h h Recovery time ms Minimum ON period ms 5 Residual current Max. m 5 Voltage drop Max. V.5 With conducting output Short-time loading capacity Up to 10 ms 10 Setting accuracy Typ. ±15 % With reference to upper limit of scale Repeat accuracy Max. ±1 % Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100 x x 10 6 Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 Shock resistance g/ms 15/11 Half-sine acc. to IEC Vibration resistance cc. to IEC Hz/mm /0.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC , IEC , IEC IEC Permissible mounting positions ny Conductor cross-sections Connection type Screw terminals mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) WG x ( ) M (for standard screw driver size or Pozidriv ) Nm Connection type Spring-type terminals mm.0 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) /19

150 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for direct-on-line starting SIRIUS function modules for direct-on-line starting Selection and ordering data R R For contactors 1) Rated control supply voltage U s Time setting range t Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Type V s Solid-state timing relays with semiconductor output, for snapping onto the front RT0 1., RT0. RH1 ) RH4 RT0 1., RT0. RH1 ) RH4 ccessories The electrical connection between the timing relay and the contactor underneath is established automatically when it is snapped on and locked. With ON-delay Two-wire version, varistor integrated C/DC (1, 10, 100, selectable) OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage Varistor integrated C/DC (1, 10, 100, selectable) Sealable covers For R7, R8, R9 Order No. R8 11-1CW10 R8 1-1DW10 R R Order No. R8 11-CW10 R8 1-DW10 1) C voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz. Note: When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. Function Function charts Timing relay energized Contact closed Contact open 1 NO contact (semiconductor output) With ON-delay R8 11-.CW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage R8 1-.DW10 /140

151 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for reversing starting / wye-delta starting SIRIUS function modules for reversing starting / wye-delta starting Selection and ordering data R8 16-0EW0 R9 1-1 R9 1-BB For contactors 1) Rated control supply voltage U s Time setting range t Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Type V s ssembly kits for reversing starting Order No. Order No. ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom RT0 1. R9 1-1 R9 1- RT0. R9-1 R9 - ssembly kits for wye-delta starting ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies The assembly kit contains: Mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips for contactors; star jumper, wiring modules on the top and bottom RT0 1. R9 1-BB1 R9 1-BB RT0. R9 -BB1 R9 -BB Function modules for wye-delta starting The electrical connection between the function module and the contactor assembly is established automatically by snapping on and plugging in the connecting cables. Wye-delta function (varistor integrated) RT0 1., RT0. ) C/DC (10, 0, 60 selectable) Individual modules C/DC Basic modules for wye-delta starting Coupling modules for wye-delta starting ccessories Sealable covers For R7, R8, R9 (PS* = 5 units) R8 16-0EW0 R R R8 16-0EW0 R9 1-0 R9 1-0 R R ) C voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz. Note: When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. Function Function charts Timing relay energized Contact closed Contact open NO contacts (interconnected internally) Wye-delta function R8 16-0EW0 /141

152 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link Overview The SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link enable the assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated wiring of the individual components. They include the key control functions required for the particular feeder, e. g. timing and interlocking. The electrical and mechanical connection to the contactor is established by snapping on and locking. n additive protection circuit for the individual contactors can be dispensed with completely because a varistor is integrated in the modules. Feedback from the contactor contacts is performed with Hall sensors which provide reliable feedback concerning the switching state even under extremely dusty conditions. The starters are connected to the higher-level control system through IO-Link, with the possibility of connecting up to four starters as a group to one port of the IO-Link master. Through this type of connection to the control system, a maximum of wiring is saved. The following essential signals are transmitted: vailability of the feeder in response to an indirect inquiry from the motor starter protector Starter operation Feedback concerning the switching state of the starter Signal transmission through IO-Link The inquiry from the motor starter protector does not take place through additive wiring between the auxiliary switch and the module but by means of a voltage inquiry at the contactor input. This requires special versions of the contactors with communication interface (see pages /6 and /7). vailability signal through voltage pick-off /14

153 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link By grouping up to four starters it is possible to connect up to 16 starters to one master of the ET 00S. In this case all the signals of the individual controls are made available directly in the process image of the input through only individual wires SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link per starter group. If the potential at the master of the ET 00S is the same as that of the controls, a further reduction in wiring is possible by providing the control supply voltage to the contactors by jumpering the corresponding communication wires. Group formation with IO-Link In case of a malfunction, the corresponding error signals are also sent directly to the PLC in acyclic mode. This is in addition to transmission of the switching signals and status signals. Possible error signals: Device defect No main voltage (motor starter protector tripped) No control supply voltage Limit position on the right / on the left Manual mode Process image fault This easy integration of the starters in the TI world does not function modules have special terminals in order to enable direct local disconnection. These terminals can be connected for example to a position switch. The input interrupts the voltage supply to the contactor coil directly, i. e. without going through the PLC. These terminals are jumpered in the as-delivered state. Local manual operation of the complete starter group is also straight-forward using a hand-held device. The latter is easily connected to the last starter and can be built into the front advantages particularly for commissioning. pplication The use of SIRIUS function modules with IO-Link is recommended above all in machines and plants in which there are several motor feeders in one control cabinet. Using IO-Link, the connection of these feeders to the automation level is easy, quick and errorfree. nd with IO modules no longer needed, the width of the ET 00S is far smaller. Reduction of the control current wiring to no more than three cables for four feeders Elimination of testing costs and wiring errors Integration in TI means clear diagnostics if a fault occurs Dispensing with IO modules saves space in the control cabinet ll essential timing and interlocking functions for reversing duty and wye-delta starting are integrated No additive protection circuit required /14

154 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link Type R7 11 Dimensions See RT0 contactors, pages /16 and /. General data 1.0 Permissible ambient temperature cc. to EN C cc. to EN C cc. to EN C Degree of protection IP0 Operational voltage U Hi V DC 4 ± 0 % Power consumption, max. at U Hi Max. length of the cables cc. to EN 5095 m 0 for the input Y1 Y EMC interference immunity cc. to EN kv 6/8 cc. to EN V/m 10 (80 MHz... GHz) cc. to EN kv /1 cc. to EN kv 0.5/1 cc. to EN V rms 10 (150 khz MHz) Conductor cross-sections Connection type Screw terminals mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) WG x ( ) M (for standard screwdriver Ø 6 mm or Pozidriv ) Nm Connection type Spring-type terminals mm.0 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) /144

155 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link Selection and ordering data Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Function modules for direct-on-line starting IO-Link connection Includes one module connector for assembling an IO-Link group Order No. R Order No. R R R Function modules for reversing starting 1) R7 11-1B00 IO-Link connection Comprising one basic and one coupling module and an additional module connector for assembling an IO-Link group R7 11-1B00 R7 11-B00 ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies ) The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 1-1 R For main, auxiliary and control current R9-1 - Only for main current 4) R9 - R9-1 Function modules for wye-delta starting ) R7 11-1C00 R9 -BB1 IO-Link connection Comprising one basic module and two coupling modules, plus an additional module connector for assembling an IO-Link group R7 11-1C00 R7 11-C00 ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies ) The assembly kit contains: Mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips for contactors; star jumper, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 1-BB1 R9 1-BB - For main, auxiliary and control current R9 -BB1 - Only for main current 4) R9 -BB Matching contactors with communication interface required (see pages /6 and /7). Note: When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. 1) For prewired contactor assemblies for reversing starting with communication interface see pages /64 and /66. When these contactor assemblies are used, the assembly kit for the wiring is already integrated. ) For complete contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting including function modules see pages /78 and /81. ) When using the function modules for wye-delta starting, the wiring modules for the auxiliary current are not required. 4) Version in size S0 with spring-type terminals: Only the wiring modules for the main circuit are included. No connectors are included for the auxiliary and control circuit. /145

156 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link SIRIUS function modules for IO-Link Version Order No. ccessories R7 11-0EE0. R Operator panels 1) R Module connector sets, comprising: R7 11-0EE01 Module connectors, 14-pole, 8 cm R7 11-0EE0 Module connectors, 14-pole, 1 cm R7 11-0EE0 Module connectors, 10-pole, 8 cm R7 11-0EE04 Sealable covers For R7, R8, R9 R ManualsFunction modules for IO-Link ZX1 01-0R7-1B1 Operator panels (set) Connection cables, Length m, 10- to 14-pole For connecting the operator panel to the communication module R R7 11-0EE11 Enabling modules (replacement) R Interface covers (replacement) R69 6-0B 1) Suitable only for communication through IO-Link. /146

157 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface Overview The SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface enable the assembly of starters and contactor assemblies for direct-online, reversing and wye-delta starting without any additional, complicated wiring of the individual components. They include the key control functions required for the particular feeder, e. g. timing and interlocking. The electrical and mechanical connection to the contactor is established by snapping on and locking. n additive protection circuit for the individual contactors can be dispensed with completely because a varistor is integrated in the modules. Feedback from the contactor contacts is performed with Hall sensors which provide reliable feedback concerning the switching state even under extremely dusty conditions. Connection of the starters to the higher-level control system /B technology. s the result, up to 6 starters can be connected to one master and the address is entered in normal manner with an addressing unit. Through the S-Interface connection to the control system, a maximum of wiring is saved. The wiring outlay is reduced to the control supply voltage and the two individual wires for S- Interface. The following essential signals are transmitted: vailability of the feeder in response to an indirect inquiry from the motor starter protector Starter operation Feedback concerning the switching state of the starter Signal transmission through S-Interface The inquiry from the motor starter protector does not take place through additive wiring between the auxiliary switch and the module but by means of a voltage inquiry at the contactor input. This requires special versions of the contactors with communication interface (see pages /6 and /7). vailability signal through voltage pick-off /147

158 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface Topology with S-Interface This easy integration of the starters in the TI world does not function modules have special terminals in order to enable direct local disconnection. These terminals can be connected for example to a position switch. The input interrupts the voltage supply to the contactor coil directly, i. e. without going through the PLC. These terminals are jumpered in the as-delivered state. pplication The use of SIRIUS function modules with S-Interface is recommended above all in machines and plants requiring easy connection of several different sensors and actuators both inside and outside the control cabinet to the higher-level control system. nd with IO modules no longer needed, the width of the control unit is far smaller. Reduction of control current wiring Elimination of testing costs and wiring errors Dispensing with IO modules saves space in the control cabinet ll essential timing and interlocking functions for reversing duty and wye-delta starting are integrated No additive protection circuit required Type R7 1 Dimensions See RT0 contactors, pages /16 and /. General data Slave type /B slave Suitable for S-i masters acc. to Spec..1 or higher 7..E ID1 Code (factory setting) 7 Permissible ambient temperature Degree of protection Operational voltage Power consumption, max. cc. to EN cc. to EN cc. to EN m 0 - Maximum pick-up/hold current Size S00 Size S0 Max. length of the cables for the input Y1 Y EMC interference immunity C C V V m m IP ± 0 % cc. to EN 5095 m 0 cc. to EN cc. to EN cc. to EN cc. to EN cc. to EN kv V/m kv kv V rms 6/8 10 (80 MHz... GHz) 1/ 0.5/1 10 (150 khz MHz) /148

159 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface Type R7 1 Conductor cross-sections Connection type Screw terminals mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) WG x ( ) M (for standard screwdriver Ø 6 mm or Pozidriv ) Nm Connection type Spring-type terminals mm.0 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) Selection and ordering data Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Order No. Order No. Function modules for direct-on-line starting S-Interface connection R R R R Function modules for reversing starting 1) S-Interface connection Comprising one basic and one coupling module R7 1-1B00 R7 1-B00 R7 1-1B00 R9-1 ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies The assembly kit contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for contactors, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 1-1 R For main, auxiliary and control current R9-1 - Only for main current R9 - Matching contactors with communication interface required (see pages /6 and /7). Note: When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. 1) For prewired contactor assemblies for reversing starting with communication interface see pages /64 and /66. When these contactor assemblies are used, the assembly kit for the wiring is already integrated. /149

160 Function Modules for Mounting onto SIRIUS RT Contactors SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface SIRIUS function modules for S-Interface Version Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Function modules for wye-delta starting 1) S-Interface connection Comprising one basic module and two coupling modules Order No. R7 1-1C00 Order No. R7 1-C00 R7 1-1C00 R9 -BB1 ssembly kits for making -pole contactor assemblies The assembly kit contains: Mechanical interlock, 4 connecting clips for contactors; star jumper, wiring modules on the top and bottom R9 1-BB1 R9 1-BB - For main, auxiliary and control current R9 -BB1 - Only for main current R9 -BB Matching contactors with communication interface required (see pages /6 and /7). 1) For complete contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting including function modules see pages /64 and /66. Note: When using the function modules, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. Version Order No. ccessories R Sealable covers For R7, R8, R9 Manuals Function modules for S-Interface R ZX1 01-0R7-0B0 /150

161 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Overview Selection aid for mountable auxiliary switch blocks for motor contactors and contactor relays The auxiliary switch blocks of the RH9 series for mounting on the front and side can be used for motor contactor sizes S00 and S0 as well as for contactor relays. The exact possibilities of use are listed in the following tables. The auxiliary switch blocks and their use are described in the sections Motor Contactors and Contactor Relays. Note: The auxiliary switches according to EN 5001 also meet the requirements according to EN Motor contactors Contactor Examples ll auxiliary contacts with mirror contact function according to EN Size Integrated EN EN 5001 auxiliary Version On front Lateral On front Lateral switches 1-pole -pole 4-pole -pole 4-pole -pole RH RH9 11-1B.. RH9 11-1L.. RH9 11-1M.. RH9 11-.F... RH9 11-.H... RH9 11-.D... RH9 1-.D... RH9 11-.H.. RH9 11-.D... RH9 1-.D... S00 1 NO or 1 NC 1 1 B C (1 x left 1 (right) + 1 x right) S0 1 NO + 1 NC 1 1 B C (1 x left + 1 x right) 1 (right) Examples according to EN Version, S00: S00 basic unit + one 1-pole front auxiliary switch block + one -pole lateral auxiliary switch block > RT0 16-1P01 + RH RH9 11-1D11 Version B, S0: S0 basic unit + one 4-pole front auxiliary switch block > RT0 7-P00 + RH9 11-H Example according to EN 5001 Version C, S0: S0 basic unit + one -pole lateral switch block, mounted on the right > RT0 6-P00 + RH9 11-D11 Note: The front solid-state compatible auxiliary switches have no mirror contact functionality. Contactor relays Contactor relay Examples ll front auxiliary contacts with positively-driven operation according to EN Size Integrated EN EN auxiliary Version On front Lateral 1) On front switches 1-pole -pole 4-pole -pole 4-pole S00 NO + NC or NO + 1 NC or 4 NO RH RH9 11-1B.. RH9 11-1L.. RH9 11-1M.. RH9 11-.F... RH9 11-.H... RH9 11-.D.. RH9 1-.D B C (1 x left + 1 x right) 1 RH9 11-.G.. 1) Lateral auxiliary contacts without positively-driven operation. /151

162 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Terminal designations The terminal designations are -digit, e. g. 1, 14, 1, : auxiliary contacts, e. g. 40, 1,, 1: - 1st digit: Number of NO contacts Units digit: Function digit - 1- for normally closed contacts (NC) - -4 for normally open contacts (NO) nd digit: Number of NC contacts Examples: 1 = NO + 1 NC 40 = 4 NO Contactor with integrated auxiliary contacts front auxiliary switches RH1 contactor relay, S00, with 4 normally open contacts (4 NO) RT0 motor contactor, S00, with 1 normally open contact (1 NO) RT0 motor contactor, S00, with 1 normally closed contact (1 NC) RT0 motor contactor, S0, with 1 NO + 1 NC (only with auxiliary switches acc. to EN and EN 50011) RH9 auxiliary switch blocks overview of the function digits (examples) (only with auxiliary switches according to EN 50005) uxiliary switch block with auxiliary contacts Function digit for front auxiliary switches RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts NO + NC RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts 4 NC RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts NO + 1 NC Basic units with mounted RH9 auxiliary switch blocks overview of the terminal designations (examples) RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts 4 NO Contactor with mounted auxiliary switch block Terminal designations of all the auxiliary contacts RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts NO + NC RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts 4 NC RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts NO + 1 NC RH9 auxiliary switch, 4 contacts 4 NO /15

163 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches ll solid-state delayed auxiliary switch which can be mounted onto the contactor are designed for applications in the range from 4 to 40 V C/DC (wide voltage range). Both the electrical and mechanical connection are made by simple snapping on and locking. The time-delay auxiliary switch is supplied with power directly by two plug-in contacts through the coil terminals of the contactor, in parallel with./. protection circuit (varistor) is integrated in each module. sealable cover is available to protect against careless adjustment of the set times. Note: Mounting more auxiliary switches to the contactor is not permitted. OFF-delay devices for contactors C and DC operation IEC 60947, EN For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rails. The OFF-delay devices have screw terminals. The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out unintentionally when there is a short-time voltage dip or voltage failure. It supplies a downstream, DC-operated contactor with the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the contactor does not trip. The R9 16 OFF-delay devices are RH contactor relays in the SIRIUS series. The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a capacitive basis, and can be energized with either C or DC (4 V version only for DC operation). Voltage matching, which is bridge. contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors of the solenoid coil, built into the OFF-delay device, are switched in parallel. In the event of voltage failures, the capacitors are discharged via the solenoid coil and thereby delay the opening of the contactor. If the command devices are upstream of the OFF-delay device in the circuit, the OFF-delay takes effect with every opening operation. If the opening operation is downstream of the OFFdelay device, an OFF-delay only applies in the event of failure of the mains voltage. Operation In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of 110 and 0 V, either C voltage or DC voltage can be applied on the line side, whereas the variant for 4 V is designed for DC operation only. DC-operated contactor is connected to the output in accordance with the input voltage that is applied. The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the dditional load module Size S00 for plugging onto the front of the contactors with and without auxiliary switch block. General data The module is used for increasing the permissible residual current and for limiting the residual voltage. It ensures the safe opening of contactors with direct control via 0 V C semiconductor outputs of SIMTIC controllers. It acts simultaneously as a surge suppressor. Surge suppressors Without LED (also for spring-type terminals) Sizes S00 and S0 With LED (also for spring-type terminals) Sizes S00 and S0 with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the coil. Diodes or diode assemblies (comprising noise suppression diodes and Zener diodes for short break times) can be used. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size S00 contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary switch block. Varistors, RC elements or diode assemblies can be plugged onto the front of size S0 contactors. Coupling relays are supplied either without overvoltage damping or with a suppressor diode, varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version. Note: The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor + to 5 ms). Coupling links for control by PLC DC operation IEC and EN according to EN The terminal designations comply with EN System-compatible operation with 4 V DC, operating range 17 to 0 V. Low power consumption of 0.5 W in conformity with the indicates the switching state. Surge suppression The RH9 4-1GP11 coupling link has an integrated surge suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched. Mounting The RH9 4-1GP11 coupling link is mounted on the contactor coil size S0 using a coil connection module. Sealable covers When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate the contactors manually. For SIRIUS contactors there are sealable covers available for this purpose as accessories; these prevent accidental manual operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed. /15

164 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Version Type R8 1 R8 14 R8 15 General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III Function ON-delay OFF-delaywith auxiliary voltage Dimensions See RT0 contactors, pages /16 and / (dimensions with mounted function module). V C 00 Operating range of excitation x U s, times the rated frequency Rated power W 1 V OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage Rated operational currents I e t V, 50 Hz t V, 50 Hz t 4 V t 15 V t 50 V DIZED fuse 4 Operational class gg Switching frequency for load I e at 0 V C h h Recovery time ms 150 Minimum ON period ms 5 00 Residual current, max. m Voltage drop, max. V with conducting output Short-time loading capacity up to 10 ms Setting accuracy, typ. ±15 % with reference to upper limit of scale Repeat accuracy, max. ±1 % Mechanical endurance Operating cycles x 10 6 Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 Shock resistance g/ms 15/11 Half-sine acc. to IEC Vibration resistance cc. to IEC Hz/mm /0.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) IEC , IEC , IEC , IEC Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated Permissible mounting positions ny Conductor cross-sections Connection type Screw terminals mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) mm 1 x ( ), x ( ) WG x ( ) M (for standard screw driver size or Pozidriv ) Nm Connection type Spring-type terminals mm.0 x 0.5 mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) /154

165 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Version Type RT9 16-BE01 RT9 16-BK01 RT9 16-BL01 Function OFF-delay devices General data Connectable contactor sizes Caution! Only contactors and contactor relays with DC operation can be connected. S00...S S00/S0 S00/S0 S00/S0 S00/S0 Permissible mounting positions Type RT0.. -1BB4., RH... -1BB40 RT BF4, RT0. -1BF4, RH... -1BF40 RT BM4. / 1BP4., RT0. - 1BM4. /1BP4., RH BM40/1BP40 Rated control supply voltage U s V 4 (DC) 110 (C/DC) 0/0 (C/DC) Operating range U s Rated frequency f With C supply Hz ±5 % 50/60 50/60 Permissible ambient temperature T u - Side-by-side mounting without distance - Side-by-side mounting with 5 mm distance C C C OFF-delay 1) (minimum times at U sp = 0.9 x U s, T sp = 0 C) Notes: In practice the mean value is 1.5 times the minimum time. t off > ms t off > ms Installed capacity C RT19 16-B. 01 Capacitor voltage ON-delay μf V Notes: The total ON-delay = Contactor make-time + t on (maximum at U sp = 0.9 x U s, T sp = 0 C) t on < ms t on < ms Mechanical endurance Operating 0 million cycles Endurance, electrical approx. Operating >1 million cycles Switching frequency z max. (at T u = 60 C) h Power loss P v max. approx. W Surge suppression With varistor, integrated Conductor cross-sections ) U sp = Coil voltage T sp = Coil temperature ) Doubling the delay time can be achieved by doubling the capacitance. Commercially available capacitors can be used, which can be connected to terminals C+ and Z. ) See RT0 1 contactors, page /16. /155

166 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Version Type RT9 6-P Function Pneumatic delay block 1) General data Mechanical endurance Operating 5 million cycles Electrical endurance at I e Operating 1 million cycles Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (pollution degree ) Permissible ambient temperature C C Rated operational currents I e cc. to utilization categories EN U e U e Up to 0/0 V 400/80 V 500 V 690/660 V t 4 V 48 V 110 V 0 V 440 V Time delay ±10 % and rating V C , Q 600 Conductor cross-sections mm x ) or x ) mm² x WG x Nm ) For size S0. In addition to the pneumatic delay block, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted. ) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping Version Type RT9 6- Function Mechanical latching block for RT.. contactors Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (pollution degree ) Mechanical endurance.. contactor Operating million cycles Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 Operating range of the solenoid coil t C 50/60 Hz and DC x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils of the unlocking magnet (for cold coil and 1.0 x U s ) C and DC operation W pprox. 4 Command duration for de-energizing ms ms Conductor cross-sections mm x ( ); 1 x 4 WG x 14; 1 x 1 mm x ( ); 1 x.5 WG x 14; 1 x 1 Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm lb.in /156

167 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Version Type RH9 4-1GP11 Function Coupling links for PLC for mounting on contactors acc. to IEC 60947/EN General data Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 00 Protective separation between the coil and the contacts acc. to V C Up to 00 EN , ppendix N Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 IP40 Permissible ambient temperature C C Conductor cross-section mm x ( ) mm² x ( ) Terminal screws M Short-circuit protection (weld-free protection at I k Type LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE 6 Control side Rated control supply voltage U s V DC 4 Operating range V DC Power consumption at U s W 0.5 Nominal current input m 0 Release voltage V Function display Yellow LED Protection circuit Varistor Load side Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 0 million Electrical endurance at I e Operating 0.1 million cycles Switching frequency h operating cycles Make-time ms pprox. 7 Break-time ms pprox. 4 Bounce time ms pprox. Contact material gsno Switching voltage V C/DC Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) m.5 Rated operational currents 1) Conventional thermal current I th 6 Rated operational currents I e cc. to utilization categories EN Switching current with resistive load to EN 6055 (relay standard) and EN t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V ) 1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts. /157

168 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switch blocks uxiliary switch blocks Selection and ordering data RH9 11-1H.. RH9 11-H.. For contactors Contactor with S block uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Type NO NC uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN 5001 (also compliant with the requirements according to EN 50005) Size S00 For assembling contactors with,, 4 and 5 auxiliary contacts RT RH9 11-1H01 RH9 11-H01 RT 1. 1 RH9 11-1H0 RH9 11-H0 RT RH9 11-1H0 RH9 11-H RH9 11-1H11 RH9 11-H11 1 RH9 11-1H1 RH9 11-H1 1 RH9 11-1H1 RH9 11-H1 1 1 RH9 11-1H1 RH9 11-H1 RH9 11-1H RH9 11-H 41 1 RH9 11-1H1 RH9 11-H1 Size S0 For assembling contactors with, 4 or 5 auxiliary contacts RT RH9 11-1H01 RH9 11-H01 RT. RT5. 1 RH9 11-1H0 RH9 11-H0 /158

169 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switch blocks uxiliary switch blocks RH9 11-1H.. RH9 11-H.. For contactors/ contactor relays Contactor with S block uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Type NO NC uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN 5001 (also compliant with the requirements according to EN 50005) Size S0 For assembling contactors with, 4 or 5 auxiliary contacts RT RH9 11-1H10 RH9 11-H10 RT. 1 1 RH9 11-1H11 RH9 11-H11 RT5. 1 RH9 11-1H1 RH9 11-H1 1 RH9 11-1H0 RH9 11-H0 1 RH9 11-1H1 RH9 11-H1 41 RH9 11-1H0 RH9 11-H0 /159

170 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switch blocks uxiliary switch blocks RH9 11-1F.. RH9 11-F.. RH9 11-1L.. RH For contactors/ contactor relays uxiliary switches uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Type NO NC NO NC uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN Sizes S00 and S0 - or 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks for assembling contactors with and 5 or 4 and 6 auxiliary contacts RT. 1., 40 4 RH9 11-1F40 RH9 11-F40 RT.., RH9 11-1F RH9 11-F RH1.., RH ) 4 RH9 11-1F04 RH9 11-F RH9 11-1FB11 RH9 11-FB RH9 11-1FB RH9 11-FB RH9 11-1FC RH9 11-FC 1- and -pole auxiliary switch blocks, cable entry from above or below RT. 1., 10 1 RH RT.., 01 1 RH RH1.., RH RH9 11-1L11 0 RH9 11-1L0 1) The mounting of blocks with Ident. No. 04 is permitted only on basic units which have no NC contact integrated. /160

171 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switch blocks uxiliary switch blocks RH9 11-1D.. RH9 11-D.. RH9 1-1D.. RH9 1-D.. For contactors/ contactor relays Contactor with S block uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Order No. Type NO NC Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN Size S00 RT0 1., 0 RH9 11-1D0 RH9 11-D0 Ident. No. 10 RT RH9 11-1D11 RH9 11-D11 RT RH9 11-1D0 RH9 11-D0 Size S0 RT0. RT. RT5. 0 RH9 1-1D0 RH9 1-D RH9 1-1D11 RH9 1-D11 0 RH9 1-1D0 RH9 1-D0 /161

172 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switch blocks, delayed uxiliary switch blocks, delayed Selection and ordering data For contactors Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Time setting range t Output/ auxiliary contacts Type V s Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to DIN Sizes S00 and S0 The electrical connection between the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch and the contactor underneath is established automatically when it is snapped on and locked. ON-delay Varistor integrated RT., RH1 ) RH4 RT., RH1 ) RH C/DC , (1, 10, 100, selectable) OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage Varistor integrated C/DC , (1, 10, 100, selectable) R R8 14- Screw terminals Order No. Spring-type terminals Order No. 1 CO R8 1-1W10 R8 1-W10 1 NO + 1 NC R8 1-1FW10 R8 1-FW10 1 CO R8 14-1W10 R8 14-W10 1 NO + 1 NC R8 14-1FW10 R8 14-FW10 RT., RH1 ) RH4 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage ) Varistor integrated C/DC , (1, 10, 100, selectable) 1 CO R8 15-1W10 R8 15-W10 1 NO + 1 NC R8 15-1FW10 R8 15-FW10 1) C voltage values apply for 50 Hz and 60 Hz. pplication of the control supply voltage once results in contact changeover to the correct setting. Note: When using the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches, no other auxiliary switches are allowed to be connected to the basic units. More information Function Function charts Timing relay energized Contact closed Contact open Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switches With 1 CO contact With 1 NO contact + 1 NC contact ON-delay (varistor integrated) R8 1-.W10 R8 1-.FW10 OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated) R8 14-.W10 R8 14-.FW10 OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated) R8 15-.W10 R8 15-.FW10 /16

173 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays Delay and latching blocks Delay and latching blocks Selection and ordering data OFF-delay devices RT9 16-B. 01 For contactors Rated control supply voltage Time setting range t Screw terminals U s Type V s Sizes S00 and S0 For contactors with DC operation Non-adjustable delay time RT. 1, RT., RH... -1BF40 RT. 1, RT., RH... -1BM40 RT. 1, RT., RH... -1BB C/DC S00: > 0.1 S0:> /0 C/DC S00: > 0.5 S0: > 0. 4 DC S00: > 0. S0: > 0.1 Pneumatic delay blocks, terminal designation according to EN Size S0 For snapping onto the front of contactors 1)) uxiliary contacts 1 NO and 1 NC RT RT9 6-P... RT Mechanical latching blocks Size S0 For snapping onto the front of contactors The contactor remains in the energized state after a voltage failure RT. 4 C/DC 110 C/DC 0 C/DC Order No. RT9 16-BK01 RT9 16-BL01 RT9 16-BE01 RT9 6-P01 RT9 6-P11 RT9 6-PR01 RT9 6-PR11 RT9 6-B1 RT9 6-F1 RT9 6-P1 RT ) In addition to these, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted. ) Versions according to DIN VDE 0116 on request. /16

174 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays Surge suppressors Surge suppressors Selection and ordering data For contactors Version Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Order No. C operation DC operation Type V C V DC Surge suppressors without LED (also for spring-type terminals) Size S00 RT9 16-1B. 00 RT9 6-1E. 00 RT. 1, RH. RT. 1, RH. RT. 1, RH. RT. 1, RH. Size S0 For plugging onto the front side of the contactors (without and with an auxiliary switch block) Varistors RC elements RT9 16-1BB00 RT9 16-1BC00 RT9 16-1BD00 RT9 16-1BE00 RT9 16-1BF00 RT9 16-1CB00 RT9 16-1CC00 RT9 16-1CD00 RT9 16-1CE00 RT9 16-1CF00 Noise suppression diodes RT9 16-1DG00 Diode assemblies (diode and Zener diode) for DC operation RT9 16-1EH00 For plugging onto the front side of the contactors (prior to mounting of the auxiliary switch block) RT. Varistors RT. RC elements RT. Diode assemblies for DC operation RT9 6-1BB00 RT9 6-1BC00 RT9 6-1BD00 RT9 6-1BE00 RT9 6-1BF00 RT9 6-1CB00 RT9 6-1CC00 RT9 6-1CD00 RT9 6-1CE00 RT9 6-1CF00 RT9 6-1ER00 RT9 6-1ES00 1) Can be used for C operation for 50/60 Hz. Please inquire about further voltages. For contactors Version Rated control supply voltage U 1) s Power consumption P of the LED at U s Coperation DC operation Type V C V DC mw Surge suppressors with LED (also for spring-type terminals) Size S00 RT. 1, RH. RT. 1, RH. Size S0 Order No. For plugging onto the front side of the contactors (without and with an auxiliary switch block) Varistors Noise suppression diodes RT9 16-1JJ00 RT9 16-1JK00 RT9 16-1JL00 RT9 16-1JP00 RT9 16-1LM00 RT9 16-1LN00 RT9 16-1LP00 For plugging onto the front side of the contactors (prior to mounting of the auxiliary switch block) RT. Varistor RT9 6-1JJ00 RT9 6-1JK00 RT9 6-1JL00 RT. Diode assemblies RT9 6-1MR00 RT9 6-1M R00 1) Can be used for C operation for 50/60 Hz. Please inquire about further voltages. /164

175 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays Other function blocks Other function blocks Selection and ordering data For contactors Version Order No. Type LED modules for indicating contactor control state Size S0 RT. For snapping into the location hole of an inscription label on the front of a contactor either directly on the contactor or on the front auxiliary switch. The LED module is connected to coil terminals 1 and of the contactor and indicates its energized state. Yellow LED. Rated voltage: V C/DC with reverse polarity protection. RT9 6-1QT00 RT9 6-1QT00 (mounted to contactor) Coupling links for control by PLC Size S0 RH9 4-1GP11 RT. For mounting onto the coil terminals of the contactors RH9 4-1GP11 With LED for indicating switching state. With integrated varistor for damping opening surges. Operating range V DC Power consumption: 0.5 W at 4 V DC Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal):.5 m Rated operational current I e : /165

176 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors Selection and ordering data For contactors Version Order No. Sealable covers Type Sizes S00 and S0 RT. 1, Sealable covers for preventing manual operation RT., RH. 1) RT9 16-4M10 RT9 16-4M10 Coil connection modules Size S0 RT. Connection from top RT9 6-4R11 Connection from below RT9 6-4RB11 Connection diagonally RT9 6-4RC11 Spring-type terminals RT. Connection from top RT9 6-4R1 Connection from below RT9 6-4RB1 RT9 6-4R11 Size S0 RT. (1 pack contains 10 sets for 10 contactors) RT19 6-4P RT19 6-4P Safety main current connectors for contactors Sizes S00 and S0 For series connection of contactors RT. 1 R RT. R9 6-1 R ) Exception: Contactors and contactor relays auxiliary switch block mounted onto the front. /166

177 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors Terminals, covers, adapters, connectors For contactors Max. conductor cross-sections Order No. Links for paralleling Type mm Sizes S00 and S0 -pole, with connection terminal Screw terminals RT0 1 5, stranded RT BB1 RT0 50, stranded RT9 6-4BB1 RT BB1 RT9 6-4BB1 4-pole, with connection terminal RT 1, RT5 1 5, stranded RT BB41 RT BB41 1) The links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole. ) With sizes S00 and S0 the links for paralleling are insulated. /167

178 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT, RH Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for RT contactors Spare parts for RT contactors Selection and ordering data For screw and spring-type connections RT For contactors Rated control supply voltage U s Order No. Size Type 50 Hz 50/60 Hz 60 Hz V V V Solenoid coils C operation S0 RT0, RT0 4, RT0 5 S0 RT0 6, RT0 7, RT0 8 RT 5, RT 6, RT 7 RT RT9 4-5B01 RT9 4-5D01 RT9 4-5H01 RT9 4-5F01 RT9 4-5P01 RT9 4-5V01 RT9 4-5C1 RT9 4-5D1 RT9 4-5H1 RT9 4-5G1 RT9 4-5N1 RT9 4-5L1 RT9 4-5K61 RT9 4-5P61 RT9 4-5G61 RT9 4-5N RT9 4-5R RT9 6-5B01 RT9 6-5D01 RT9 6-5H01 RT9 6-5F01 RT9 6-5P01 RT9 6-5V01 RT9 6-5C1 RT9 6-5D1 RT9 6-5H1 RT9 6-5G1 RT9 6-5N1 RT9 6-5L1 RT9 6-5K61 RT9 6-5P61 RT9 6-5G61 RT9 6-5N RT9 6-5R61 /168

179 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Overview Snap-on auxiliary switch blocks Various auxiliary switch blocks can be added to the RT1 basic units depending on the application: Sizes S to S1 Terminal designations according to EN or EN 5001 One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw or spring-type terminals) can be snapped on. When the then the NO contacts are closed. lso available are -pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw terminals) for cable entry from above or below in the design of a quad block (feeder auxiliary switch). If the installation space is limited in depth, -pole auxiliary switch blocks (screw or spring-type terminals) can be attached laterally (on the left or on the right). 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks for RT1 contactors 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks for RT1 contactors The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary switch auxiliary switch blocks. The terminal designations of the individual auxiliary switch blocks correspond to EN or EN 5001, those of the complete contactors with auxiliary switch block NO + NC correspond to EN The auxiliary switch blocks attached to the front can be disassembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever; the laterally attached auxiliary switch blocks are easy to remove by pressing on the checkered surfaces. The laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks according to EN 5001 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary switch contactor must be noted. Two enclosed and two standard contacts are available with the RH19 1-.FE solid-state compatible auxiliary switch block, which can be attached to the front. The RH19 1-DE11 laterally mountable switch block contains enclosed contacts (1 NO + 1 NC). The enclosed contacts are suitable in particular for switching small voltages and currents (hard gold-plated contacts) and for operation in dusty atmospheres. The NC auxiliary contacts are mirror contacts. Size S maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary switch blocks used can be of any version. For reasons of symmetry, when two -pole laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks are used, one block must be attached on the right and one on the left. More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size S under certain conditions (on request). Sizes S to S1 maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note the following: Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC contacts Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary switch blocks /169

180 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks front side of the contactor. The timer module, which is available in the ON-DELY and OFF-DELY versions, allows time-delayed functions up to 100 s ( delay ranges). It contains a relay with one NO contact and one NC contact; depending on the version, the relay is switched either after an ON-delay or after an OFF-delay. The timer module with WYE-DELT FUNCTION is equipped with one delayed and one instantaneous NO contact, with a dead time of 50 ms between the two. The delay time of the NO contact can be adjusted between 1.5 s and 0 s. Wye-delta function The contactor on which the solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch block is mounted operates without a delay. Sizes S to S1 The timer module is supplied with power through two terminals (1/); the time delay of the auxiliary switch block can be activated either by a parallel link to any contactor coil or by any power source. The OFF-delay version operates without an auxiliary voltage; the minimum ON period is 00 ms. single-pole auxiliary switch block can be snapped onto the front of the contactor in addition to the timer module. The timer module has no integrated components for overvoltage damping. General data Solid-state time-delay blocks with semiconductor output The timer module in the ON-DELY and OFF-DELY with auxiliary voltage versions allows time-delayed functions up to close or open after a delay according to the set time. The ON-delay variant of the timing relay is connected in series with the contactor coil; terminal 1 of this coil must not be connected. With the OFF-delay variant of the timing relay, the contactor coil is contacted directly through the relay; terminals 1 and of the contactor coil must not be connected. The timing relays are suitable for both C and DC operation. Sizes S and S The timing relay block for size S0 to S contactors is plugged into coil terminals 1 and on top of each contactor; the timing relay is connected both electrically and mechanically by means of pins. varistor is integrated in the timer module in order to damp opening surges in the contactor coil. a) C operation b) OFF-delay Timing relay block Contactor The activation of loads parallel to the start input is not permissible when using C control voltage (see (a) in the circuit diagram). The RT19 6-D... OFF-delay timing relay blocks have a zero potential start input B1. This means that if there is a parallel load on terminal B1, activation can be simulated with C voltage. In this case, the additional load (e. g. contactor K) must be wired (see (b) in the drawing). /170

181 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data OFF-delay device for size S00 and S0 contactors C and DC operation IEC 60947, EN For screw and snap-on mounting onto 5 mm standard mounting rail. The OFF-delay devices have screw terminals. The OFF-delay device prevents a contactor from dropping out unintentionally when there is a short-time voltage dip or voltage failure. It supplies a downstream, DC-operated contactor with the necessary energy during a voltage dip, ensuring that the contactor does not trip. The RT19 16 OFF-delay devices are RH contactor relays of the SIRIUS series. The OFF-delay device operates without external voltage on a capacitive basis, and can be energized with either C or DC (4 V version only for DC operation). Voltage matching, which is bridge. contactor opens after a delay when the capacitors of the solenoid coil, built into the OFF-delay device, are switched in parallel. In the event of voltage failures, the capacitors are discharged via the solenoid coil and thereby delay the opening of the contactor. If the command devices are upstream of the OFF-delay device in the circuit, the OFF-delay takes effect with every opening operation. If the opening operation is downstream of the OFFdelay device, an OFF-delay only applies in the event of failure of the mains voltage. Operation In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of 110 V and 0 V, either C voltage or DC voltage can be applied on the line side, whereas the variant for 4 V is designed for DC operation only. DC-operated contactor is connected to the output in accordance with the input voltage that is applied. The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the Surge suppressors Without LED (also for spring-type terminals) Sizes S, S, S6 to S1 with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the coil. Diodes or diode assemblies (comprising noise suppression diodes and Zener diodes for short break times) can be used. With the size S and S contactors, varistors, RC elements and diode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, either on the top or underneath. The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode assemblies is determined by a coding device. Coupling relays are supplied either without overvoltage damping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version. Note: The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assembly to 6 times, varistor + to 5 ms). Coupling links for mounting on contactors of sizes S and S General data DC operation IEC and EN according to EN The terminal designations comply with EN System-compatible operation with 4 V DC, operating range 17 to 0 V. Low power consumption in conformity with the technical switching state. Surge suppression The RH19 4-1GP11 coupling link has an integrated surge suppressor (varistor) for the contactor coil being switched. Mounting The RH19 4-1GP11 coupling link is mounted directly on the contactor coil. Sealable covers for sizes S to S1 When contactors and contactor relays are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate the contactors manually. For SIRIUS contactors there are sealable covers available for this purpose as accessories; these prevent accidental manual operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed. /171

182 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Contactor Type RT19 6-C RT19 6-D RT19 6-E RT19 6-F RT19 6-G General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III acc. to EN V C 50 Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C Shock resistance Half-sine acc. to IEC Vibration resistance Solid-state time-delay blocks with semiconductor output IP40 IP0 g/ms 15/11 cc. to IEC Hz/mm /0.5 EMC tests IEC Conductor connections mm x ( ), x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) M Nm Permissible mounting positions ny Control circuit Operating range of excitation x U s, times the rated frequency Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks x U s, times the rated frequency Rated power W 1 V 1 4 Overvoltage protection Varistor integrated in timing relay Recovery time ms Minimum ON period ms 5 00 (with OFF-delay) Setting accuracy Typ. % ±15 With reference to upper limit of scale Repeat accuracy Max. % ±1 Load side Rated operational currents I e 0. for RT for RT Short-time loading capacity Up to 10 ms 10 DIZED protection operational class gg 4 Residual current Max. m 5 Voltage drop Max. V.5 With conducting output Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100 x x 10 6 Switching frequency for load I e at 0 V C h h /17

183 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Function Solid-state time-delay blocks ON-delay Two-wire version (varistor integrated) Function chart Timing relay energized Contact closed Contact open 1 NO contact (semiconductor output) RT19 6-C OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (varistor integrated) RT19 6-D Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks 1 NO + 1 NC ON-delay RT19 6-E OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage RT19 6-F Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks Wye-delta function: 1 NO delayed, 1 NO instantaneous, dead time 50 ms (varistor integrated) NO RT19 6-G /17

184 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Contactor Type RH19 4, TX7 090 Coupling links for mounting on contactors acc. to IEC 60947/EN General data Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 00 Protective separation between the coil and the contacts V C Up to 00 acc. to EN , ppendix N Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 IP40 Circuit diagram Conductor cross-sections mm x ( ) mm² x ( ) Terminal screws M Short-circuit protection (weld-free protection at I k Fuse links, operational class gg Type LV HRC N, DIZED 5SB, NEOZED 5SE 6 Control side Rated control supply voltage U s V DC 4 Operating range V DC Power consumption at U s W 0.5 Nominal current input m 0 Release voltage V Function display Yellow LED Protection circuit Varistor Load side Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 0 x 10 6 Electrical endurance at I e Operating cycles 1 x 10 5 Switching frequency Operating cycles h Make-time ms pprox. 7 Break-time ms pprox. 4 Bounce time ms pprox. Contact material gsno Switching voltage C/DC V Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal) m.5 Rated operational currents 1) Conventional thermal current I th 6 Rated operational currents I e acc. to utilization categories EN Switching current with resistive load to EN (relay standard) and EN t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V t 4 V t 110 V t 0 V ) 1) Capacitive loads can result in micro-weldings on the contacts. /174

185 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays General data General data Contactor Type RT19 6- General data Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (pollution degree ) Permissible ambient temperature C C Degree of protection acc. to EN , ppendix C IP0 Mechanical endurance. Operating cycles x 10 6 Mechanical latching blocks. Operating cycles Conductor cross-sections mm WG x ( ); 1 x 4 x 14; 1 x 1 mm WG x ( ); 1 x.5 x 14; 1 x 1 Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm lb.in Control circuit Operating range of the solenoid coil t C 50/60 Hz and DC x U s Power consumption of the solenoid coils of the unlocking magnet (for cold coil and 1.0 x U s ) C and DC operation W pprox. 4 Command duration for de-energizing ms ms /175

186 Sizes S to S1 ) 1-pole auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN and EN 5001 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switches uxiliary switches Selection and ordering data RH19 1-1H.., RH19 1-1L.. RH19 1-1M.. RH19 1-1C.. RH19 1-1F.. For contactors uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Ident. No. Version Order No. Type NO NC NO NC uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN 5001 Sizes S and S 1) 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks RT1., 1 1 RH19 1-1H1 RT1. 4 RH19 1-1H 1 1 RH19 1-1H1 Sizes S to S1 ) RT1.... RT pole auxiliary switch blocks RH19 1-1X-0M0 uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN Sizes S and S 1) 4-pole auxiliary switch blocks RT1., 40 4 RH19 1-1F40 RT RH19 1-1F1 RH19 1-1F 04 4 RH19 1-1F04 U RH19 1-1FC uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN Sizes S and S 1) -pole auxiliary switch blocks with cable entry from one side Cable entry from above RT1., RH19 1-1L11 RT RH19 1-1L0 0 RH19 1-1L0 RT1., RH19 1-1M11 RT RH19 1-1M0 0 RH19 1-1M0 RT1.... RT RH19 1-1C RH19 1-1C RH19 1-1CD RH19 1-1CD01 1) Exception: RT16. ) Exception: RT1, RT16. /176

187 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays uxiliary switches uxiliary switches RH19 1-1D11 RH19 1-1E.. For contactors uxiliary contacts Screw terminals Version Order No. Type NO NC Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN 5001 Sizes S and S Left Right First laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), -pole RT1., RT RH19 1-1D11 Sizes S... S1 Left Right Second laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), -pole RT RT RH19 1-1J11 Laterally mountable auxiliary switch blocks acc. to EN Sizes S to S1 Left Right First laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), -pole RT1.... RH19 1-1E0 RT RH19 1-1E11 RH19 1-1E0 Sizes S to S1 Left Right Second laterally mountable auxiliary switch block (right or left), -pole RT RH19 1-1K0 RT RH19 1-1K11 RH19 1-1K0 RH19 1-1FE For contactors Contacts Screw terminals Version Order No. Type NO NO 1) NC 1) NC Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks I e / C-14 and DC-1 of m at...60 V uxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front acc. to EN Sizes S and S RT RH19 1-1FE RT1. 7 1) 1 NO + 1 NC standard auxiliary switches: See descriptions on page /169. /177

188 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks and timing relay blocks Selection and ordering data Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks and timing relay blocks For contactors uxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Time setting range t Screw terminals Type V s Order No. Solid-state time-delay auxiliary switch blocks for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to DIN Sizes S... S1 RT RT10, RT1, RT14, RT15 RT10, RT1, RT14, RT15 RT10, RT1, RT14, RT15 ON-delay 1 NO + 1 NC 4 C/DC C C OFF-delay without auxiliary voltage )) 1 NO + 1 NC 4 C/DC C/DC C/DC Wye-delta function (varistor integrated) ) 1 NO delayed + 1 NO instantaneous, dead time 50 ms RT19 6-EJ11 RT19 6-EJ1 RT19 6-EJ1 RT19 6-EC11 RT19 6-EC1 RT19 6-EC1 RT19 6-ED11 RT19 6-ED1 RT19 6-ED1 RT19 6-FJ11 RT19 6-FJ1 RT19 6-FJ1 RT19 6-FK11 RT19 6-FK1 RT19 6-FK1 RT19 6-FL11 RT19 6-FL1 RT19 6-FL1 4 C/DC RT19 6-GJ C RT19 6-GC C RT19 6-GD51 Solid-state time-delay blocks with semiconductor output Sizes S and S For mounting onto coil terminals on top of the contactors, only for devices with screw terminals ON-delay (varistor integrated) RT19 6-C... RT19 6-D... RT10, RT10 4, RT1 4) RT15 RT10, RT10 4, RT1 4) RT C/DC C/DC C/DC C/DC RT19 6-CG11 RT19 6-CG1 RT19 6-CG1 RT19 6-CH11 RT19 6-CH1 RT19 6-CH1 RT19 6-DG11 RT19 6-DG1 RT19 6-DG1 RT19 6-DH11 RT19 6-DH1 RT19 6-DH1 diagrams see pages /17 and /17. 1) The C voltages are valid for 50 and 60 Hz. ) Terminals 1 and for the control supply voltage of the solid-state timedelay auxiliary switch must be connected to the associated contactor by means of connecting cables. pplication of the control supply voltage once results in contact changeover to the correct setting. 4) In addition to these, no other auxiliary contacts are permitted. /178

189 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Surge suppressors Surge suppressors Selection and ordering data For contactors Version Rated control supply voltage U 1) s C operation DC operation Type V C V DC Surge suppressors without LED (also for spring-type terminals) Sizes S and S RT19 6-1B. 00 RT19 6-1C. 00 RT1., RT1. 4 RT1. ), RT1. 4 RT1., RT1. 4 Varistors RC elements Diode assemblies for DC operation Order No. RT19 6-1BB00 RT19 6-1BC00 RT19 6-1BD00 RT19 6-1BE00 RT19 6-1BF00 RT19 6-1CB00 RT19 6-1CC00 RT19 6-1CD00 RT19 6-1CE00 RT19 6-1CF00 RT C. 00 (e. g. for contactor with overload relay) (e. g. for fuseless load feeders) Sizes S6... S1 RT1. 5, RT1. 6, RT For connecting to withdrawable coil with screw terminals for contactors with RC elements RT19 6-1ER00 RT19 6-1ES00 RT19 6-1TR00 RT19 6-1TS00 RT CB00 RT CC00 RT CD00 RT CE00 RT CF00 1) Can be used for C operation for 50/60 Hz. Please inquire about further voltages. ) For RT1. with C operation mountable only at the top. For contactors Version Order No. Type Main current path surge suppression modules for RT1 vacuum contactors Size S10 and S1 RT1 For damping overvoltages and protecting motor windings against multiple re-ignition when switching off induction motors. For connection on the contactor feeder side (-T1/4-T/6-T). For separate installation. Rated operational voltage U e = 690 V C Rated operational voltage U e = 1000 V C RT PV RT PV4 /179

190 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Miscellaneous accessories Miscellaneous accessories Selection and ordering data Mechanical latching blocks RT For contactors Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Type V Order No. Size S RT1. 1) Two front-mounted auxiliary switch blocks can be mounted in addition. For mounting on 1 contactor 1), contactor remains in the energized state even after a voltage failure 4 C/DC 110 C/DC 0 C/DC RT19 6-B1 RT19 6-F1 RT19 6-P1 For contactors Version Screw terminals Type V Order No. Coupling links for control by PLC Sizes S and S For mounting onto the coil terminals of the contactorswith LED for indicating switching state RH19 4-1GP11 RT1., RT1. 4 Operating range V DC Power consumption: 0.5 W at 4 V DC Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal):.5 m Rated operational current I e : With integrated varistor for damping opening surges. RH19 4-1GP11 For contactors Type Version LED modules for indicating the contactor control state (also for spring-type terminals) Sizes S... S1 1) RT1., RT1. 4 For snapping into the location hole of an inscription label on the front of a contactor either directly on the contactor or on the front auxiliary switch. The LED module is connected to coil terminals 1 and of the contactor and indicates its energized state. Yellow LED. Rated voltage: V C/DC with reverse polarity protection. (1 pack = 5 units) Screw terminals Order No. RT19 6-1QT00 RT19 6-1QT00 mounted to contactor uxiliary terminals, -pole Size S RT10 4. For connection of auxiliary and control cables (0.5 to.5 mm ) to the main conductor connections (for one side) RT F RT F see page /174. 1) For sizes S6... S1 the connecting leads have to be extended. /180

191 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Miscellaneous accessories Miscellaneous accessories For contactors Version Order No. Box terminal blocks RT G Covers RT19 6-4E RT E1 TX6 56-B Sealable covers Size Type S6 For round and ribbon cables 1) RT1. 5 (RB0 5) S10, S1 RT1. 6, RT1. 7 (RB0 6, RB1 6) Up to 70 mm² ) RT G Up to 10 mm² RT G uxiliary conductor connection for box terminals TX Up to 40 mm²with auxiliary conductor connection RT G Terminal covers for box terminals (additional touch protection) ( units required per contactor) S RT10 RT19 6-4E RT1, RT15 For 4-pole contactors RT19 6-4E4 S RT10 4, RT14 4 RT E RT1 4 For 4-pole contactors RT E4 S6 ) RT1. 5 Length: 5 mm RT E S10, S1 ) RT1. 6, RT1. 7 Length: 0 mm RT E Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connection ) For complying with the phase clearances and as touch protection if box terminal is removed ( units required per contactor) S RT10 4, RT14 4 RT E1 S6 RT1. 5 Length: 100 mm RT E1 S10/S1 RT1. 6, RT1. 7 Length: 10 mm RT E1 Can be screwed on free screw end; covers one busbar connection (1 set = 6 units) S6 RT1. 5 M8 TX6 56-B S10, S1 RT1. 6, RT1. 7 M10 TX6 546-B For busbar cover between contactor and RB overload relay or wiring module for contactor assemblies S6 RT1. 5 Length: 7 mm RT E S10/S1 4) RT1. 6, RT1. 7 Length: 4 mm RT E reversing and wye-delta assemblies S6 RT1. 5 Length: 8 mm RT E4 S... S1 RT1.... RT1. 7 5) 1 unit required per contactor RT19 6-4M10 RT M10 1) Connectable cross-sections of the contactors can be found in the ) s standard for RT contactor (55 kw). 4) The RT E cover is required in addition for use in contactor assemblies (reversing/wye-delta). 5) Exception: contactors and contactor relays auxiliary switch block mounted onto the front. /181

192 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Miscellaneous accessories Miscellaneous accessories Links for paralleling For contactors Max. conductor cross-sections Screw terminals Size Type mm Order No. -pole, with connection terminal 1)) S RT10 95 RT19 6-4BB1 RT19 6-4BB1 RT B1 -pole, with through hole (star jumpers) 1)) S RT10 4, RT RT BB1 S6 RT1. 5 RT B1 S10/S1 RT1. 6, RT1. 7 RT B1 1) The links for paralleling can be reduced by one pole. ) Size S: The links for paralleling are insulated. Size S: cover plate is included for touch protection. (Can only be used when the box terminal is removed.) Sizes S6 to S1: The RT E1 (for S6) or RT E1 (for S10 and S1) cover can be used for touch protection. /18

193 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for RT1 contactors Spare parts for RT1 contactors Selection and ordering data RT For contactors Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals 50 Hz 50/60 Hz 60 Hz Order No. Size Type V V V Magnetic coils C operation S RT RT10 5, RT10 6, RT1., RT RT19 4-5B01 RT19 4-5D01 RT19 4-5H01 RT19 4-5F01 RT19 4-5P01 RT19 4-5V01 RT19 4-5C1 RT19 4-5D1 RT19 4-5H1 RT19 4-5G1 RT19 4-5N1 RT19 4-5L1 RT19 4-5K61 RT19 4-5P61 RT19 4-5G61 RT19 4-5N RT19 4-5R RT19 5-5B01 RT19 5-5D01 RT19 5-5H01 RT19 5-5F01 RT19 5-5P01 RT19 5-5V RT19 5-5C1 RT19 5-5D1 RT19 5-5H1 RT19 5-5G1 RT19 5-5N1 RT19 5-5L1 RT19 5-5K61 RT19 5-5P61 RT19 5-5G61 RT19 5-5N RT19 5-5R61 /18

194 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for RT1 contactors Spare parts for RT1 contactors RT RT For contactors Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals C DC Order No. 50 Hz 50/60 Hz 60 Hz Size Type V V V V Magnetic coils C operation S RT RT10 45, RT10 46, RT1 4., RT14 46, RT15 4. Magnetic coils DC operation S RT10., RT1., RT15. S RT10 4., RT1 4., RT14 4., RT RT B01 RT D01 RT H01 RT F01 RT P01 RT V01 RT C1 RT D1 RT H1 RT G1 RT N1 RT L1 RT K61 RT P61 RT G61 RT N RT R RT B01 RT D01 RT H01 RT F01 RT P01 RT V01 RT C1 RT D1 RT H1 RT G1 RT N1 RT L1 RT K61 RT P61 RT G61 RT N RT R RT19 4-5BB41 RT19 4-5BD41 RT19 4-5BW41 RT19 4-5BE41 RT19 4-5BF41 RT19 4-5BG41 RT19 4-5BM41 RT19 4-5BP41 RT BB41 RT BD41 RT BW41 RT BE41 RT BF41 RT BG41 RT BM41 RT BP41 /184

195 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for RT1 contactors Spare parts for RT1 contactors RT For contactors Size Type V C/DC Withdrawable coils Conventional operating mechanisms S6 RT10 5, RT14 5 S10 RT10 6, RT14 6 S10 RT1 6 vacuum contactors S1 RT10 7, RT14 7, RT1 7 vacuum contactors Rated control supply voltage U s min... U s max Screw terminals Order No. RT B1 RT D1 RT F1 RT M1 RT P1 RT U1 RT V1 RT R1 RT S1 RT T1 RT B1 RT D1 RT F1 RT M1 RT P1 RT U1 RT V1 RT R1 RT S1 RT T1 RT B1 RT D1 RT F1 RT M1 RT P1 RT U1 RT V1 RT R1 RT S1 RT T1 RT B1 RT D1 RT F1 RT M1 RT P1 RT U1 RT V1 RT R1 RT S1 RT T1 /185

196 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for RT1 contactors Spare parts for RT1 contactors RT N... For contactors Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Size Type V C/DC Withdrawable coils Solid-state operating mechanism For 4 V DC PLC output S6 RT10 5, RT14 5 S10 RT10 6, RT14 6 RT1 6 vacuum contactors S1 RT10 7, RT14 7, RT1 7 vacuum contactors For 4 V DC PLC output/plc relay output, with remaining lifetime indicator (RLT) (withdrawable coil with laterally mounted solid-state module) S6 RT10 5, RT14 5 S10 RT10 6, RT14 6 S1 RT10 7, RT Order No. RT NB1 RT NF1 RT NP1 RT NB1 RT NF1 RT NP1 RT NB1 RT NF1 RT NP1 RT NB1 RT NF1 RT NP1 RT PF1 RT PP1 RT PF1 RT PP1 RT PF1 RT PP1 /186

197 ccessories and Spare Parts For RT1, RH1 Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for RT1 contactors Spare parts for RT1 contactors For contactors Version Order No. Size rc chutes Type S RT10. rc chutes, -pole RT S RT10 4., RT14 46 RT S6 RT10 54 RT10 55 RT10 56 S10 RT10 64 RT10 65 RT10 66 S1 RT10 75 RT10 76 RT RT RT RT RT RT RT RT S6 RT14 56 RT B S10 RT14 66 RT B S1 RT14 76 RT B For contactors with main contacts S RT10 4 Main contacts ( NO contacts) for utilization category C- RT RT10 5 RT RT10 6 RT S RT10 44 RT10 45 RT10 46 RT RT RT S6 RT10 54 RT10 55 RT10 56 RT RT RT S10 RT10 64 RT10 65 RT10 66 RT RT RT S1 RT10 75 RT10 76 RT RT S RT14 46 Main contacts ( NO contacts) for utilization category C-1 RT D S6 RT14 56 RT D S10 RT14 66 RT D S1 RT14 76 RT D For RT1 vacuum contactors S10 RT1 64 RT1 65 RT1 66 S1 RT1 75 RT1 76 For contactors with 4 main contacts RT V RT V RT V S RT1 6 Main contacts (4 NO contacts) for utilization category C-1 S RT1 44 RT1 46 RT V RT V RT19 6-6E RT E RT E /187

198 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors Selection and ordering data For contactors Version Rated control supply voltage U s Size Type V C V DC Surge suppressors 1) Varistors TX TX TC44 ) Varistors ) With line spacer, for mounting onto the coil terminal 4 and 6 TC56 Varistors ) For sticking onto the contactor base or for mounting separately 8 and 1 TC5 and TC TC5 and TC56 14 TF68 and TF69 Varistors For sticking onto the contactor base or for mounting separately Varistors ) For separate screw connection or snapping onto 5 mm standard mounting rail Varistors ) For DC economy circuit; for snapping onto the side of auxiliary switches Order No. TX7 40-G TX7 40-H TX7 40-J TX7 40-K TX7 40-L TX7 46-G TX7 46-H TX7 46-J TX7 46-K TX7 46-L TX7 46-G TX7 46-H TX7 46-J TX7 46-K TX7 46-L TX7 5-G TX7 5-H TX7 5-J TX7 57-G TX7 57-H TX7 57-J TX7 5-., TX Surge suppressors RC elements TX7 46-., TX7 5-. Surge suppressors 4) Diodes 4 TC48 RC elements For lateral snapping onto auxiliary switch or TH 5 standard mounting rail TC5 and TC TC48... TC56 RC elements For lateral snapping onto auxiliary switch or TH 5 standard mounting rail Diode assemblies (diode and Zener diode) For DC solenoid system, for sticking onto the contactor base or for mounting separately TX7 46-R TX7 5-R TX7 46-S TX7 5-S TX7 46-T TX7 5-T TX7 46-U TX7 46-V TX7 5-R TX7 5-S TX7 5-T TX7 5-U TX7 5-V TX7 46-D TX ) The surge suppressor is included in the scope of supply of the following contactors: TF68 and TF69 (C operation): varistor circuit. ) The connection piece for mounting the surge suppressor must be bent slightly. ) Includes the peak value of the alternating voltage on the DC side. 4) Not for DC economy circuit. /188

199 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors For contactors Version Screw terminals Size Type Order No. Solid-state compatible auxiliary switch blocks with screw terminals For operation in dusty atmospheres and in solidstate circuits with rated operational currents I e C-14 and DC-1 of m at V 14 and 4 TF68, TF69 TC44... TC48 For mounting onto the side of contactors With 1 changeover contact. nd auxiliary switch block, left or right (replacement for TY U, TY V) TY U00 5TY Coupling links for control by PLC 14 TF68, TF69 For snapping onto the side of auxiliary switch, with surge suppression. Operating range: 17 V to 0 V DC. Power consumption: 0.5 W at 4 V DC. Fitted with varistor. Terminal covers for protection against inadvertent contact with exposed busbar connections TX D 14 TF68 Can be screwed onto free screw end on middle TX TF69 connecting bar. TX units required per contactor. (1 set = units) TX TC48 Can be screwed on free screw end. Covers one M6 TX6 506-B 8 busbar connection (1 set = 6 units). M8 TX6 56-B 10 and 14 TC5, TC56 M10 TX6 546-B TX6 56-B Links for paralleling (star jumpers) -pole, without connection terminal 1) Box terminals for laminated copper bars 1) The link for paralleling can be reduced by one pole. 14 TF68 TX D Cover plates for links for paralleling 14 TF68 cover plate must be used in order to protect against inadvertent contact with exposed busbar connections (EN 5074). TX E Without auxiliary conductor connection (1 set = units) 14 TF68 With single covers for protection against inadvertent contact (EN 5074) With auxiliary conductor connection (1 set = units) 14 TF69 Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary conductors: x ( ) mm TX E TX F /189

200 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors ccessories for TC, TF6 contactors For contactors Remarks Rated control supply voltage U s Order No. Size Type V DC rc chutes For contactors with extended operating range TC L.. With cutout for mounting resistor TY 44-0B Solenoid coils For contactors with extended operating range TC44 With series resistor, without varistor TC TB TB5 and TC TB TB56 and TC TY6 44-0LB4 TY6 44-0LF4 TY6 48-0LB4 TY6 48-0LF4 TY6 50-0LB4 TY6 50-0LF4 TY6 5-0LB4 TY6 5-0LF4 TY6 54-0LB4 TY6 54-0LF4 TY6 56-0LB4 TY6 56-0LF4 ll spare parts not mentioned above are identical to those for the standard contactors. /190

201 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for TC contactors Spare parts for TC contactors For contactors Version uxiliary contacts Screw terminals uxiliary switch blocks TY Size Type NO NC Order No. For mounting on the side Left Right and 4 TC44, TC48 uxiliary switch block (replacement for TY /-1B) TY TC48 nd auxiliary switch block, left 1) TY K 1 1 nd auxiliary switch block, right 1) TY L and 1 TC5, TC56 uxiliary switch block, left TY uxiliary switch block, right TY B 1 1 nd auxiliary switch block, left 1) TY K 1 1 nd auxiliary switch block, right 1) TY L 1 1 1) Can only be mounted on C-operated contactors. For contactors Version Order No. TY 50-0 rc chutes Size Type In order to ensure reliable operation of the contactors, only original replacement contacts should be used TC44 TC48 TC5 TC56 TC44 TC48 TC5 TC56 TY TY TY 50-0 TY rc chutes, -pole TY 44-0 TY 48-0 TY 5-0 TY 56-0 TC 48 Solenoid coils DC operation 1) C operation 1) TC44 TC48 TC5 TC56 TC44 TC48 TC5 TC56 TY6 44-0B.. TY6 48-0B.. TY6 5-0B.. TY6 56-0B.. TY TY TY TY ) For rated control supply voltages for solenoid coils see page /194. The 10th and 11th digit of the Order No. must be supplemented accordingly. /191

202 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for TF6, TK1 contactors Spare parts for TF6, TK1 contactors Selection and ordering data For contactors Version uxiliary contacts Screw terminals uxiliary switch blocks TY Size Type NO NC NC Order No. For mounting on the side Left Right 14 TF68, TF69 1st auxiliary switch block (replacement for TY /-1B) TY st auxiliary switch block TY E nd auxiliary switch block TY K00 (replacement for TY K/-1L) 1 1 For coil reconnection with DC economy circuit 14 TF68, TF69 1 TY G For contactors Version Order No. Solenoid coils TY Vacuum interrupters Size C operation 1) Type 14 TF68 TF69 DC operation 1) DC economy circuit 14 TF68 TF69 against overvoltage. The coil is supplied with switch-on electronics. Reversing contactors are required for size 14 contactors: Contactor type TF68 and TF69 Reversing contactor type TC44 (70 mm wide, 85 mm high) The solenoid coils are supplied without reversing contactor. In order to ensure reliable operation of the contactors, only original replacement interrupters should be used. TY7 68-0C.. TY7 69-0C.. TY7 68-0D.. TY7 69-0D.. 14 TF68 TF69 vacuum interrupters with components TY B TY B 1) For rated control supply voltages for solenoid coils see page /194. The 10th and 11th digit of the Order No. must be supplemented accordingly. /19

203 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for TF6, TK1 contactors Spare parts for TF6, TK1 contactors For contactors Version Rated control supply uxiliary contacts Order No. voltage U s Type V C Surge suppressors TK10... TK1 RC elements TK14... TK Terminal covers TK10, TK11 TK1, TK1 TK14, TK15 TK17 TK TK19 0-0B TK19 4-0C TK19 4-0D For mounting onto contactors TK TK TK TK uxiliary switch blocks TK1 For mounting on the side 1st block 1 NO + 1 NC TK nd block 1 NO + 1 NC TK19 10-B Locking devices TK10, TK11 TK1, TK1 TK14... TK17 TK10 TK11 TK1 TK1 TK14 TK15 TK17 rc chutes TK10 TK11 TK1 TK1 TK14 TK15 TK17 Magnetic coils C operation 1) TK10, TK11 TK1, TK1 TK14... TK17 For mechanical interlocking of two identical contactors, auxiliary contacts NC Mechanical interlock including mounting plate TK TK19-0 TK TK TK TK TK TK TK TK arc chute, 4-pole TK TK TK TK TK TK TK TK TK TK ) For rated control supply voltages for solenoid coils see page /194. The 10th and 11th digit of the Order No. must be supplemented accordingly. /19

204 ccessories and Spare Parts For T Contactors and Contactor Relays Spare parts for TF6, TK1 contactors Spare parts for TF6, TK1 contactors Rated control supply voltages (the 10th and 11th position of the order number must be changed) For contactor type TC44 TC48 TC5 TF68/69 TK10/11/1/1 Solenoid coil type TY TY TY TY TY7 68-0C.. TY7 69-0C.. TK TK Rated control supply voltage U s C operation Solenoid coils for 50 Hz 4 V C 110 V C 0/0 V C 40 V C C operation B0 F0 P0 1) U0 B0 F0 P0 1) U0 F0 P0 1) B0 ) F0 ) P0 ) U0 ) Solenoid coils for 50/60 Hz 4 V C 110 V C 10 V C 0 V C 0 V C C G K N L V C V C V C V C V C F7 M7 P7 ) Q7 S7 For contactor type TC4 TB5, TC5 TF68/69 Solenoid coil type TY6 44-0B.. TY6 48-0B.. TY6 50-0B.. TY6 5-0B.. TY6 54-0B.. TY6 56-0B.. TY7 68-0D.. TY7 69-0D.. Rated control supply voltage U s DC operation 4 V DC 48 V DC 60 V DC 110 V DC 15 V DC 0 V DC 0 V DC B4 W4 E4 F4 G4 M4 P4 B4 F4 M4 B4 F4 G4 M4 P4 1) Operating range at 0 V: 0.85 to 1.15 x U s ; lower operating range limit according to IEC ) Lower operating range limit at 0 V: 0.85 x U s according to IEC ) Rated control supply voltage U s : 50 Hz 60 Hz B0: 4 V F0: 110 V 10 V P0: 0 V to 0 V 40 V (only TK1 974) U0: 0 V to 40 V /194

205 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters / Introduction SIRIUS RW Soft Starters / General data RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications /6 RW0 /16 RW40 RW44 for High-Feature pplications / RW44

206 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters Introduction Overview RW0 RW40 RW44 Order No. RW soft starters RW soft starters for Standard applications RW0 soft starters RW0 /6 motors RW40 soft starters RW soft starters for High-Feature applications RW44 soft starters - Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection and - djustable current limiting solid-state soft starters provide numerous functions for higher-level requirements Page RW40 /16 RW44 / SIRIUS RW soft starters conventional starters /

207 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters General data Overview SIRIUS RW0 Standard applications SIRIUS RW40 Standard applications Rated current at 40 C Rated operational voltage Motor rating at 400 V SIRIUS RW44 High-Feature applications mbient temperature C Soft starting/ramp-down Voltage ramp Starting/stopping voltage % Starting and ramp-down time s Torque control Starting/stopping torque % Torque limit % Ramp time s Integral bypass contact system Intrinsic device protection Motor overload protection Thermistor motor protection Integrated remote RESET djustable current limiting Inside-delta circuit Breakaway pulse Creep speed in both directions of rotation Pump ramp-down DC braking Combined braking Motor heating Communication External display and operator module Operating measured value display Error logbook Event list Slave pointer function Trace function Programmable control inputs and outputs Number of parameter sets 1 1 Parameterization software (Soft Starter ES) Power semiconductors (thyristors) controlled phases controlled phases controlled phases Screw terminals Spring-type terminals UL/CS CE marking Soft starting under heavy starting conditions Function is available. -- Function not available. contactor is required. /

208 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters General data Selection aid for soft starters pplication SIRIUS RW0 Standard applications SIRIUS RW40 Standard applications SIRIUS RW44 High-Feature applications Normal starting (CLSS 10) Pumps Pumps with special pump ramp-down (to prevent water hammer) Heat pumps Hydraulic pumps Presses Conveyor belts Roller conveyors Screw conveyors Escalators Piston compressors Screw compressors Small fans 1) Centrifugal blowers Bow thrusters Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Stirrer Extruders Lathes Milling machines Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Large fans ) Circular saws/bandsaws Centrifuge Mills Breakers Recommended soft starter Possible soft starter Boundary conditions Type Maximum starting time Current limiting Starts per hour s % 1/h Normal starting (CLSS 10) Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) 60 1 on the basis of the required rated operational current of the conditions. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /4

209 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters General data Order No. scheme 1st - rd 4th 6th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 16th Soft starters SIRIUS soft starter generation Size Rated operational current Ie Connection type (screw terminals / spring-type terminals) Rated control supply voltage Us Rated operational voltage Ue Special versions R W Example R W B B 1 4 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. Permissible installation altitude

210 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Overview reduced. Soft starting reduces the stress on the connected equipment and Functionality t the same time the number of cables from the starter to themselves felt as clear-cut cost advantages. of these soft starters are protected during fault, e. g. brief disconnection of the control voltage, mechanical mechanism or main contact spring. control method phase controlled soft starters the current resulting from most applications it is non-critical. method used for these soft starters eliminates these direct current components during the ramp-up phase and prevents the range Us is 40 to 100 % and the ramp time tr can be set from 0 to 0 s. pplication instance do not occur. pplication areas See "Selection aid for soft starters" on page /4. /6

211 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Type Mechanics and environment Mounting dimensions (WxHxD) mm mm Permissible ambient temperature Operation Storage C C Weight Permissible mounting position 1) Installation type 1) Stand-alone installation Permissible installation altitude m Degree of protection. Type Control electronics Rated values 1/ % % 4 ±0 ± Type Power electronics Rated operational voltage Rated frequency % % ±10 Uninterrupted duty I % Minimum load I % Maximum cable length m 00

212 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Type Mechanics and environment Mounting dimensions (WxHxD) mm mm Permissible ambient temperature Operation Storage C C Weight Permissible mounting position Permissible installation altitude m Degree of protection Control electronics Rated values Power electronics Rated operational voltage Rated frequency % % % % ± 10 ± ± 10 ±10 Uninterrupted duty I % 100 Minimum load 1) I % 9 Maximum conductor length m 100 rated operational current Ie. /8

213 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Motor feeders with soft starters fter a short-circuit incident the unit is suitable for additional components in the feeder. Fuseless version Soft starters Motor starter protectors1) Rated current Rated current Q11 Q1 I Type of coordination "1" RW0 0 4 RW0 1 RW RW0 16 RW RW0 6 RW RW0 6 RW RW /9

214 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Fused version Soft starters Line contactors Rated current Rated current Q11 F1 Q1 Type of coordination "1": I RW0 0 ) RW0 1 RW0 14 RW0 16 RW0 18 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW N 80-6 N N N 8-6 N 84-6 N 84-6 N 10-6 N 1-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N I Fused version with NE1 SITOR fuses Soft starters ll-range fuses Line contactors Rated current Rated current Q11 F1 Q1 Type of coordination "": Iq RW0 0 ) RW0 1 RW0 14 RW0 16 RW0 18 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW Iq /10

215 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Fused version with NE SITOR fuses Soft starters Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current Q11 F F Type of coordination "" : Iq RW0 0 ) RW0 1 RW0 14 RW0 16 RW0 18 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW F Soft starters Cylindrical fuses Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current Q11 F F Type of coordination "" : Iq RW0 0 ) NC RW0 1 RW0 14 RW0 16 RW0 18 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW F F NC 0 NC 0 NC 0 NC 6 NC 6 NC 80 NC 80 NC Soft starters Line contactors Motor starter protectors Q11 Rated current Rated current Q1 Q1 F1 Rated current Type of coordination "" : Iq RW0 0 ) RW0 1 RW0 14 RW0 16 RW0 18 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW0 6 RW0 8 RW additional components in the feeder N 80-6 N N N 8-6 N 84-6 N 84-6 N 10-6 N 1-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N 16-6 Iq /11

216 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 Selection and ordering data voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Order No. Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e S00 S00 S00 S00 S00 S00 S00 S00 S00 S00 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S S S S S RW0 1-1BB 4 RW0 14-1BB 4 RW0 16-1BB 4 4 RW0 18-1BB 4 RW0 1-BB 4 RW0 14-BB 4 RW0 16-BB 4 4 RW0 18-BB 4 RW0 6-1BB 4 4 RW0 8-1BB 4 RW0 6-BB 4 4 RW0 8-BB 4 RW0 6- BB 4 BB 4 RW0 8- BB 4 RW0 46- BB 4 BB 4 1 U s 0 1 rated operational voltage U e rated control supply voltage U s.6 Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW0 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 0 /1

217 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 ccessories Conductor cross-section For soft starters Solid or stranded WG cables, solid or stranded mm² mm² WG Nm Three-phase feeder terminals S00 S0 Order No. For soft starters Order No. uxiliary terminals Covers for soft starters RW0 4. S RT F Terminal covers for box terminals RW0. RW0 4. S S RT19 6-4E RT E Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connections RW0 4. S RT E1 Manuals RW0/RW40 1) Operating instructions 1) RW0 1. RW0. RW0. RW0 4. RW0 1. RW0. RW0. RW0 4. S00 S0 S S S00 S0 S S ZX10 1-0RW0-1B1 ZX10 1-0RW0-D1 Service&Support portal at /1

218 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 For soft starters Order No. Link modules to motor starter protectors 1) RW0 1. S00 S00 R9 1-1B00 RW0. S0 S00/S0 R9 1-1B00 RW0 6. S S R RW0 46., S S R RW0 1. S00 S00 R9 11-G00 RW0. S0 S0 R9 1-G00 Order No. Covers and push-in lugs (only for RW0 0) RP1 90 Sealable covers Push-in lugs RP1 90 RP1 90 RP1 90 Order No. Tool for opening spring-type terminals for sizes S00 and S0 Spring-type terminals R Blank labels Screwdrivers Unit labeling plates 1) R RT SB0 /14

219 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW0 More information pplication examples for normal starting (CLSS 10) Normal starting CLSS 10 In motor pplication Conveyor belt Roller conveyor Compressor Small fan 1) Pump Hydraulic pump Starting parameters - Starting voltage % Starting time s Note: These tables present sample set values and device sizes. They are intended only for the purposes of information and are not binding. The set values depend on the application in question and must be optimized during commissioning. The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of Technical ssistance. a larger device. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. recommended. No capacitive elements are permitted in the motor feeder prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the soft starter. Note: When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops occur as a rule on starters of all types (direct starters, star-delta starters, soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimensioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer is dimensioned with only a small margin, it is best for the control voltage to be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of the main voltage) in order to avoid the potential switching off of the soft starter. Schematic circuit diagram of power electronics Status graphs Manual for SIRIUS RW0/40 Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program mains properties, motor and load data, and special application requirements.

220 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 Overview RW0 soft starters. integrated functions such as adjustable current limiting, motor overload and intrinsic device protection, and optional thermistor to purchase and install protection equipment such as overload semiconductor fuses from short-circuiting. phase failure, missing load, non-permissible tripping time/class setting, thermal overloading or device faults. "Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC See. Functionality t the same time the number of cables from the starter to themselves felt as clear-cut cost advantages. of these soft starters are protected during fault, e. g. brief disconnection of the control voltage, mechanical mechanism or main contact spring. adjustable current limiting, moment the voltage of the soft starter is controlled so that the protection. s the result of this function the actual motor ramp- starter. motor overload protection according to protection if a different motor management control device is to thermistor motor protection evaluation circuits in the sensor circuit all result in the direct disconnection of the soft starter. nd if ever the soft starter trips, various reset control voltage. control method phase controlled soft starters the current resulting from most applications it is non-critical. these direct current components during the ramp-up phase and motor ramp-up that is uniform in speed, torque and current rise, balancing". pplication in all three phases throughout the entire starting time and disturbing direct current components are eliminated in addition. pplication areas See "Selection aid for soft starters" on page /4. /16

221 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 Type Mechanics and environment Mounting dimensions (WxHxD) mm mm Permissible ambient temperature Operation Storage C C Weight 1.9 Permissible mounting position 1) 8.9 Installation type 1) Stand-alone installation RW40. RW40., RW40 4. Permissible installation altitude m Degree of protection Type Control electronics Rated values 1/ % % ±0 ±10 0 C Type Power electronics Rated operational voltage % Maximum blocking voltage (thyristor) Rated frequency % ±10 Uninterrupted duty I e ) % Minimum load % I ) Maximum cable length m 00

222 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 Motor feeders with soft starters is defective therefore unsuitable for further use additional components in the feeder. Fuseless version Soft starters Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers 1) Rated Rated Rated Q11 current Q1 Q1 I current Q1 I current Type of coordination 1 RW40 4 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW RW40 soft starter. /18

223 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 Fused version Soft starters Line contactors Rated Rated Q11 current F1 current Q1 Type of coordination 1 : I q RW40 4 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW N 80-6 N 8-6 N 84-6 N 84-6 N 10-6 N 1-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N 16-6 N 44-6 N Fused version with NE1 SITOR fuses Soft starters ll-range fuses Line contactors Rated current Rated current Q11 Q1 Type of coordination : I q RW40 4 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW /19

224 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 Fused version with NE SITOR fuses Soft starters Rated Rated Rated Rated Q11 current F current F current F current Type of coordination : I q RW40 4 RW40 6 RW RW40 6 RW40 8 RW Soft starters Cylindrical fuses Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Q11 current F current F current F current F current Type of coordination : I q RW40 4 RW40 6 RW NC 40 NC 6 NC 80 NC RW40 6 RW40 8 RW NC Soft starters Line contactors Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers Rated Rated Rated Rated Q11 current Q1 Q1 current Q1 current F1 current Type of coordination : I q RW40 4 N N N N 84-6 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW40 6 RW40 8 RW N 10-6 N 1-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N 16-6 N 44-6 N /0

225 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 Selection and ordering data SIRIUS RW40 for normal starting (CLSS 10) RW40. RW40. RW40 4. voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e Rated operational voltage U e S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S S S S S S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S S S S S RW40 4-1BB 4 RW40 6-1BB 4 4 RW40 8-1BB 4 RW40 4-BB 4 RW40 6-BB 4 4 RW40 8-BB 4 RW40 6- BB 4 BB 4 RW40 8- BB 4 RW BB 4 BB 4 RW40 4-1BB RW40 6-1BB RW40 8-1BB RW40 4-BB RW40 6-BB RW40 8-BB RW40 6- BB BB RW40 8- BB RW BB BB 1 U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The RW40 soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 Switching frequency can be increased by means of auxiliary fans. 0 1 /1

226 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 RW40. RW40. RW40 4. voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e U s 4 V C/DC Rated operational voltage U e U s 4 V C/DC S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S S S S S S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 S0 RW40 4-1TB04 RW40 6-1TB04 RW40 8-1TB04 RW40 4-TB04 RW40 6-TB04 RW40 8-TB04 RW40 6- TB04 TB04 RW40 8- TB04 RW TB04 TB S RW S S RW S RW S Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The RW40 soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 Switching frequency can be increased by means of auxiliary fans. /

227 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e Rated operational voltage U e S6 BB 4 BB 4 S1 BB 4 BB 4 BB 4 BB 4 S6 BB BB S1 BB BB BB BB ) 6 U s ) 4 Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The RW40 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /

228 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 SIRIUS RW40 for heavy starting (CLSS 0) RW40. RW40. RW40 4. voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e 11 S0 RW40 6-1BB 4 11 S S0 RW40 6-BB 4 11 S S RW40 6- BB S BB S BB S BB S BB 4 Rated operational voltage U e S0 RW40 6-1BB 11 0 S S0 RW40 6-BB 11 0 S0 9 0 S RW40 6- BB S BB S BB S BB S BB U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The RW40 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 0 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 Switching frequency can be increased by means of auxiliary fans. In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. 0 1 /4

229 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 RW40. RW40. RW40 4. voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e U s 4 V C/DC 11 S0 RW40 6-1TB04 11 S0 11 S0 RW40 6-TB04 11 S0 9 0 S RW40 6- TB S TB S TB S TB S TB04 Rated operational voltage U e U s 4 V C/DC S S S S0 9 0 S RW S S S S Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The RW40 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 0 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 Switching frequency can be increased by means of auxiliary fans. In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter.

230 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp Rated operational voltage U e 80 0 S6 BB S6 BB S6 BB S1 BB S1 BB S1 BB S1 BB 4 Rated operational voltage U e S6 BB S6 BB S6 BB S1 BB S1 BB S1 BB S1 BB ) 6 U s ) 4 Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The RW40 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 40 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /6

231 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 ccessories Conductor cross-section Solid or stranded WG cables, solid or stranded mm² mm² WG Nm Three-phase feeder terminals torque For soft starters S0 Order No. For soft starters Order No. Box terminal blocks for soft starters uxiliary terminals Covers for soft starters For round and ribbon cables S6 uxiliary conductor connection for box terminals S1 RT G RW40 4. S RT F Terminal covers for box terminals RW40. RW40 4. S S S6 S1 Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connections RW40 4. S S6 S1 Sealing covers RW40. RW40. RW40 4. S0 S S S6 S1 RT19 6-4E RT E RT E RT E1 RT E1 RW PB10 RW PB00

232 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 For soft starters Order No. Modules for RESET 1) U s S6 S1 Mechanical RESET comprising S6 S1 RU SB0 00-0E11 Cable releases with holder for RESET S6 S1 RU B RU C For soft starters Order No. Fans (to increase switching frequency and for device mounting in positions different from the normal position) RW40. S0 RW49 8-8VB00 RW40. RW40 4. S S Manuals RW0/RW40 1) Operating instructions 1) RW40. RW40. RW40 4. RW40. RW40. RW40 4. S0 S S S6 S1 S0 S S S6 S1 ZX10 1-0RW0-1B1 ZX10 1-0RW40-11 ZX10 1-0RW40-D1 Service&Support portal at /8

233 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 For soft starters Order No. Link modules to motor starter protectors 1) RW40. S0 S00/S0 R9 1-1B00 RW40 6. S S R RW40 46., S S R RW40. S0 S0 R9 1-G00 Order No. Tools for opening spring-type terminals for sizes S00 and S0 Spring-type terminals Screwdrivers R R Blank labels Unit labeling plates 1) RT SB0 Spare parts For soft starters Order No. U s Fans Fans S6 S6 RW49 6-8VX0 RW49 6-8VX40 S1 S1 /9

234 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 More information pplication examples for normal starting (CLSS 10) Normal starting CLSS 10 I n motor ) pplication Conveyor belt Roller conveyor Compressor Small fan 1) Pump Hydraulic pump Starting parameters - Starting voltage - Starting time - Current limit value % s 10 I I Ramp-down time s I I I I pplication examples for heavy starting (CLSS 0) Heavy starting CLSS 0 I n motor ) pplication Stirrer Centrifuge Starting parameters - Starting voltage - Starting time - Current limit value Ramp-down time 0 0 % s 40 0 I 40 0 I Note: These tables present sample set values and device sizes. They are intended only for the purposes of information and are not binding. The set values depend on the application in question and must be optimized during commissioning. The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of nearest /0

235 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW0, RW40 for Standard pplications RW40 device. For accurate dimensioning, use the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. Where long starting times are involved, the integrated solid-state No capacitive elements are permitted in the motor feeder prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the soft starter. Note: When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops occur as a rule on starters of all types (direct starters, star-delta starters, soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimensioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer is dimensioned with only a small margin, it is best for the control voltage to be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of the main voltage) in order to avoid the potential switching off of the soft starter. Schematic circuit diagram of power electronics Status graphs Manual for SIRIUS RW0/40 Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program mains properties, motor and load data, and special application requirements. > Software /1

236 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Overview current limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be reliable avoidance of sudden torque applications and current further great reduction in the heat loss occuring during operation of the soft starter at rated value. possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the application- pplicable standards Functionality cable to the soft starter, thus enabling active indications and the operations. circuiting so that the soft starter is still functional after a short and setting jobs. With this function the motor can be controlled loads. Highlights time, and much more in three separate parameter sets Start-up detection costs Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection Simple adaptation to the motor feeder Simple mounting and commissioning Soft Starter ES parameterization software Feature soft starters. SIRIUS RW44 Soft Starter Function Block Library for SIMTIC PCS 7 pplication pplication areas /

237 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Type Mechanics and environment Mounting dimensions (WxHxD) mm mm Permissible ambient temperature Operation Storage C C Weight Permissible mounting position Installation type Stand-alone installation Permissible installation altitude m Degree of protection Type Control electronics Rated values % % ±10 0 C ±10 Type Power electronics Rated operational voltage for inline circuit % Maximum blocking voltage (thyristor) Rated operational voltage for inside-delta circuit Rated frequency % % ±10 Uninterrupted duty I e ) % Minimum load I M ) % 8 Maximum cable length m higher values for the rated operational voltage or current must be /

238 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Motor feeders with soft starters is defective therefore unsuitable for further use additional components in the feeder. Inline circuit fuseless version Soft starters Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers 1) Rated current Rated current Q11 Q1 I q I q I q RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW RW RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW /4

239 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Inline circuit fused version Soft starters Line contactor up to 400 V Braking contactors 1)) Q11 Type of coordination 1 : I q RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW44 66 Rated current Rated current F1 N 80-6 N 8-6 N 84-6 N 80-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N 44-6 N Q1 Q91 Q9 contactor is required. J > J

240 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Inline circuit fused version with NE1 SITOR all-range fuse Soft starters ll-range fuses Line contactor up to 400 V Rated current Rated current Q11 Type of coordination : I q RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW Braking contactors 1)) Q1 Q91 Q9 contactor is required. J > J /6

241 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Inline circuit fused version with NE or NC SITOR semiconductor fuse Soft starters Semiconductor fuses (cylinder) Rated Rated Rated Rated Q11 current F current F current F current Type of coordination : I q RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW NC 80 NC 00 NC Soft starters Rated current Line contactor up to 400 V Q11 Q1 Type of coordination : I q RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW Braking contactors 1)) Q91 Q9 J > J Motor starter protectors/ circuit breakers Q1 Rated current F1 N 80-6 N 8-6 N 84-6 N 80-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N 44-6 N 44-6 Rated current

242 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Inside-delta circuit fused version with NE or NC SITOR fuses Soft starters Semiconductor fuses (cylinder) Rated Rated Rated Rated Q11 current F current F current F current Type of coordination RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW NC 80 NC 00 NC Soft starters Q11 Type of coordination RW44 RW44 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 6 RW44 4 RW44 44 RW44 46 RW44 66 Line contactor up to Motor starter protectors/circuit breakers 400 V Rated current Rated current Rated current Q1 Q F1 N 84-6 N 80-6 N 1-6 N 16-6 N 40-6 N 44-6 N 60-6 N /8

243 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Selection and ordering data SIRIUS RW44 for normal starting (CLSS 10) in inline circuit voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp ) U s RW44 - BC 4 RW44 - BC 4 RW44 4- BC 4 BC 4 RW44 6- BC 4 BC 4 1 RW44 4- BC 4 BC 4 RW44 6- BC 4 RW44 4- BC 4 RW BC 4 BC 4 RW BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 RW BC Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /9

244 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp ) U s RW44 - BC RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC BC 1 RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC RW BC 6 4 Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /40

245 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp ) U s RW44 - BC 6 RW44 - BC 6 RW44 4- BC 6 BC 6 RW44 6- BC 6 BC 6 1 RW44 4- BC 6 BC 6 RW44 6- BC 6 RW44 4- BC 6 RW BC 6 BC 6 RW BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 BC 6 RW BC Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /41

246 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 SIRIUS RW44 for heavy starting (CLSS 0) in inline circuit voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp 9 6 RW44 - BC RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC 4 00 BC 4 1) U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 40 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter /4

247 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp RW44 - BC 6 0 RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC 68 BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC 900 BC 1) U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 40 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /4

248 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp RW44 - BC RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC 6 68 BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC 6 1) U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 40 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter /44

249 SIRIUS RW44 for very heavy starting (CLSS 0) in inline circuit SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp 9 6 RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC 4 00 RW BC 4 1) U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 60 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter.

250 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp RW44 - BC 6 0 RW44 4- BC BC BC 68 RW44 4- BC BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC 900 RW BC 1) U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 60 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /46

251 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inline circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC 6 68 RW44 4- BC BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC RW BC 6 1) U s Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 60 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter.

252 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 SIRIUS RW44 for normal starting (CLSS 10) in inside-delta circuit voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inside-delta circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp ) U s I e refers to the induction Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: RW44 - BC 4 RW44 - BC 4 RW44 4- BC 4 BC 4 RW44 6- BC 4 BC 4 1 RW44 4- BC 4 BC 4 RW44 6- BC 4 RW44 4- BC 4 RW BC 4 BC 4 RW BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 BC 4 RW BC 4 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. 6 4 /48

253 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Normal starting (CLSS 10) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inside-delta circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp ) U s RW44 - BC RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC BC 1 RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC BC RW BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC RW BC 6 4 I e refers to the induction Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 10 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 00 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 5 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter. /49

254 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 SIRIUS RW44 for heavy starting (CLSS 0) in inside-delta circuit voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inside-delta circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp 10 0 RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC BC BC BC BC 4 00 BC BC BC BC BC BC RW BC 4 ) U s I e refers to the induction Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 40 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter

255 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inside-delta circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC BC RW44 4- BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC RW BC 4 00 BC 400 BC 600 BC BC 60 BC 60 BC BC BC BC BC RW BC ) U s I e refers to the induction Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 40 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter.

256 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 SIRIUS RW44 for very heavy starting (CLSS 0) in inside-delta circuit voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inside-delta circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp 10 0 RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC BC BC BC BC BC 4 00 BC BC BC BC BC RW BC 4 ) U s I e refers to the induction Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 60 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter.

257 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 voltage U RW ambient temperature 40 C Very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Rated values of induction motors Rated values of induction motors in inside-delta circuit Operational Rating at operational Operational Rating at operational voltage U e current I e e current I e Order No. hp hp hp hp RW44 - BC RW44 4- BC BC BC BC BC RW44 6- BC RW44 4- BC RW44 4- BC BC 4 00 BC 400 BC 600 BC BC 60 BC 60 BC BC BC BC 1 00 RW BC ) U s I e refers to the induction Note: The listed motor ratings are rough guide values. The soft starter should always be designed on the basis of the required rated operational current of the motor. The SIRIUS RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for easy starting conditions. The selection and ordering data were determined for the following boundary conditions (see also the notes on page /4): Maximum starting time in s: 60 Maximum starting current in % of motor current I e : 50 Maximum number of starts per hour in 1/h: 1 In the event of more exacting requirements, it may be necessary to choose a larger device. However, in some cases the designedin safety reserves also permit the listed units to be used in boundary conditions which are slightly more demanding. tailored exactly to the application can be found in the manuals. Siemens recommends the use of the selection and simulation program Win-Soft Starter.

258 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 ccessories Order No. 1 Floating license for one user Floating license for one user Floating license for one user Engineering software Runtime software ZS1 6-1XX00-0Y0 ZS1 6-XX00-0YB0

259 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Order No. PC cables For PC/PG communication with SIRIUS RW44 soft starters USB/serial adapters PROFIBUS communication modules For connecting the PC cable to the USB interface of a PC RW KC00 External display and operator modules RW C00 Connection cable operator module RW C00

260 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 For soft starters Order No. Box terminal blocks for soft starters Box terminal blocks Covers for soft starters RW44. RW44. uxiliary conductor connection for box terminals RW44 4. Terminal covers for box terminals RW44. and RW44. RW44 4. Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connections RW44. and RW44. RW44 4. RT G RT E RT E1 Manuals RW44 1) RW44 ZX10 1-0RW44-1B1 Operating instructions 1) RW44 ZX10 1-0RW44-00 Service&Support portal at > Controls > Soft Spare parts For soft starters Order No. Fans Fans RW44. and RW44. RW49 6-8VX0 RW49 6-8VX40 RW49 RW44 4. RW44 6. RW44 6. RW VX0 RW VX40

261 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 More information pplication examples for normal starting (CLSS 10) Normal starting CLSS 10 I n motor ) pplication Conveyor belt Roller conveyor Compressor Small fan 1) Pump Hydraulic pump Starting parameters current limiting - Starting voltage - Starting time - Current limit value - Starting torque - Starting time % s I I Ramp-down mode pplication examples for heavy starting (CLSS 0) Heavy starting CLSS 0 I n motor ) pplication Stirrer Centrifuge Milling machines Starting parameters current limiting - Starting voltage - Starting time - Current limit value - Starting torque - Starting time % s 0 0 I I 0 0 Ramp-down mode 0 0 I 0 0 pplication examples for very heavy starting (CLSS 0) Very heavy starting CLSS 0 I n motor ) pplication Large fans ) Mills Breakers Circular saws/bandsaws Starting parameters current limiting - Starting voltage - Starting time - Current limit value - Starting torque - Starting time % s 0 60 I I 60 Ramp-down mode 60 I I 0 60 Note: These tables present sample set values and device sizes. They are intended only for the purposes of information and are not binding. The set values depend on the application in question and must be optimized during commissioning. The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of nearest

262 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Circuit concept Rated current I e corresponds to the rated motor current I n, cables to the motor a larger device must be selected. No capacitive elements are permitted in the motor feeder prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the soft starter. Note: When induction motors are switched on, voltage drops occur as a rule on starters of all types (direct starters, star-delta starters, soft starters). The infeed transformer must always be dimensioned such that the voltage dip when starting the motor remains within the permissible tolerance. If the infeed transformer is dimensioned with only a small margin, it is best for the control voltage to be supplied from a separate circuit (independently of the main voltage) in order to avoid the potential switching off of the soft starter. Rated current I e I n, Which circuit? the soft starter to motor connections are long, this circuit is rating. most favorable solution. Device interface, PROFIBUS DP communication module, Soft Starter ES parameterizing and operating software SIRIUS RW44 Soft Starter Function Block Library for SIMTIC PCS 7 process monitoring.

263 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters RW44 for High-Feature pplications RW44 Manual for SIRIUS RW44 Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program mains properties, motor and load data, and special application requirements.

264 SIRIUS RW Soft Starters Notes /60

265 Protection Equipment 4 4/ Introduction Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 4/6 General data 4/11 For motor protection 4/1 For motor protection with overload relay function 4/1 For starter combinations 4/14 For transformer protection 4/15 For system protection according to UL 489/CS C. No /16 For transformer protection according to UL 489/CS C. No.5-0 ccessories 4/17 Mountable accessories 4/0 Busbar accessories 4/ RV9 infeed system 4/7 Rotary operating mechanisms 4/8 Mounting accessories 4/1 Enclosures and front plates SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 4/4 General data 4/40 For motor protection 4/41 For motor protection with overload relay function 4/4 For starter combinations 4/4 For transformer protection 4/44 For fuse monitoring 4/45 For system protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 ccessories 4/46 Mountable accessories 4/49 Busbar accessories 4/51 Rotary operating mechanisms 4/5 Mounting accessories 4/54 Enclosures and front plates Overload Relays 4/56 General Data SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays new 4/6 RU up to 40 for Standard applications 4/70 ccessories SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays 4/7 RU11 up to 100 for Standard applications 4/79 ccessories SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays new 4/81 RB0, RB1 up to 40 for Standard applications 4/89 ccessories SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays 4/90 RB0, RB1 up to 60 for Standard applications 4/99 ccessories for RB0, RB1 4/100 RB, RB, RB4 new up to 60 High-Feature applications 4/110 ccessories for RB, RB, RB4 new 4

266 Protection Equipment Introduction Overview Type RV0 RV1 RV RV4 RV7 RV8 SIRIUS RV motor protection circuit breakers up to 40 pplications System protection 1) 1) Motor protection Motor protection with overload relay function Starter combinations Transformer protection Size S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00 S00 4 Rated current I n Up to 16 Up to 40 Up to 16 Up to Up to 16 Up to 40 Up to 16 Up to 5 Up to 15 Up to 15 Rated operational voltage U e V 690 C ) 690 C ) 690 C ) 690 C ) 690 C 690 C according to IEC Rated frequency 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 Trip class CLSS 10 CLSS 10 CLSS 10 Thermal overload release to to 7... None ) to non-adjustable non-adjustable Electronic release multiple of the rated current 1 times 1 times 1 times 0 times 1 times 0 times 4) 4) Short-circuit breaking k 0/55/100 55/100 0/55/100 55/100 capacity I cu at 400 V C ccessories For sizes S00 S0 S00 S0 S00 S0 S00 S0 S00 S00 uxiliary switches Signaling switches Undervoltage releases Shunt releases Isolator modules Insulated three-phase busbar system Busbar adapters Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms Link modules Enclosures for surface mounting Front plates Infeed system Sealable scale covers for setting knobs Has this function or can use this accessory Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory 1) For symmetrical loading of the three phases. ) With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V C. For DC applications, see Technical ) For overload protection of the motors, appropriate overload relays must be used. 4) ccording to UL 489 at 480 Y/77 V C: 65 k. 4/

267 Protection Equipment Introduction Type RV10 RV11 RV1 RV14 RV16 RV16 RV17 SIRIUS RV1 motor protection circuit breakers up to 100 pplications System protection 1) 1) Motor protection Motor protection with overload relay function Starter combinations Transformer protection Fuse monitoring Voltage transformercircuit breaker for distance protection Size S, S S, S S, S S S00 S00 S Rated current I n Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to Up to Up to 70 Rated operational voltage V 690 C ) 690 C ) 690 C ) 690 C ) 690 C ) 400 C 690 C U e according to IEC Rated frequency 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 16 / /60 Trip class CLSS 10, 0 CLSS 10 CLSS 10 Thermal overload release to None ) to to non-adjustable Electronic release multiple of the rated current 1 times 1 times 1 times 0 times 6 times times 1 times 4) Short-circuit breaking k 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/ capacity I cu at 400 V C ccessories For sizes S S S S S S S S00 S00 S 4 uxiliary switches 5) Signaling switches Undervoltage releases Shunt releases Isolator modules Insulated three-phase busbar system Busbar adapters Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms mechanisms Link modules Enclosures for surface mounting Front plates Has this function or can use this accessory Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory 1) For symmetrical loading of the three phases. ) With molded-plastic enclosure 500 V C. For DC applications, see Technical ) For overload protection of the motors, appropriate overload relays must be used. 4) ccording to UL t 480 Y/77 V C: 65 k; - t 480 V C: 65 k (10 to 0 ). 4/

268 Protection Equipment Introduction Type RU1 RB0 RB1 SIRIUS overload relays up to 40 pplications System protection 1) 1) 1) Motor protection lternating current, three-phase lternating current, single-phase Direct current Size of contactor S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 Rated operational current I e Up to 16 Up to 40 Up to 16 Up to 40 Up to 16 Up to 40 Rated operational voltage U e V 690 C 690 C 690 C Rated frequency 50/60 50/60 50/60 Trip class CLSS 10 CLSS 10, 0 CLSS 5, 10, 0, 0 djustable 4 Thermal overload release to Electronic overload release to to Rating for induction motor at 400 V C kw ccessories For sizes S00 S0 S00 S0 S00 S0 Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation Mechanical RESET Cable releases for RESET Electrical remote RESET Integrated in the unit Terminal covers for ring terminal lug connections ) ) Sealable covers for setting knobs Has this function or can use this accessory Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory 1) The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the assigned electrical loads (e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder. RU1 overload relays with ring terminal lug connections for mounting onto contactors. 4/4

269 Protection Equipment Introduction Type RU11 RB0 RB1 RB to RB4 SIRIUS overload relays up to 60 pplications System protection 1) 1) 1) 1) Motor protection lternating current, three-phase lternating current, single-phase Direct current Size of contactor S, S S... S1 S... S1 S00... S1 Rated operational current Ie Up to 50 Up to Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to 00 Up to 60 Up to 50 Up to 100 Up to 00 Up to 60 Up to 100 ) Up to 100 ) Up to 00 Up to 60 Rated operational voltage Ue V 690/1000 ) C 690/1000 4) C 690/1000 4) C 690/1000 5) C Rated frequency 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 Trip class CLSS 10 CLSS 10, 0 CLSS 5, 10, 0, 0 djustable Thermal overload release Electronic overload release Rating for induction motor at 400 V C kw to to to to to to CLSS 5, 10, 0, 0 djustable to to kw Pages ccessories For sizes S S S S S6 S10/S1 S S S6 S10/S1 S00 S0 S S S6 S10/S1 Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) 6) Mechanical RESET Cable releases for RESET Electrical remote RESET Integrated in the unit Integrated in the unit Terminal covers Sealable covers for setting knobs Integrated in the unit Pages 4 Has this function or can use this accessory -- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory 1) The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the assigned electrical loads (e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder. ) Selection of current measuring modules according to the respective operational current V C. 5) With reference to the RB9.6 current measuring modules. 6) Stand-alone installation without accessories is possible. 4/5

270 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 General data General data Overview The following illustration shows our RV motor protection circuit breakers with the accessories which can be mounted for Mountable accessories for SIRIUS RV motor protection circuit breakers Type of construction 4 The RV motor protection circuit breakers are available in two max. rated current 16, at 415 V C suitable for induction motors up to 7.5 kw max. rated current 40, at 415 V C suitable for induction motors up to 18.5 kw up to 100 see page 4/ onwards. Connection methods The new RV motor protection circuit breakers are compact, current limiting motor protection circuit breakers which are are used for switching and protecting three-phase induction motors of up to 18.5 kw at 415 V C and for other loads with rated currents of up to 40. The RV motor protection circuit breakers are available with screw terminals, spring-type terminals and ring terminal lug connection. Screw terminals Spring-type terminals to 100 see page 4/40 onwards. 4/6

271 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 General data General data Increased safety type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RV0 motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors with increased Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th Motor protection circuit breakers R V SIRIUS Innovation Type of motor protection circuit breakers Size Switching capacity Setting range for overload release Trip class (CLSS) Connection methods With or without auxiliary switch Special versions Example R V Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. pplication Operating conditions RV motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for use in any climate. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms in which no severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic vapors, areas, suitable enclosures must be provided. RV motor protection circuit breakers can optionally be fed from the top or from below. The permissible ambient temperatures, the maximum switching capacities, the tripping currents and other boundary conditions RV motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for operation in IT systems (IT networks). In this case, the different short-circuit breaking capacity in the IT system must be taken into account. Since operational currents, starting currents and current peaks are different even for motors with identical power ratings due to the inrush current, the motor ratings in the selection tables motor to be protected is always paramount to the choice of the most suitable motor protection circuit breaker. This also applies to motor protection circuit breakers for transformer protection. Possible uses The RV motor protection circuit breakers can be used: For short-circuit protection For motor protection (also with overload relay function) For system protection For short-circuit protection for starter combinations For transformer protection s main control and EMERGENCY-STOP switches For operation in IT systems (IT networks) For switching of DC currents 4 4/7

272 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 General data General data General data Type RV. 1. RV7 11, RV8 11 RV.. S00 S00 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) Standards mm mm 45 x 97 x x 109 x 91 Yes Yes Yes Yes 45 x 144 x 9 Number of poles Max. rated current I n max (= max. rated operational current I e ) Permissible ambient temperature I n : I n : Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure(applies for motor protection circuit breaker inside enclosure ) C C C % % % % 45 x 97 x x 119 x (current reduction above +60 C) (The devices must not be mounted side-by-side and they must not be assembled with link modules with contactors. lateral clearance of 9 mm is required.) Rated operational voltage U e V C V C Rated frequency 50/60 Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Utilization categories Trip class CLSS cc. to IEC DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms) Power loss P v for each motor protection circuit breaker Dependent on the rated current I n (upper setting range) I n : I n : I n : I n : 16 I n : I n : 8... I n : k k k W W W W W W W 690 (with molded-plastic enclosure 500 V) 600 Shock resistance cc. to IEC g/ms 5/11 (square and sine pulse) Degree of protection Touch protection cc. to IEC 6059 cc. to EN 5074 C IP0 Finger-safe Temperature compensation cc. to IEC C Phase failure sensitivity cc. to IEC Yes Explosion protection safe operation of motors with increased safety Yes for RV0 type of protection On request Isolating function Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch characteristics (with corresponding accessories) Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits, required for PELV applications Permissible mounting positions cc. to IEC cc. to IEC cc. to EN Mechanical endurance Operating cycles Electrical endurance Operating cycles Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15 Yes Yes Yes Yes /8

273 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 General data General data Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, NO, NC, NO + NC Signaling switch Transverse auxiliary switch with 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC, NO Max. Rated voltage V C V C Uninterrupted current Switching capacity 1 NO + 1 NC, NO, NC: 600, Q00; NO + NC: 00, Q00 600, Q00 B600, R00 C00, R00 Front transverse auxiliary switches Switching capacity for different voltages 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC, NO Rated operational current I e - 4 V - 0 V V V I th, alternating voltage - 4 V - 0 V V V L/R 00 ms - 4 V - 48 V - 60 V V - 0 V Minimum load capacity V m Front transverse solid-state compatible auxiliary switches Switching capacity for different voltages 1 CO Rated operational voltage U e lternating voltage V 15 Rated operational current I e /C-14 at U e = 15 V 0.1 Rated operational voltage U e Direct voltage L/R 00 ms V 60 Rated operational current I e /DC-1 at U e = 60 V 0. Minimum load capacity V m Lateral auxiliary switches with signaling switch Rated operational current I e - 4 V - 0 V V V I th, alternating voltage - 4 V - 0 V V V L/R 00 ms - 4 V V - 0 V V Minimum load capacity V m Switching capacity for different voltages: Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, NO, NC, NO + NCSignaling switch /9

274 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 General data General data uxiliary releases Undervoltage releases Shunt releases Power consumption - C voltages - DC voltages V/W W 0./1 0 0./ C voltages - DC voltages V/W W 7./.4.1 Response voltage V x U s x U s V x U s Opening time maximum ms 0 Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits Melting fuses operational class gg 10 Miniature circuit breakers C characteristic 6 (prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 k) Conductor cross-sections of main circuit Type RV. 11 RV. 1 RV7 11, RV8 11 S00 S0 S00 Connection type Screw terminals Terminal screw Operating devices mm ø ø ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) 1), x 4 mm x ( ) 1), x 4 x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1) x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1),1 x 10 WG x ( ) 1), x 1 Connection type x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) Spring-type terminals , max. x , max , max x ( ) 4 Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 and.5 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) x ( ) mm x ( ) x (1... 6) mm x ( ) x (1... 6) WG x (0... 1) x ( ) Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation mm.6.6 Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits Connection type Screw terminals Terminal screw Operating devices mm ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) Connection type Spring-type terminals Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 and.5 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) Max. external diameter of the conductor insulation mm.6 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping sections are used, this restriction does not apply. 4/10

275 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 For motor protection For motor protection Selection and ordering data CLSS 10, without auxiliary switches Rated current Suitable for three-phase induction motors 1) with P RV RV0 11-0E0 RV RV Setting range for thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals kw k Size S RV RV0 11-0B10 RV0 11-0C10 RV0 11-0D10 RV RV0 11-0B0 RV0 11-0C0 RV0 11-0D RV0 11-0E10 RV0 11-0F10 RV0 11-0G10 RV0 11-0H10 RV0 11-0E0 RV0 11-0F0 RV0 11-0G0 RV0 11-0H RV0 11-0J10 RV0 11-0K10 RV RV0 11-1B10 RV0 11-0J0 RV0 11-0K0 RV RV0 11-1B RV0 11-1C10 RV0 11-1D10 RV0 11-1E10 RV0 11-1F10 RV0 11-1C0 RV0 11-1D0 RV0 11-1E0 RV0 11-1F Size S RV0 11-1G10 RV0 11-1H10 RV0 11-1J10 RV0 11-1K10 RV RV0 11-1G0 RV0 11-1H0 RV0 11-1J0 RV0 11-1K0 RV RV RV0 1-4B10 RV0 1-4C10 RV0 1-4D10 RV RV0 1-4B0 RV0 1-4C0 RV0 1-4D RV0 1-4N10 RV0 1-4E10 RV0 1-4N0 RV0 1-4E RV0 1-4P10 RV0 1-4F V C. The actual starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4/11

276 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 For motor protection with overload relay function For motor protection with overload relay function Selection and ordering data CLSS 10, with overload relay function (automatic RESET), without auxiliary switches RV1 11-0F10 RV1 1-4B10 Rated current Suitable for induction motors 1) with P Setting range for thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. 4 kw k Size S00 ) Size S0 ) RV RV1 11-0B10 RV1 11-0C10 RV1 11-0D10 RV1 11-0E10 RV1 11-0F10 RV1 11-0G10 RV1 11-0H10 RV1 11-0J10 RV1 11-0K10 RV RV1 11-1B10 RV1 11-1C10 RV1 11-1D10 RV1 11-1E10 RV1 11-1F10 RV1 11-1G10 RV1 11-1H10 RV1 11-1J10 RV1 11-1K10 RV RV RV1 1-4B10 RV1 1-4C10 RV1 1-4D10 RV1 1-4N10 RV1 1-4E V C. The actual starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. ) ccessories for mounting on the right and RV9 15 three-phase busbars cannot be used. uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4/1

277 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 For starter combinations For starter combinations Selection and ordering data Without auxiliary switches Rated current Suitable for induction motors 1) with P RV 11-4C10 RV 11-0JC0 RV 1-4C10 RV 1-4C0 Thermal overload release ) Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals kw k Size S Without Without Without Without RV 11-0C10 RV 11-0BC10 RV 11-0CC10 RV 11-0DC10 RV 11-0C0 RV 11-0BC0 RV 11-0CC0 RV 11-0DC Without Without Without Without RV 11-0EC10 RV 11-0FC10 RV 11-0GC10 RV 11-0HC10 RV 11-0EC0 RV 11-0FC0 RV 11-0GC0 RV 11-0HC Without Without Without Without RV 11-0JC10 RV 11-0KC10 RV 11-1C10 RV 11-1BC10 RV 11-0JC0 RV 11-0KC0 RV 11-1C0 RV 11-1BC Without Without Without Without RV 11-1CC10 RV 11-1DC10 RV 11-1EC10 RV 11-1FC10 RV 11-1CC0 RV 11-1DC0 RV 11-1EC0 RV 11-1FC Size S Without Without Without Without Without RV 11-1GC10 RV 11-1HC10 RV 11-1JC10 RV 11-1KC10 RV 11-4C10 RV 11-1GC0 RV 11-1HC0 RV 11-1JC0 RV 11-1KC0 RV 11-4C Without Without Without Without RV 1-4C10 RV 1-4BC10 RV 1-4CC10 RV 1-4DC10 RV 1-4C0 RV 1-4BC0 RV 1-4CC0 RV 1-4DC Without Without RV 1-4NC10 RV 1-4EC10 RV 1-4NC0 RV 1-4EC Without Without RV 1-4PC10 RV 1-4FC10 starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. ) For overload protection of the motors, appropriate overload relays must be used. uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4/1

278 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 For transformer protection For transformer protection Selection and ordering data CLSS 10, without auxiliary switches Motor protection circuit breakers for the protection of transformers with high inrush current Rated current RV RV RV RV Setting range for thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. Order No. Spring-type terminals k Size S RV RV4 11-0B10 RV4 11-0C10 RV4 11-0D10 RV RV4 11-0B0 RV4 11-0C0 RV4 11-0D RV4 11-0E10 RV4 11-0F10 RV4 11-0G10 RV4 11-0H10 RV4 11-0E0 RV4 11-0F0 RV4 11-0G0 RV4 11-0H RV4 11-0J10 RV4 11-0K10 RV RV4 11-1B10 RV4 11-0J0 RV4 11-0K0 RV RV4 11-1B RV4 11-1C10 RV4 11-1D10 RV4 11-1E10 RV4 11-1F10 RV4 11-1C0 RV4 11-1D0 RV4 11-1E0 RV4 11-1F Size S RV4 11-1G10 RV4 11-1H10 RV4 11-1J10 RV4 11-1K10 RV RV RV4 1-4B10 RV4 1-4C10 RV4 1-4D10 RV4 11-1G0 RV4 11-1H0 RV4 11-1J0 RV4 11-1K0 RV RV RV4 1-4B0 RV4 1-4C0 RV4 1-4D0 uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4/14

279 For system protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 Selection and ordering data Without auxiliary switches Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 Circuit breakers for system protection and non-motor loads according to UL/CS For system protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 Rated current 1) RV7 11-0D10 Thermal overload release (nonadjustable) Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 480 Y/77 V C Screw terminals I n 1) I bc Order No. k Size S RV7 11-0D10 RV7 11-0BD10 RV7 11-0CD10 RV7 11-0DD10 RV7 11-0ED10 RV7 11-0FD10 RV7 11-0GD10 RV7 11-0HD10 RV7 11-0JD10 RV7 11-0KD10 RV7 11-1D10 RV7 11-1BD10 RV7 11-1CD10 RV7 11-1DD10 RV7 11-1ED10 RV7 11-1FD10 RV7 11-1GD10 RV7 11-1HD10 RV7 11-1JD10 RV7 11-1KD10 RV7 11-4D10 4 1) Rated value 100 % according to UL 489 and IEC ( 100 % rated Lateral and transverse auxiliary switches can be ordered 4/15

280 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 For transformer protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 Selection and ordering data Without auxiliary switches Circuit breakers for system and transformer protection according to UL/CS, specially designed for transformers with high inrush current For transformer protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 Rated current 1) RV8 11-0D10 Thermal overload release (non-adjustable) Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 480 Y/77 V C Screw terminals I n 1) I bc Order No. 4 k Size S RV8 11-0D10 RV8 11-0BD10 RV8 11-0CD10 RV8 11-0DD10 RV8 11-0ED10 RV8 11-0FD10 RV8 11-0GD10 RV8 11-0HD10 RV8 11-0JD10 RV8 11-0KD10 RV8 11-1D10 RV8 11-1BD10 RV8 11-1CD10 RV8 11-1DD10 RV8 11-1ED10 RV8 11-1FD10 RV8 11-1GD10 RV8 11-1HD10 RV8 11-1JD10 RV8 11-1KD10 RV8 11-4D10 1) Rated value 100 % according to UL 489 and IEC Lateral and transverse auxiliary switches can be ordered 4/16

281 ccessories Mountable accessories Overview Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Mountable accessories Mounting location and function The RV motor protection circuit breakers have three main auxiliary switches, signaling switches, auxiliary releases and isolator modules can be supplied separately. protection circuit breakers without using tools. For overview graphic see page 4/6. Front side Note: each motor protection circuit breaker. Left-hand side Notes: each motor protection circuit breaker. together. Transverse auxiliary switches, solid-state compatible transverse auxiliary switches 1 NO + 1 NC or NO or 1 CO Lateral auxiliary switches ( contacts) 1 NO + 1 NC or NO or NC Lateral auxiliary switches (4 contacts) NO + NC Signaling switches Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC Short-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC Right-hand side uxiliary releases Notes: Shunt releases motor protection circuit breaker. or Undervoltage releases protection circuit breakers for motor or Undervoltage releases withleading auxiliary contacts NO Top Isolator modules Notes: the isolator module not be mounted until n auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front. The overall width of the motor protection circuit breakers remains unchanged. One of the three lateral auxiliary switches can be mounted on the left side per motor protection circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor protection circuit breaker. The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with contacts is 9 mm. One lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts can be mounted on the left side per motor protection circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor protection circuit breaker. The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts is 18 mm. One signaling switch can be mounted on the left side of each motor protection circuit breaker. The signaling switch has two contact systems. One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was caused by a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary release. The other contact system only switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling as a result of switching off with the handle. In order to be able to switch on the motor protection circuit breaker again after a short-circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error cause has been eliminated. The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm. For remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection circuit breaker. The Trips the motor protection circuit breaker when the voltage is interrupted and prevents the motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored. Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection circuit breaker. Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton according to EN Function and use as for the undervoltage release without leading auxiliary contacts, but with the following additional function: the auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts are not guaranteed to open. The leading contacts permit the motor protection circuit breaker to reclose. The overall width of the auxiliary release is 18 mm. Isolator modules can be mounted to the upper terminal end of the motor protection circuit breakers. The supply cable is connected to the motor protection circuit breaker through the isolator module. The plug can only be unplugged when the motor protection circuit breaker is open and isolates all poles of the motor protection circuit breaker from the network. The shock-protected isolation point is clearly visible and secured with a padlock to prevent reinsertion of the plug. 4 For a complete overview of which accessories can be used for the various motor protection circuit breakers see page 4/. 4/17

282 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Mountable accessories Selection and ordering data ccessories Mountable accessories uxiliary switches 1) RV9 01-1E RV9 01-E RV9 01-1G Version Transverse auxiliary switches for front mounting 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC NO Solid-state compatible transverse auxiliary switches mountable on the front,for operation in dusty atmosphere and in solid-state circuits with low operating currents For motor protection circuit breakers Screw terminals Order No. S00, S0 RV9 01-1D RV9 01-1E RV9 01-1F 1 CO S00, S0 RV9 01-1G Spring-type terminals Order No. RV9 01-E RV9 01-F RV9 01-0H Covers for transverseauxiliary switches Lateral auxiliary switches mountable on the left 1 NO + 1 NC NO NC NO + NC S00, S0 RV9 01-0H S00, S0 RV RV9 01-1B RV9 01-1C RV9 01-1J RV9 01- RV9 01-B RV9 01-C RV RV9 01- Signaling switches ) Signaling switches One signaling switch can be mounted on the left per motor protection circuit breaker. Separate tripped and short-circuit alarms, 1 NO + 1 NC each S00, S0 RV9 1-1M RV9 1-M 4 RV9 1-1M RV9 1-M Isolator modules ) Isolator modules Visible isolating distance for isolating individual motor protection circuit breakers from the network, lockable in disconnected position S00, S0 RV9 8-1 RV9 8-1 with padlock one lateral auxiliary switch. The lateral auxiliary switch with NO + NC is used without a transverse auxiliary switch. ) This accessory cannot be used for the RV7 and RV8 circuit breakers. 4/18

283 ccessories Mountable accessories Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Mountable accessories RV9 0-1V0 RV9 0-V0 RV9-1CP0 RV9 0-DB0 Rated control supply voltage U s C C C 100 % ON period 1) C/DC 5 s ON period ) V V V V V uxiliary releases ) Undervoltage releases Undervoltage releases with leading auxiliary contacts NO Shunt releases DC 4 For motor protection circuit breaker S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 S00, S0 Screw terminals Order No. RV9 0-1B4 RV9 0-1B0 RV9 0-1F0 RV9 0-1M1 RV9 0-1P0 RV9 0-1V0 RV9 0-1V1 RV9 0-1S0 RV9-1CP0 RV9-1CV0 RV9-1CV1 RV9 0-1DB0 RV9 0-1DF0 RV9 0-1DP0 RV9 0-1DV0 RV9 0-1DS0 Spring-type terminals Order No. RV9 0-P0 RV9 0-V0 RV9 -CP0 RV9 -CV0 RV9 -CV1 RV9 0-DB0 RV9 0-DF0 RV9 0-DP0 voltage lies at 0.9 of the lower limit of the voltage range. response voltage lies at 0.85 of the lower limit of the voltage range. ) One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right per motor protection circuit breaker (does not apply to RV1 motor protection circuit breakers with overload relay function). 4 4/19

284 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Busbar accessories ccessories Busbar accessories Overview Insulated three-phase busbar system Three-phase busbar systems provide an easy, time-saving and clearly arranged means of feeding RV motor protection circuit breakers with screw terminals. They can be used for the different types of motor protection circuit breakers up to. The RV19 15 three-phase busbar systems are generally unsuitable for the RV1 motor protection circuit breakers for motor protection with overload relay function and for the RV7 and RV8 circuit breakers according to UL 489 / CS C. No.5-0. The busbars are suitable for between and 5 motor protection circuit breakers. However, any kind of extension is possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar (rotated by 180 ) underneath the terminals of the respective last motor protection circuit breaker. combination of motor protection circuit breakers of different supplied by appropriate feeder terminals. 8US busbar adapters for 60 mm systems The motor protection circuit breakers are mounted directly with the aid of busbar adapters on busbar systems with 60 mm centerto-center clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times and costs. The busbar adapters for busbar systems with 60 mm center-tocenter clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of 1 mm to 0 mm. The busbars can be 5 mm or 10 mm thick. The motor protection circuit breakers are snapped onto the adapter and connected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both mechanically and electrically at the same time. 4 SIRIUS load feeders with busbar adapters snapped onto busbars designed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output side of connected motor protection circuit breakers. 4/0

285 ccessories Busbar accessories Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Busbar accessories Selection and ordering data Three-phase busbars 1)) RV B RV BB RV CB Modular spacing Number of motor protection circuit breakers that can be connected Without lateral accessories Including lateral auxiliary switch Including auxiliary release Rated current I n at 690 V mm For motor protection circuit breakers For feeding several motor protection circuit breakers with screw terminals, mounted side by side on standard mounting rails, insulated, with touch protection S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) 6 S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) Order No. RV B RV BB RV CB RV DB RV19 15-B RV19 15-BB RV19 15-CB RV19 15-DB 6 S00, S0 1) S00, S0 1) RV19 15-B RV19 15-CB RV DB 1) Not suitable for RV1 motor protection circuit breakers for motor protection with overload relay function and for RV7 and RV8 circuit breakers according to UL 489 / CS C. No.5-0. ) pproved for motor protection circuit breakers with I n Three-phase feeder terminals RV9 5-5B Conductor cross-section Tightening torque For motor protection Solid or Finely stranded WG cables, circuit breakers stranded with end sleeve solid or stranded mm² mm² WG Nm Order No. Connection from top S00, S0 RV9 5-5B Connection from below This terminal is connected in place of a switch, please take the space requirement into account Input: 4, Output:....5 S00, S0 RV9 15-5B 4 RV9 15-5B Version Covers for connection tags For motor protection circuit breakers Order No. Touch protection for empty positions S00, S0 RV B RV B 4/1

286 4 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Busbar accessories ccessories Busbar accessories Busbar adapters 8US1 51-5DS10 8US1 51-5DT11 8US1 50-5S10 8US1 50-5T10 For motor protection circuit Rated current Connecting cable dapter length dapter width Rated voltage Order No. breaker WG mm mm V Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems Width: 1 mm and 0 mm Screw terminals S00/S US1 51-5DS10 S US1 51-5NT10 Spring-type terminals S00/S US1 51-5DS11 S00/S US1 51-5DT11 S US1 51-5NT11 ccessories Device holders For lateral attachment to busbar adapters Side modules For widening of busbar adapters Spacers onto the busbar adapter Vibration and shock kits For high vibration and shock loads US1 50-5S US1 50-5T US19 98-BJ10 8US B10 8US C10 4/

287 ccessories RV9 infeed system Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories RV9 infeed system Overview The RV9 infeed system is a convenient means of energy supply and distribution for a group of several motor protection circuit breakers or complete load feeders with a screw or spring-type used for the RV1motor protection circuit breakers, RV7 and RV8 circuit breakers). The system is based on a basic module complete with a lateral incoming unit (three-phase busbar with infeed). This infeed with spring-type terminals is mounted on the right or left depending on the version and can be supplied with a maximum conductor cross-section of 5 mm (with end sleeve). basic module has two sockets onto each of which a motor protection circuit breaker can be snapped. Expansion modules are available for extending the system (threephase busbars for system expansion). The individual modules are connected through an expansion plug. The electrical connection between the three-phase busbars and the motor protection circuit breakers is implemented through plug-in connectors. The complete system can be mounted on a TH 5 standard mounting rail to EN and can be expanded as required up to a maximum current carrying capacity of 6. The system is mounted extremely quickly and easily thanks to the simple plug-in technique. Thanks to the lateral infeed, the system also saves space in the control cabinet. The additional overall height required for the infeed unit is only 0 mm. The alternative hand side as well as infeed on one side and outfeed on the other side to supply further loads are all possible. terminal block with spring-type connections in combination with a standard mounting rail enables the integration of not only SIRIUS motor protection circuit breakers but also single-phase, -phase and -phase components such as 5SY miniature circuit breakers or SIRIUS relay components. 4 SIRIUS RV9 infeed system 4/

288 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories RV9 infeed system ccessories RV9 infeed system 4 Three-phase busbars with infeed three-phase busbar with infeed unit is required for connecting the incoming supply. This module comprises one infeed module and sockets which each accept one motor protection circuit breaker. choice of two versions with infeed on the left or right is available. The infeed is connected using spring-type terminals. The spring-type terminals permit conductor cross-sections of up to 5 mm with end sleeves. n end cover is supplied with each module. Three-phase busbars for system expansion The three-phase busbars for system expansion support expansion of the system. There is a choice of modules with or sockets. The system can be expanded as required up to a maximum current carrying capacity of 6. n expansion plug is supplied with each module. a Expansion plug The expansion plug is used for electrical connection of adjacent three-phase busbars. The current carrying capacity of this plug equals 6. One expansion plug is supplied with each threephase busbar for system expansion. dditional expansion plugs are therefore only required as spare parts. b Extra-wide expansion plug The wide expansion plug makes the electrical connection between two three-phase busbars, thus performing the same function as the RV9 17-5B00 expansion plug; the electrical characteristics (e.g. a current carrying capacity of 6 ) are identical. The RV9 17-5E expansion plug is 10 mm wider than the RV9 17-5B00 expansion plug, hence in the plugged state there is a distance of 10 mm between the connected three-phase busbars. This distance can be used to lay the auxiliary current circuit breaker and contactor can be wired from underneath, which means that the complete cable duct above the system can be omitted. End cover The end cover is used to cover the three-phase busbar at the open end of the system. This cover is therefore only required once for each system. n end cover is supplied with each three-phase busbar system with infeed. Further end covers are therefore only required as spare parts. Plug-in connector The plug-in connector is used for the electrical connection between the three-phase busbar and the RV motor protection circuit breaker. These plug-in connectors are available in versions for screw or spring-type terminals. Contactor base Load feeders can be assembled in the system using the contactor and S0 with spring-type and screw terminals and are simply snapped onto the three-phase busbars. Direct-on-line starters and reversing starters are possible. One contactor base is required for direct-on-line starters and two are required for reversing starters. To assemble load feeders for reversing starters, the contactor bases can be arranged alongside each other (90 mm overall width). In this case the mechanical interlocking of the contactors is possible. The contactor bases are also suitable for soft starters The infeed system is designed for mounting on a 5 mm standard mounting rail with 7.5 mm overall depth. This standard mounting rail gives the contactor base a stable mounting surface to sit on. If standard mounting rails with a depth of 15 mm are used, the spacer connected to the bottom of the contactor base must be knocked out and plugged into the mating piece that is also on the underside. Then the contactor base also has a stable mounting surface. When standard mounting rails with a depth of 7.5 mm are used, the spacer has no function and can be removed. The link modules are used for direct start load feeders, in which case the use of a contactor base is not absolutely necessary. Motor protection circuit breaker and contactor assemblies can then be directly snapped onto the sockets of the three-phase R , R , R or R link modules should generally be used. Terminal block The RV9 17-5D terminal block enables the integration of not only SIRIUS motor protection circuit breakers but also singlephase, -phase and -phase components. Using the terminal block the phases can be fed out of the system; which means that single-phase loads can also be integrated in the system. The terminal block is plugged into the slot of the expansion plug and thus enables outfeeding from the middle or end of the infeed system. The terminal block can be rotated through 180 and be locked to the support modules of the infeed system. The RV B 45 mm standard mounting rail for screwing onto the support plate is available in addition in order to be able to plug the single-phase, -phase and -phase components onto the infeed system. 4/4

289 ccessories RV9 infeed system Selection and ordering data Three-phase busbars with infeed Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 Type Version For RV0, RV, RV4 motor protection circuit breakers Three-phasebusbars with infeed incl. RV end cover ccessories RV9 infeed system Order No. For motor protection circuit breakers with screw terminals or spring-type terminals S00, S0 RV S00, S0 RV9 17-1E RV Three-phase busbars for system expansion Three-phasebusbars incl. RV9 17-5B00 expansion plug For motor protection circuit breakers with screw terminals or spring-type terminals S00, S0 RV S00, S0 RV9 17-4B RV Plug-in connectors RV Plug-in connectors to make contact withthe motor protection circuit breakers Spring-type terminals - Single-unit packaging S00 1) S0 ) RV RV Multi-unit packaging S00 1) S0 ) RV RV9 7-5 Screw terminals RV9 17-5C00 - Single-unit packaging S00 1) S0 ) RV9 17-5C00 RV Multi-unit packaging S00 1) S0 ) RV9 17-5C RV Contactor bases Type Version For contactors Order No. Contactor bases for mounting direct-on-line or reversing starters Single-unit packaging S00, S0 RV RV /5

290 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories RV9 infeed system ccessories RV9 infeed system Type Version Order No. Terminal blocks Terminal blocks For integration of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase components Single-unit packaging RV9 17-5D RV9 17-5D 45 mm standard mounting rails 45 mm standard mounting rails for mounting onto three-phase busbars Single-unit packaging RV B RV B Extra-wide expansion plugs Extra-wide expansion plugsas accessory Single-unit packaging RV9 17-5E RV9 17-5E Expansion plugs Expansion plugs 1) as spare part Single-unit packaging RV9 17-5B00 RV9 17-5B00 End covers End covers ) as spare part Multi-unit packaging RV RV ) The expansion plug is included in the scope of supply of the RV three-phase busbars for system expansion. ) The end cover is included in the scope of supply of the RV threephase busbars with infeed system. 4/6

291 ccessories Rotary operating mechanisms Overview Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 Motor protection circuit breakers with a rotary operating mechanism can be mounted in a control cabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. When the cabinet door with motor protection circuit breaker is closed, the operating mechanism is coupled. When the motor protection circuit breaker closes, the coupling is locked which prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the maintenance personnel. In the OPEN position, the rotary operating mechanism can be secured against reclosing with padlock. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in this case either. ccessories Rotary operating mechanisms SIRIUS RV9 6-B door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions SIRIUS RV9 6-0K door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Selection and ordering data Version Color of handle Version of extensionshaft mm Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions RV19 6-1B-Z For motor protection circuit breaker Order No. The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver, an extension shaft of 00 mm in length (8 mm x 8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, into which the motor protection circuit breaker is inserted. The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door interlocking reliably prevents opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor protection circuit breaker. The OFF position can be locked with up to padlocks. Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and two-pole auxiliary switches can be used. The doorcoupling rotary operating mechanisms thus meet the requirements for isolating functions according to IEC Door-coupling rotary Gray & Black 00 S00, S0 RV19 6-1B-Z operating mechanisms 4 4/7

292 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Mounting accessories Link modules Feeders can be easily assembled from single devices with the help of the link modules. The following table shows the various possible combinations for devices with screw connection or spring-type terminals. ccessories Mounting accessories Combination device RV motor protection circuit breakers Size RT contactors; RW0, RW40 soft starters; RF4 solid-state contactors Size Link modules Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Link modules for connecting switching devices to RV motor protection circuit breakers 1) RT contactors with C or DC coil S00 S00 R19 1-1D00 R S0 S00 RT contactors with C coil S0 S0 R R S00 S0 RT contactors with DC coil S0 S0 R9 1-1B00 R S00 S0 RW0 soft starters S00 S00 R9 1-1B00 R9 11-G00 S0 S00 RW0/RW40soft starters S0 S0 R9 1-1B00 R9 1-G00 S00 S0 RF4 solid-state contactors S00/S0 S00 R9 1-1B00 Hybrid link modules for connecting contactors with spring-type terminals to RV motor protection circuit breakers with screw connection 1) RT contactors with C or DC coil S00 S00 R9 11-F00 RT contactors with C or DC coil S0 S0 R9 1-F00 Note: used. 1) The link modules and the hybrid link modules cannot be used for the RV. 1-4P1., RV. 1-4F1. motor protection circuit breakers and RV7, RV8 circuit breakers. 4 Selection and ordering data ccessories Covers Version For motor protection circuit breakers Order No. Scale covers Sealable, for covering the current setting scale RV0, RV1, RV4: S00, S0 RV9 08-0P RV9 08-0P Mounting material RV9 8-0B Push-in lugs For screwing the motor protection circuit breaker onto mounting plates For each motor protection circuit breaker, units are required. Tools for opening spring-type terminals by hand R Screwdrivers for all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals Length approx. 00 mm,.0 mm x 0.5 mm, titanium gray/black, partially insulated S00, S0 RV9 8-0B Spring-type terminals S00, S0 R /8

293 ccessories Mounting accessories Link modules Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Mounting accessories ctuating voltage of contactor Order No. RT contactors RV motor protection circuit breakers Link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to contactor 1) For mechanical and electrical connection between motor protection circuit breaker and contactor with screw terminals Single-unit packaging C/DC C DC S00 S0 S0 S00/S0 S00/S0 S00/S0 Screw terminals R19 1-1D00 R R9 1-1B00 R For mechanical and electrical connection between motor protection circuit breaker and contactor with spring-type terminals Single-unit packaging C/DC C ) DC S00 S0 S0 S00 S0 S0 Spring-type terminals R R R R Spacers ) for compensating the height on C contactors Single-unit packaging S0 S0 R9 11-1C00 1) The link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to contactor cannot be used for the RV. 1-4P1. and RV. 1-4F1. motor protection circuit breakers, RV7 and RV8 circuit breakers. available. Note: 4 4/9

294 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Mounting accessories ccessories Mounting accessories RW0, RW40 soft starters; RF4 solid-state contactors RV motor protection circuit breakers Order No. Link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to soft starter 1) and motor protection circuit breaker to solid-state contactor Connection between motor protection circuit breaker and soft starter / solid-state contactor with screw terminals Single-unit packaging S00 S0 S00/S0 S00/S0 Screw terminals R9 1-1B00 R9 1-1B00 R9 1-1B00 Connection between motor protection circuit breaker and soft starter spring-type terminals Spring-type terminals Single-unit packaging S00 S0 S00 S0 R9 11-G00 R9 1-G00 R9 1-G00 1) The link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to soft starter and for motor protection circuit breaker to solid-state contactor cannot be used for the RV. 1-4P1., RV. 1-4F1. motor protection circuit breakers and RV7, RV8 circuit breakers. Note: ctuating voltage of contactor Order No. RT contactors RV motor protection circuit breakers 4 Hybrid link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to contactor 1) For mechanical and electrical connection between motor protection circuit breaker with screw terminals and contactor with spring-type terminals Single-unit packaging C/DC C ) /DC S00 S0 S00 S0 R9 11-F00 R9 1-F00 R9 11-F00 Spacers ) for compensating the height on C contactors Single-unit packaging S0 S0 R9 11-1C00 R9 1-F00 1) The link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to contactor cannot be used for the RV. 1-4P1., RV. 1-4F1. motor protection circuit breakers and RV7, RV8 circuit breakers. available. Note: 4/0

295 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Overview Enclosures For stand-alone installation of RV0 to RV4 motor protection I n max = 16 ) and S0 (I n max = ), cast aluminum enclosures for surface mounting and molded- dimensions. When installed in a molded-plastic enclosure the motor protection circuit breakers have a rated operational voltage U e of 500 V. The enclosures for surface mounting have the degree of mounted section complies with IP0). ll enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. There are two knock-out cable entries for cable glands at the top and two at the bottom; also on the rear corresponding cable entries are scored. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indicator lights that are available as accessories. The narrow enclosure can accommodate a motor protection circuit breaker without accessories, with transverse auxiliary switch and with lateral auxiliary switch. There is no provision for installing a motor protection circuit breaker with a signaling switch. molded-plastic enclosures are equipped with a rotary operating mechanism. The enclosures can be supplied with either a black rotary operating mechanism or with an EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operating mechanism with a red/yellow knob. ll rotary operating mechanisms can be locked in the Open position with up to padlocks. Front plates Motor protection circuit breakers are frequently required to be actuated in any enclosure. Front plates equipped with a rotary operating mechanism for RV0 to RV4 motor protection S0, into which the motor protection circuit breakers can be snapped, is available for the front plates. Enclosure for surface mounting 4 4/1

296 4 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Selection and ordering data Version Degree of protection Molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting RV19-1F00 With EMERGENCY- STOP rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position Cast aluminum enclosures for surface mounting RV19-1D01 With EMERGENCY- STOP rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position RV19 -D00 With rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position With EMERGENCY- STOP rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position Integrated terminals Width mm IP55 N and PE/ground 54 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch) 7 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release) IP65 PE 1) 7 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release) IP55 (front side) IP55 (front side) 1) If required, an additional N terminal can be mounted (e.g. 8W BG11). N and PE/ground 7 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release) N and PE/ground 7 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release) For RV0 to RV4 motor protection circuit breakers ccessories Enclosures and front plates Order No. S00, S0 RV19-1F00 S00, S0 RV19-1G00 S00, S0 RV19-1G01 S00, S0 RV19 -D00 S00, S0 RV19 -G00 4/

297 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 40 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Front plates RV19-4B + RV19-4G Version Degree of protection For RV0 to RV4 motor protection circuit breakers Molded-plastic front plates with rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position For actuation of RV motor protection circuit breakers in any enclosure Molded-plastic front plates with EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operating mechanism, red/yellow, lockable in 0 position EMERGENCY-STOP actuation of RV motor protection circuit breakers in any enclosure Holders for front plates Holder is mounted on front plate, motor protection circuit breaker with and without accessories is snapped in. IP55 (front side) IP55 (front side) Order No. S00, S0 RV19-4B S00, S0 RV19-4E S00, S0 RV19-4G Indicator lights Version Indicator lights for all enclosures and front plates With glow lamp and colored lenses red, green, yellow-orange and clear Rated control supply voltage U s V For RV0 to RV4 motor protection circuit breakers Order No. S00, S0 RV19 0-5B RV19 0-5C RV19 0-5E RV19 0-5G RV19 0-5B 4 4/

298 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 General data General data Overview The following illustration shows our RV1 motor protection circuit breakers with the accessories which can be mounted for Note: Type of construction 4 The RV1 motor protection circuit breakers are available in four max. rated current 1, at 400 V C suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kw. max. rated current 5, at 400 V C suitable for induction motors up to 11 kw. max. rated current 50, at 400 V C suitable for induction motors up to kw. max. rated current 100, at 400 V C suitable for induction motors up to 45 kw. RV1 motor protection circuit breakers are compact, current load feeders. The motor protection circuit breakers are used for switching and protecting three-phase induction motors of up to 45 kw at 400 V C and for other loads with rated currents of up to see page 4/6 onwards. breakers up to 40 see page 4/6 onwards. 4/4

299 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 General data Connection methods SIRIUS RV1 motor protection circuit breakers are available with screw terminals, spring-type terminals and ring terminal lug connection. Screw terminals General data Increased safety type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RV10 motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors with increased Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th Motor protection circuit breakers R V SIRIUS 1st generation 1 Type of motor protection circuit breaker Size Switching capacity Setting range for overload release Trip class (CLSS) Connection methods With or without auxiliary switch Special versions Example R V Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. pplication Operating conditions RV1 motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for use in any climate. They are intended for use in enclosed rooms in which no severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic vapors, areas, suitable enclosures must be provided. RV1 motor protection circuit breakers can optionally be fed from the top or from below. The permissible ambient temperatures, the maximum switching capacities, the tripping currents and other boundary conditions RV1 motor protection circuit breakers are suitable for operation in IT systems (IT networks). In this case, the different short-circuit breaking capacity in the IT system must be taken into account. Since operational currents, starting currents and current peaks are different even for motors with identical power ratings due to the inrush current, the motor ratings in the selection tables motor to be protected is always paramount to the choice of the most suitable motor protection circuit breaker. This also applies to motor protection circuit breakers for transformer protection. Possible uses The RV1 motor protection circuit breakers can be used: For short-circuit protection For motor protection (also with overload relay function) For system protection For short-circuit protection for starter combinations For transformer protection s main control and EMERGENCY-STOP switches For fuse monitoring For operation in IT systems (IT networks) For switching of DC currents s voltage transformer circuit breakers 4 4/5

300 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 General data General data General data Type RV16 1. RV1.. RV1. 4. RV17 4 S00 S S S Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 90 x x 140 x x 165 x x 168 x Standards Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Number of poles Max. rated current I n max (= max. rated operational current I e ) Permissible ambient temperature C C (current reduction above +60 C) Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet % 100 % 87 Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure (applies for motor protection circuit breaker inside enclosure) % 100 % 87 Rated operational voltage U e V C 690 (with molded-plastic enclosure 500 V) V C 600 Rated frequency 50/60 Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Utilization categories C- Trip class CLSS cc. to IEC /0 DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms) k 10 k 10 k 10 Power loss P v per motor protection circuit breaker dependent on rated current I n (upper setting range) R per conducting path = P/I x I n : I n : I n : I n : I n : 75 and 90 I n : 100 I n : 10 I n : I n : Shock resistance cc. to IEC g/ms 5/11 (square and sine pulse) Degree of protection cc. to IEC 6059 IP0 (IP00 terminal compartment) Touch protection cc. to EN 5074 Finger-safe Temperature compensation cc. to IEC C Phase failure sensitivity cc. to IEC Yes No Explosion protection safe operation of motors with increased safety type of protection Isolating function Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch characteristics (with corresponding accessories) Protective separation between main and auxiliary circuits, required for PELV applications Permissible mounting positions cc. to IEC cc. to IEC cc. to EN W W W W W W W W W Yes, for RV10 (CLSS 10) Yes Yes Mechanical endurance Operating cycles Electrical endurance Operating cycles Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h Yes Yes No 4/6

301 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 General data General data Conductor cross-sections of main circuit Type RV16 11 RV1.. RV1. 4./ RV17 4 Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals with box terminal Terminal screw 4 mm llen screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors connectable) mm x ( ) 4), x ( ) 4) x ( ) x ( ) x ( ), x ( ), mm x ( ) 4), x ( ) 4) 1 x ( ) mm x ( ) 4), x ( ) 4) 1 x ( ) WG x ( ) x (18... ), 1 x (18... ) Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm x (6 x 9 x 0.8) Removable box terminals 1) x ( ), 1 x ( ) x ( ), 1 x ( ) x ( /0), 1 x (10... /0) ) 18 x 10 ) Up to x 70 1) Cable lug and busbar connection possible after removing the box terminals. ) If bars larger than 1 mm x 10 mm are connected, a RT E1 terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. ) When connecting conductors which are larger than 5 mm, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. 4) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping sections are used, this restriction does not apply. Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches Type RV19 Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, NO, NC, NO + NC; Signaling switches Transverse auxiliary switch with 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC, NO Max. rated voltage V C V C Uninterrupted current Switching capacity 600 Q00 B600 R00 C00 R00 4 4/7

302 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 General data General data Mountable accessories Front transverse auxiliary switches Switching capacity for different voltages 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC, NO Rated operational current I e - 4 V - 0 V V V I th, alternating voltage - 4 V - 0 V V V L/R 00 ms - 4 V - 48 V - 60 V V - 0 V Minimum load capacity V m Front transverse solid-state compatible auxiliary switches Switching capacity for different voltages 1 CO Rated operational voltage U e lternating voltage V 50 Rated operational current I e /C-14 t U e = 50 V 0.5 t U e = 15 V 1 Rated operational voltage U e Direct voltage L/R 00 ms V 50 Rated operational current I e /DC-1 t U e = 50 V 0.7 t U e = 15 V 0.44 Minimum load capacity V m 5 1 Lateral auxiliary switches with signaling switch Switching capacity for different voltages: Lateral auxiliary switch with 1 NO + 1 NC, NO, NC, NO + NC Signaling switch 4 Rated operational current I e - 4 V - 0 V V V I th, alternating voltage - 4 V - 0 V V V L/R 00 ms - 4 V V - 0 V V Minimum load capacity V m uxiliary releases Undervoltage releases Shunt releases Power consumption - C voltages - DC voltages - C voltages - DC voltages Response voltage V/W W V/W W 0./1 0 7./ / V x U s x U s V x U s Opening time maximum ms 0 4/8

303 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 General data General data Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits Melting fuses operational class gg 10 Miniature circuit breakers C characteristic 6 (prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 k) Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits Connection type Screw terminals Terminal screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (1 or conductors connectable) mm x ( ) 1) / x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1) / x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1) / x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 4 4/9

304 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 For motor protection For motor protection Selection and ordering data CLSS 10, without auxiliary switches Rated current Suitable for threephase induction motors 1) with P Setting range for thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. kw k Size S RV RV10 1-4B10 RV10 1-4D10 RV10 1-4E RV10 1-4F10 RV10 1-4G10 RV10 1-4H10 RV10 1-4H10 Size S RV F10 RV H10 RV J RV K10 RV L10 RV M10 RV L10 Size S, with increased switching capacity RV RV10 4-4B10 RV10 4-4D10 RV10 4-4E RV10 4-4F10 RV10 4-4H10 RV10 4-4J10 RV10 4-4J RV10 4-4K10 RV10 4-4L10 RV10 4-4M10 4 CLSS 0, without auxiliary switches Size S RV10 1-4B10 RV10 1-4BB10 RV10 1-4DB10 RV10 1-4EB RV10 1-4FB10 RV10 1-4GB10 RV10 1-4HB10 RV10 1-4B10 Size S, with increased switching capacity RV10 4-4FB10 RV10 4-4HB10 RV10 4-4JB RV10 4-4KB10 RV10 4-4LB10 RV10 4-4MB10 RV10 4-4KB V C. The actual starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. uxiliary switches can be ordered separately (see Mountable 4/40

305 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 For motor protection with overload relay function For motor protection with overload relay function Selection and ordering data CLSS 10, with overload relay function (automatic RESET), without auxiliary switches Rated current Suitable for threephase induction motors 1) with P Setting range for thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. kw k Size S ) RV RV11 1-4B10 RV11 1-4D10 RV11 1-4E RV11 1-4F10 RV11 1-4G10 RV11 1-4H10 RV11 1-4E10 Size S, with increased switching capacity ) RV RV11 4-4B10 RV11 4-4D10 RV11 4-4E RV11 4-4F10 RV11 4-4H10 RV11 4-4J10 RV RV11 4-4K10 RV11 4-4L10 RV11 4-4M V C. The actual starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. ) ccessories (auxiliary releases) for mounting on the right cannot be used. uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4 4/41

306 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 For starter combinations For starter combinations Selection and ordering data Without auxiliary switches Rated current Suitable for threephase induction motors 1) with P Thermal overload release ) Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. kw k Size S Without Without Without Without RV1 1-4C10 RV1 1-4BC10 RV1 1-4DC10 RV1 1-4EC Without Without Without RV1 1-4FC10 RV1 1-4GC10 RV1 1-4HC10 RV1 1-4C10 Size S Without Without Without RV1 41-4FC10 RV1 41-4HC10 RV1 41-4JC Without Without Without RV1 41-4KC10 RV1 41-4LC10 RV1 41-4MC10 RV1 41-4JC10 Size S, with increased switching capacity Without Without Without Without RV1 4-4C10 RV1 4-4BC10 RV1 4-4DC10 RV1 4-4EC Without Without Without RV1 4-4FC10 RV1 4-4HC10 RV1 4-4JC10 RV1 4-4JC Without Without Without RV1 4-4KC10 RV1 4-4LC10 RV1 4-4MC10 4 starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. ) For overload protection of the motors, appropriate overload relays must be used. uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4/4

307 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 For transformer protection For transformer protection Selection and ordering data CLSS 10, without auxiliary switches Motor protection circuit breakers for the protection of transformers with high inrush current Rated current Setting range for thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. k Size S RV RV14 1-4B10 RV14 1-4D10 RV14 1-4E10 RV14 1-4F10 RV14 1-4D10 uxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4 4/4

308 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 For fuse monitoring For fuse monitoring Selection and ordering data Without auxiliary switches Rated current Thermal overload release Instantaneous overcurrent release Short-circuit breaking capacity at 415 V C Screw terminals I n I cu Order No. k Size S RV BD10 RV BD10 Note: ordered separately. ccessories Version Contacts Screw terminals Order No. Mountable auxiliary switches (essential accessories) RV E Transverse auxiliary switches With screw terminals, mountable on front Lateral auxiliary switches With screw terminals, mountable on the left 1 NO + 1 NC RV E 1 NO + 1 NC RV RV dditional auxiliary switches and other accessories 4/44

309 For system protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 Selection and ordering data Without auxiliary switches Circuit breakers for system protection and non-motor loads according to UL/CS Rated current 1) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 Thermal overload release (non-adjustable) Instantaneous overcurrent release For system protection according to UL 489/CS C. No. 5-0 Short-circuit breaking capacity at 480 Y/77 V C 480 V C Screw terminals I n 1) I bc I bc Order No. k k Size S RV17 4-5FD RV17 4-5D10 RV17 4-5BD10 RV17 4-5CD10 RV17 4-5DD10 RV17 4-5ED10 RV17 4-5FD10 RV17 4-5GD10 RV17 4-5HD10 RV17 4-5JD10 RV17 4-5LD10 RV17 4-5QD10 1) Rated value 100 % according to UL 489 and IEC Transverse auxiliary switches must not be mounted, lateral auxiliary switches can be ordered separately 4 4/45

310 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Mountable accessories Overview ccessories Mountable accessories Mounting location and function The RV1 motor protection circuit breakers have three main auxiliary switches, signaling switches, auxiliary releases and isolator modules can be supplied separately. protection circuit breakers without using tools. For overview graphic see page 4/4. 4 Front side Notes: each motor protection circuit breaker. Transverse auxiliary switches, solid-state compatible transverse auxiliary switches 1 NO + 1 NC or NO or 1 CO Left-hand side Notes: 1 NO + 1 NC or each motor protection circuit breaker. NO or NC together. NO + NC Lateral auxiliary switches ( contacts) Lateral auxiliary switches (4 contacts) Signaling switches for sizes S and S Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC Short-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC Right-hand side uxiliary releases Notes: Shunt releases motor protection circuit breaker. or Undervoltage releases protection circuit breakers for motor or Undervoltage releases with leading auxiliary contacts NO Top Isolator modules for size S Notes: the isolator module not be mounted until For a complete overview of which accessories can be used for the various motor protection circuit breakers see page 4/. n auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front. The overall width of the motor protection circuit breakers remains unchanged. One of the three lateral auxiliary switches can be mounted on the left side per motor protection circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor protection circuit breaker. The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with contacts is 9 mm. One lateral auxiliary switch with four contacts can be mounted on the left side per motor protection circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main contacts of the motor protection circuit breaker. The width of the lateral auxiliary switch with 4 contacts is 18 mm. One signaling switch can be mounted on the left side of each motor protection circuit breaker. The signaling switch has two contact systems. One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was caused by a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary release. The other contact system only switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling as a result of switching off with the handle. In order to be able to switch on the motor protection circuit breaker again after a short-circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error cause has been eliminated. The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm. For remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection circuit breaker. The Trips the motor protection circuit breaker when the voltage is interrupted and prevents the motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored. Used for remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection circuit breaker. Particularly suitable for EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton according to EN (VDE 011). Function and use as for the undervoltage release without leading auxiliary contacts, but with the following additional function: the auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts are not guaranteed to open. The leading contacts permit the motor protection circuit breaker to reclose. The overall width of the auxiliary release is 18 mm. motor protection circuit breakers. The supply cable is connected to the motor protection circuit breaker through the isolator module. The plug can only be unplugged when the motor protection circuit breaker is open and isolates all poles of the motor protection circuit breaker from the network. The shock-protected isolation point is clearly visible and secured with a padlock to prevent reinsertion of the plug. 4/46

311 ccessories Mountable accessories Selection and ordering data uxiliary switches 1) RV E RV G Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 Version Contacts For motor protection circuit breakers Transverse auxiliary switches With screw terminals, mountable on front Solid-state compatible transverse auxiliary switches With screw terminals, front mountable, for operation in dusty atmosphere and in solid-state circuits with low operating currents 1 CO 1 NO + 1 NC NO ccessories Mountable accessories Screw terminals Order No. S00, S, S RV D RV E RV F 1 CO S00, S, S RV G Covers for transverse auxiliary switches S00, S, S RV H RV H Lateral auxiliary switches With screw terminals, mountable on the left 1 NO + 1 NC NO NC NO + NC S00, S, S RV RV B RV C RV J RV RV J one lateral auxiliary switch. The lateral auxiliary switch with NO + NC is used without a transverse auxiliary switch. Transverse auxiliary switches must not be used for the RV17 circuit breakers. uxiliary switches 1) Version Contacts For motor protection circuit breakers Transverse auxiliary switches With spring-type terminals, mountable on front 1 NO + 1 NC NO Spring-type terminals Order No. S00, S0, S, S RV19 01-E RV19 01-F 4 RV19 01-E Lateral auxiliary switches With spring-type terminals, mountable on left 1 NO + 1 NC NO NC S00, S0, S, S RV RV19 01-B RV19 01-C RV one lateral auxiliary switch. Transverse auxiliary switches must not be used for the RV17 circuit breakers. 4/47

312 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Mountable accessories ccessories Mountable accessories Signaling switches 1) Version Signaling switches One signaling switch can be mounted on the left per motor protection circuit breaker. Separate tripped and short-circuit alarms, 1 NO + 1 NC each For motor protection circuit breakers Screw terminals Order No. S, S RV19 1-1M RV19 1-1M Isolator modules 1) Isolator modules Visible isolating distance for isolating individual motor protection circuit breakers from the network, lockable in disconnected position S RV RV with padlock 1) These accessories cannot be used for the RV17 circuit breakers. 4 uxiliary releases ) RV19 0-1DP0 Rated control supply voltage U s C C C 100 % ON period 1) C/DC 5 s ON period ) V V V V V Undervoltage releases Undervoltage releases with leading auxiliary contacts NO Shunt releases DC 4 For motor protection circuit breakers S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S S, S Screw terminals Order No. RV19 0-1B4 RV19 0-1B0 RV19 0-1F0 RV19 0-1M1 RV19 0-1P0 RV19 0-1V0 RV19 0-1V1 RV19 0-1S0 RV19-1CP0 RV19-1CV0 RV19-1CV1 RV19 0-1DB0 RV19 0-1DF0 RV19 0-1DP0 RV19 0-1DV0 RV19 0-1DS0 voltage lies at 0.9 of the lower limit of the voltage range. response voltage lies at 0.85 of the lower limit of the voltage range. ) One auxiliary release can be mounted on the right per motor protection circuit breaker (does not apply to RV11 motor protection circuit breakers with overload relay function). 4/48

313 ccessories Busbar accessories Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Busbar accessories Overview Insulated three-phase busbar system Three-phase busbar systems provide an easy, time-saving and clearly arranged means of feeding RV1 motor protection circuit breakers with screw terminals. Different versions are available for protection circuit breakers. The busbars are suitable for between and 4 motor protection circuit breakers. However, any kind of extension is possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar (rotated by 180 ) underneath the terminals of the respective last motor protection circuit breaker. 8US busbar adapters for 40 and 60 mm systems The motor protection circuit breakers are mounted directly with the aid of busbar adapters on busbar systems with 40 mm and 60 mm center-to-center clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times and costs. Busbar adapters for busbar systems with 40 mm center-to-center clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of 1 mm to 15 mm, while those with 60 mm center-to-center clearance are suitable for copper busbars with a width of 1 to 0 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm thick. The motor protection circuit breakers are snapped onto the adapter and connected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both mechanically and electrically at the same time. designed for any short-circuit stress which can occur at the output side of connected motor protection circuit breakers. SIRIUS load feeders with busbar adapters snapped onto busbars Selection and ordering data Modular spacing Three-phase busbar systems Number of motor protection circuit breakers that can be connected Without lateral accessories Including lateral auxiliary switch With auxiliary release Rated current I n at 690 V mm For motor protection circuit breakers For feeding several motor protection circuit breakers with screw terminals, mounted side by side on standard mounting rails, insulated, with touch protection S 1) 4 S 1) S 1) 108 S ) S ) S ) Order No. RV RV19 5-1B RV19 5-1C RV19 5- RV19 5-B RV19 5-C 4 1) Not suitable for RV11 motor protection circuit breakers for motor protection with overload relay function. ) uxiliary releases and lateral auxiliary switches cannot be used in combination. 4/49

314 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Busbar accessories ccessories Busbar accessories Three-phase feeder terminals Conductor cross-section Tightening torque For motor Solid or stranded Finely stranded WG cables, solid protection circuit with end sleeve or stranded breakers mm² mm² WG Nm Order No. Connection from top S RV Version For motor protection circuit breakers Order No. Covers for connection tags Touch protection for empty positions S RV US busbar adapters 8US FK08 8US SM00 8US1 61-5FM08 8US1 11-4TR00 4 For motor protection Rated current Connecting cable dapter length dapter width Rated voltage Order No. circuit breakers WG mm mm V Busbar adapters for 40 mm systems Width: 1 mm and 15 mm Thickness: 5 mm and 10 mm S S S Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems Width: 1 mm and 0 mm Thickness: 5 mm and 10 mm S S S S ) ) ) ) ) ) 600 4) 8US FK08 8US SM00 8US TM00 8US1 61-5FM08 8US SM00 8US1 11-4TM00 8US1 11-4TR00 1) t rated voltage ) Short-circuit breaking capacity 415/500/55 V C - Up to I n = 5 : max. 0 k - Up to I n = 90 : max. 16 k - Up to I n = 100 : max. 6 k Short-circuit breaking capacity 690 V C: - Max. 1 k. ) This busbar adapter is approved specially for RV17 4 circuit breakers for applications according to UL/CS. 4) Values according to UL/CS - Rated current: 70 at 600 V C; - Short-circuit breaking capacity: 480 V C: 65 k, up to I n = 0 ; 480 Y/77 V C: 65 k; 600 Y/47 V C: 0 k. 4/50

315 ccessories Rotary operating mechanisms Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Rotary operating mechanisms Overview Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms Motor protection circuit breakers with a rotary operating mechanism can be mounted in a control cabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism. When the cabinet door with motor protection circuit breaker is closed, the operating mechanism is coupled. When the motor protection circuit breaker closes, the coupling is locked which prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the maintenance personnel. In the OPEN position, the rotary operating mechanism can be secured against reclosing with up to padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not possible in this case either. SIRIUS RV19 6-0K door-coupling rotary operating mechanism Remote motorized operating mechanisms RV1 motor protection circuit breakers are manually operated controls. They automatically trip in case of an overload or shortcircuit. Intentional remote-controlled tripping is possible by means of a shunt release or an undervoltage release. Reclosing is only possible directly at the motor protection circuit breaker. protection circuit breakers to be opened and closed by electrical commands. This enables a load or an installation to be isolated from the network or reconnected to it from an operator panel. If the motor protection circuit breaker is tripped as a result of overload or short-circuit, it will be in tripped position. For be set manually or electrically to the 0 position (electrically by means of the Open command). Then it can be reclosed. I n max = 50 ) and S (I n max = 100 ) that are designed for control voltages of 0 V C drawing. the motor protection circuit breaker is switched by means of electrical commands. The switching command must be applied mechanism closes the motor protection circuit breaker after a maximum of 1 second. On voltage failure during the switching operation it is ensured that the motor protection circuit breaker be locked with a padlock. RESET function serves to reset any RV19 1-1M signaling switch that might be installed. 4 SIRIUS RV19 6-1B-Z door-coupling rotary operating mechanism for arduous conditions 4/51

316 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Rotary operating mechanisms Remote motorized operating mechanisms Type RV19 6, RV19 46 Max. power consumption U s = 4 V DC U s = 0 V C W V Operating range x U s Minimum command duration at U s s 0.1 Max. command duration Unlimited (uninterrupted operation) Max. total break time, remote-controlled s Ready to reclose after approx. s.5 Switching frequency 1/h 5 Internal back-up fuse Connection type of control cables Plug-in connectors with screw terminals Shock resistance acc. to IEC g/ms 5/11 (square and sine pulse) ccessories Rotary operating mechanisms Selection and ordering data Version Color of handle Version of extension shaft mm Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for arduous conditions For motor protection circuit breakers The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver, an extension shaft of 00 mm in length (8 mm x 8 mm), a spacer and two metal brackets, into which the motor protection circuit breaker is inserted.the door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door interlocking reliably prevents opening of the control cabinet door in the ON position of the motor protection circuit breaker. The OFF position can be locked with up to padlocks. Laterally mountable auxiliary releases and two-pole auxiliary switches can be used. The doorcoupling rotary operating mechanisms thus meet the requirements for isolating functions according to IEC Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms Gray & Black 00 S S Order No. RV19 6-1B-Z RV B-Z RV19 6-1B 4 Version Rated control supply voltage U s For motor protection circuit breakers Remote motorized operating mechanisms Remote motorized operating mechanisms 4 V DC 4 V DC S S S S Order No. RV19 6-P0 RV19 6-B4 RV19 46-P0 RV19 46-B4 RV /5

317 ccessories Mounting accessories Selection and ordering data ccessories Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Mounting accessories Covers RT E1 (left) RV P (right) Mounting material RB B Version uxiliary terminals, -pole Terminal covers for box terminals terminals ( units mountable per device) Terminal covers for cable lug and busbar connection for maintaining the required voltage clearance and as touch protection if box terminal is removed ( units can be mounted per motor protection circuit breaker) Scale covers Sealable, for covering the set current scale Push-in lugs for screwing the motor protection circuit breaker onto mounting plates For each motor protection circuit breaker, units are required. For connection of auxiliary and control cables to the main conductor connections (for one side) For motor protection circuit breakers S S S Order No. RT19 6-4E RT E RT E1 S, S RV P S00 RB B S RT F RT F Link modules ctuating voltage of contactor Screw terminals Contactors Motor protection circuit breakers Order No. Link modules for motor protection circuit breaker to contactor R For mechanical and electrical connection between motor protection circuit breaker and contactor with screw terminals Single-unit packaging C DC S S S S S S S S R R R19 1-1B00 R B00 4 R Tools for opening spring-type terminals Version Color For motor protection circuit breakers Screwdrivers for all SIRIUS devices with spring-type terminals Length approx. 00 mm,.0 mm x 0.5 mm Titanium gray/black, partially insulated Spring-type terminals Order No. S, S R R /5

318 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Enclosures and front plates ccessories Enclosures and front plates Overview Enclosures For stand-alone installation of motor protection circuit breaker I n max = 50 ), molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting are available. When installed in a molded-plastic enclosure the motor protection circuit breakers have a rated operational voltage U e of 500 V. The molded-plastic enclosures are designed to degree of protection IP55. Front plates Motor protection circuit breakers are frequently required to be actuated in any enclosure. Front plates equipped with a rotary S and S are available for this purpose. Enclosure for surface mounting ll enclosures are equipped with N and PE terminals. There are two knock-out cable entries for cable glands at the top and two at the bottom; also on the rear corresponding cable entries are scored. There is a knockout on the top of the enclosure for indicator lights that are available as accessories. 4 is also room for the laterally mounted auxiliary release. There is no provision for installing a motor protection circuit breaker with a signaling switch. The enclosures can be supplied with either a black rotary operating mechanism or with an EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operating mechanism with a red/yellow knob. The rotary operating mechanisms can be locked in the Open position with up to padlocks. 4/54

319 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Selection and ordering data Motor Protection Circuit Breakers SIRIUS RV1 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers up to 100 ccessories Enclosures and front plates Version Degree of protection Molded-plastic enclosures for surface mounting With rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position IP55 Integrated terminals N and PE/ ground Width mm 8 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release) For motor protection circuit breakers S Order No. RV19-1D00 RV19-1D00 With EMERGENCY- STOP rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position IP55 N and PE/ ground 8 (for motor protection circuit breakers + lateral auxiliary switch + auxiliary release) S RV19-1G00 RV19-1G00 Front plates RV19-4B Version Degree of protection For motor protection circuit breakers Molded-plastic front plates with rotary operating mechanism, lockable in 0 position For actuation of RV1 motor protection circuit breakers in any enclosure Molded-plastic front plates with EMERGENCY-STOP rotary operating mechanism, red/yellow, lockable in 0 position EMERGENCY-STOP actuation of RV1 motor protection circuit breakers in any enclosure Order No. IP55 (front side) S, S RV19-4B IP55 (front side) S, S RV19-4E Indicator lights Version Indicator lights for all enclosures and front plates With glow lamp and colored lenses red, green, yellow-orange and clear Rated control supply voltage U s V For motor protection circuit breakers Order No. S RV19 0-5B RV19 0-5C RV19 0-5E RV19 0-5G 4 RV19 0-5B 4/55

320 Overload Relays General data General data Overview 4 Features RU1 RU11 RB0/RB1 RB0/RB1 RB/RB/RB4 General data Sizes S00, S0 S, S S00, S0 S... S1 S00... S1 connections and technical characteristics of the other devices in the SIRIUS modular system (contactors, etc.,...) load feeders in widths of 45 mm (S00), 45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S), 70 mm (S), 10 mm (S6) and 145 mm (S10/S1); this does not include the current measuring modules for the RB to RB4 Seamless current range Protection functions Tripping in the event of overload Tripping in the event of phase unbalance Tripping in the event of phase failure Protection of single-phase loads Tripping in the event of overheating by integrated thermistor motor protection function Tripping in the event of a ground fault by internal groundfault detection (activatable) (up to 80 ) 1) with one series of overload relays (for small to large loads) protection of loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload ( ) protection of loads against excessive temperature rises due to phase unbalance during phase failure loads ) ) ) ) dependent protection of loads against excessive temperature rises e.g. for stator-critical motors or in the event of of the motor surface or for long starting or braking operations equipment (only RB1) (only RB1) against high-resistance short-circuits or ground faults due to moisture, condensed water, damage to the insulation material, etc. equipment vailable Not available 1) Motor currents up to 80 can be recorded and evaluated by a current measuring module, e.g. RB9 06-BG1 (0. to ), in combination with a UF18 68-G00 (80 /1 ) series transformer. ) The SIRIUS RN thermistor motor protection devices can be used to provide additional temperature-dependent protection. 4/56

321 Overload Relays General data General data Features RU1 RU11 RB0/RB1 RB0/RB1 RB/RB/RB4 Features RESETfunction the device Remote RESET function TEST function for auxiliary contacts TEST function for electronics (by means of separate module) (by means of separate module) (only RB1 with 4 V DC) (only RB1 with 4 V DC) wiring Status display Large current adjustment button Integrated auxiliary contacts (1 NO + 1 NC) Integrated auxiliary contacts(1 CO) Communication capability through IO-Link Reading out diagnostics functions Reading out of current values Reading out all set parameters vailable Not available the correct current value ( only RB, RB) (only RB4) (only RB4) (only RB4) (only RB4) necessary directly from the higher-level control system through IO-Link information such as overload, open circuit, ground fault, etc. and their direct processing in the higherlevel control system parameters, e.g. for plant documentation 4 4/57

322 Overload Relays General data General data 4 Features RU1 RU11 RB0/RB1 RB0/RB1 RB/RB/RB4 Design of load feeders Short-circuit strength up to 100 k at 690 V (in conjunction with the corresponding fuses or the corresponding Motor Protection Circuit Breakers) Electrical and mechanical matching to RT contactors Straight-through transformers for main circuit ) (in this case the cables are routed through the feed-through openings of the overload relay and connected directly to the box terminals of the contactor) Spring-type terminal connection system for main circuit ) Spring-type terminal connection system for auxiliary circuits ) Full starter functionality through IO-Link and operating personnel in the event of short-circuits due to insulation faults or faulty switching operations 1) space-saving direct mounting (S... S6) (S00... S6) point of contact) tools, and fast) (only RB4) SIRIUS RT contactors the assembly of communication-capable motor starters (direct-on-line, reversing and wye-delta starting) vailable Not available ) lternatively available for screw terminals. 4/58

323 Overload Relays General data General data Features RU1 RU11 RB0/RB1 RB0/RB1 RB/RB/RB4 Other features Temperature compensation Very high longterm stability Wide setting ranges Trip class CLSS 5 temperatures without derating cabinet without distance between the devices/load feeders cabinet after years of use in severe operating conditions (1:4) (only RB1) (1:4) (only RB1) (1:10) costs costs, tied-up capital motors requiring special protection (e.g. Ex motors) Trip classes > CLSS 10 Low power loss costs (up 98 % less power is used than for thermal overload relays). contactor and control cabinet in some cases this may eliminate the need for controlgear cabinet cooling even for high motor currents (i.e. no heat decoupling is required) Internal power supply Supplied from an external voltage directly through IO-Link Variable adjustment of the trip classes (The required trip class can be adjusted by means of a rotary switch depending on the current start-up condition.) 1) 1) connecting an additional control circuit (only RB4) (only RB1) (only RB1) connecting an additional control circuit costs costs, and tied-up capital 4 vailable Not available 1) The SIRIUS RU11 thermal overload relays use a bimetal contactor and therefore do not require a control supply voltage. 4/59

324 4 Overload Relays General data General data Features RU1 RU11 RB0/RB1 RB0/RB1 RB/RB/RB4 Further characteristics (continued) Overload warning directly on the device due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure to be signaled event of inverse-time delayed overloading of the load for an extended period over the current limit device nalog output signal for actuating moving-coil instruments, feeding programmable logic controllers or transfer to bus systems measuring transducer and signal converter vailable Not available 4/60

325 Overload Relays General data General data Overview of overload relays matching contactors Overload relays Current measurement Current range Contactors RT0 1. RT0. RT10. RT10 4. RT10 5. RT10 6. RT10 7 TF68/TF69 S00 S0 S S S6 S10 S1 Type Type /4/5.5/ /7.5/11/15/ /18.5/ 0/7/45 55/75/90 110/1/160 00/50 75/450 SIRIUS RU1 thermal overload relays RU1 1 Integrated RU1 Integrated RU1 SIRIUS RU11 thermal overload relays RU11 Integrated RU11 4 Integrated RU11 SIRIUS RB0 solid-state overload relays RB0 1 Integrated RB0 Integrated RB0 SIRIUS RB1 solid-state overload relays RB1 1 Integrated RB1 Integrated RB1 SIRIUS RB0 solid-state overload relays RB0 RB0 Integrated 6 50 RB0 4 Integrated RB0 5 Integrated RB0 6 Integrated RB0 1 + UF18 Integrated SIRIUS RB1 solid-state overload relays RB1 RB1 Integrated 6 50 RB1 4 Integrated RB1 5 Integrated RB1 6 Integrated RB1 1 + UF18 Integrated SIRIUS RB/RB/RB4 solid-state overload relays RB to RB4 RB/ RB/ RB4 + RB RB RB RB RB9 0 + UF Can be used Cannot be used 4/61

326 4 Overload Relays General data General data Connection methods Depending on the device version of the RU and RB overload relays, the terminals for screw, spring-type connection are The RU11 thermal overload relays come with screw terminals. The RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays are available with screw terminals (box terminals) or spring-type terminals on the auxiliary current side; the same applies for the evaluation modules of the RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays for high-feature applications. Screw terminals Spring-type terminals The terminals are indicated in the corresponding tables by the symbols shown on orange backgrounds. 4/6

327 RU up to 40 for standard applications Overview Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications The RU1 thermal overload relays up to 40 have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. n overload or phase failure results in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up the bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping mechanism. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting I e and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or automatically after a recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards and approvals. Increased safety type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RU1 thermal overload relays are suitable for the overload type of protection EEx e. The relays meet the requirements of EN (Electrical apparatus for areas subject to explosion submitted. More details on request. 4 SIRIUS RU1 6-4FB00 thermal overload relay Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th Thermal overload relays R U Innovations Device series Size, rated operational current and power Setting range of the overload release Connection methods Installation type Example R U B 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 4/6

328 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications RU up to 40 for standard applications overload relays are listed in the overview table pplication Industries The RU1 thermal overload relays are suitable for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal starting conditions (CLSS 10). pplication The RU1 thermal overload relays have been designed for the protection of three-phase and single-phase C and DC motors. If single-phase C or DC loads are to be protected by the RU1 thermal overload relays, all three bimetal strips must be heated. For this purpose, all main current paths of the relay must be connected in series. mbient conditions The RU1 thermal overload relays have temperature compensation in accordance with IEC for the temperature range of 40 to +60 C. For temperatures from +60 to +80 C the upper set value of the setting range must be reduced by the factor listed in the table below. mbient temperature Derating factor for the upper set value Current ranges C Type RU1 16 RU1 6 S00 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) (overload relay with stand-alone installation support) General data Trips in the event of mm mm 45 x 89 x x 10 x 80 Overload, phase failure Trip class acc. to IEC CLSS 10 Phase failure sensitivity Yes Overload warning No Reset and recovery - For automatic RESET - For manual RESET - For remote RESET Features Safe operation of motors with increased safety type of protection mbient temperature min min min 45 x 97 x x 114 x 97 Manual, utomatic and Remote RESET (Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories) Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide Yes Yes Yes On request C C C Up to 60 - Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C - Temperature inside control cabinet 70 C Repeat terminals % % 100 (over +60 C current reduction is not required) 87 Yes Not required Yes Not required Degree of protection acc. to IEC 6059 IP0 Touch protection acc. to IEC Screw and spring-type terminals Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC g/ms 15/11 (auxiliary contacts 95/96 and 97/98; 8g/11ms) 4/64

329 RU up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications Type RU1 16 RU1 6 S00 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) (overload relay with stand-alone installation support) General data (continued) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity - Burst acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) - Surge acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) (corresponds to degree of severity ) (corresponds to degree of severity ) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference mm mm kv kv kv V/m 45 x 89 x x 10 x x 97 x x 114 x 97 EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays Resistance to extreme climates air humidity % 90 Dimensions Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 000; above this, please enquire Mounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for mounting onto contactors and stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction of 10 % must be implemented. Stand-alone installation: Contactor + overload relay: Type of mounting Mounting onto contactor/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket (For screw and snap-on mounting on TH 5 standard mounting rail. 4 4/65

330 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications RU up to 40 for standard applications Type RU1 16 RU1 6 S00 S0 Main circuit Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Rated operational voltage U e V 690 Type of current Yes Current setting to to Power loss per unit (max.) W Short-circuit protection Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting path acc. to IEC V Conductor cross-sections of main circuit Connection type Screw terminals Terminal screw Operating devices mm Ø Ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1), x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1) x ( ) 1) ; max. 1 x 10 WG x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1), x 1 Connection type Spring-type terminals x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) 4 Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 and.5 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.) mm 1 x ( ) 1 x ( ) mm 1 x ( ) 1 x (1... 6) mm 1 x ( ) 1 x (1... 6) WG 1 x (0... 1) 1 x ( ) 4/66

331 RU up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications Type RU1 16 RU1 6 S00 S0 uxiliary circuit Number of NO contacts 1 Number of NC contacts 1 uxiliary contacts assignment Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts rated operational current I e at U e : - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 0 V V V V rated operational current I e at U e : - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 0 V V V V rated operational current I e at U e : - 4 V - 60 V V - 15 V - 0 V I th 6 Yes Short-circuit protection - Operational class gg - Quick 6 1) Protective separation between auxiliary conducting paths acc. to IEC CS, UL, UR rated data uxiliary circuit switching capacity Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary circuit V 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor On request B600, R00 Connection type Screw terminals 4 Terminal screw Operating devices mm Ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) ; x ( ) 1) Connection type Spring-type terminals Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 and.5 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) mm x ( ) WG x ( ) 1) Up to I k 0.5 k; U 60 V. 4/67

332 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications RU up to 40 for standard applications Selection and ordering data RU1 thermal overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1), CLSS 10 Switch position indicator Screw and spring-type terminals TEST function Overload and phase failure protection STOP button uxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Sealable covers (optional accessory) Manual and automatic RESET RU1 16-4B0 RU1 16-4C0 RU1 6-4FB0 RU1 6-4C0 4 contactor ) Rating for induction motor, rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release kw Size S00 S Size S S Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of operational class gg 4) Screw terminals Order No. RU1 16-0B0 RU1 16-0BB0 RU1 16-0CB0 RU1 16-0DB0 RU1 16-0EB0 RU1 16-0FB0 RU1 16-0GB0 RU1 16-0HB0 RU1 16-0JB0 RU1 16-0KB0 RU1 16-1B0 RU1 16-1BB0 RU1 16-1CB0 RU1 16-1DB0 RU1 16-1EB0 RU1 16-1FB0 RU1 16-1GB0 RU1 16-1HB0 RU1 16-1JB0 RU1 16-1KB0 Spring-type terminals Order No. RU1 16-0C0 RU1 16-0BC0 RU1 16-0CC0 RU1 16-0DC0 RU1 16-0EC0 RU1 16-0FC0 RU1 16-0GC0 RU1 16-0HC0 RU1 16-0JC0 RU1 16-0KC0 RU1 16-1C0 RU1 16-1BC0 RU1 16-1CC0 RU1 16-1DC0 RU1 16-1EC0 RU1 16-1FC0 RU1 16-1GC0 RU1 16-1HC0 RU1 16-1JC0 RU1 16-1KC RU1 16-4B0 RU1 16-4C RU1 6-1CB0 RU1 6-1DB0 RU1 6-1EB0 RU1 6-1FB0 RU1 6-1GB0 RU1 6-1HB0 RU1 6-1JB0 RU1 6-1KB0 RU1 6-4B0 RU1 6-4BB0 RU1 6-4CB0 RU1 6-4DB0 RU1 6-4NB0 RU1 6-4EB0 RU1 6-4PB0 RU1 6-4FB0 RU1 6-1CC0 RU1 6-1DC0 RU1 6-1EC0 RU1 6-1FC0 RU1 6-1GC0 RU1 6-1HC0 RU1 6-1JC0 RU1 6-1KC0 RU1 6-4C0 RU1 6-4BC0 RU1 6-4CC0 RU1 6-4DC0 RU1 6-4NC0 RU1 6-4EC0 RU1 6-4PC0 RU1 6-4FC0 ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 4/68

333 RU up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays RU up to 40 for standard applications RU1 thermal overload relays for stand-alone installation 1), CLSS 10 Screw or spring-type terminals Overload and phase failure protection uxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Manual and automatic RESET Switch position indicator TEST function STOP button Sealable covers (optional accessory) RU1 16-4B1 RU1 16-4C1 RU1 6-4FB1 RU1 6-4FC1 contactor ) Rating for induction motor, rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release kw Size S00 S Size S S Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of operational class gg 4) Screw terminals Order No. RU1 16-0B1 RU1 16-0BB1 RU1 16-0CB1 RU1 16-0DB1 RU1 16-0EB1 RU1 16-0FB1 RU1 16-0GB1 RU1 16-0HB1 RU1 16-0JB1 RU1 16-0KB1 RU1 16-1B1 RU1 16-1BB1 RU1 16-1CB1 RU1 16-1DB1 RU1 16-1EB1 RU1 16-1FB1 RU1 16-1GB1 RU1 16-1HB1 RU1 16-1JB1 RU1 16-1KB1 Spring-type terminals Order No. RU1 16-0C1 RU1 16-0BC1 RU1 16-0CC1 RU1 16-0DC1 RU1 16-0EC1 RU1 16-0FC1 RU1 16-0GC1 RU1 16-0HC1 RU1 16-0JC1 RU1 16-0KC1 RU1 16-1C1 RU1 16-1BC1 RU1 16-1CC1 RU1 16-1DC1 RU1 16-1EC1 RU1 16-1FC1 RU1 16-1GC1 RU1 16-1HC1 RU1 16-1JC1 RU1 16-1KC RU1 16-4B1 RU1 16-4C RU1 6-4BB1 RU1 6-4CB1 RU1 6-4DB1 RU1 6-4NB1 RU1 6-4EB1 RU1 6-4PB1 RU1 6-4FB1 RU1 6-4BC1 RU1 6-4CC1 RU1 6-4DC1 RU1 6-4NC1 RU1 6-4EC1 RU1 6-4PC1 RU1 6-4FC1 4 1) Screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rail. ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 4/69

334 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays ccessories ccessories Overview Overload relays for standard applications The following optional accessories are available for the RU1 thermal overload relays: Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation with screw or Electrical remote RESET module in three voltage variants (for Selection and ordering data Version Order No. Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation Terminal brackets for overload relays with screw terminals Screw terminals For separate mounting of the overload relays; screw and snapon mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rail S00 S0 RU RU RU RU Terminal brackets for overload relays with spring-type terminals For separate mounting of the overload relays; screw and snapon mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rail S00 S0 Spring-type terminals RU9 16-C01 RU9 6-C01 RU9 16-C01 4 RU9 6-C01 Mechanical RESET Resetting plungers, holders and formers S00, S0 RU Pushbuttons with extended stroke (1 mm), IP65, Ø mm S00, S0 SB0 00-0E11 Extension plungers For compensation of the distance between the pushbutton and the unlatching button of the relay S00, S0 SX1 5 RU with pushbutton and extension plunger Cable releases with holder for RESET For Ø 6.5 mm holes in the control panel; max. control panel thickness 8 mm S00, S0 RU9 00-1B S00, S0 RU9 00-1C RU /70

335 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU Thermal Overload Relays ccessories ccessories Version Order No. Modules for remote RESET, electrical Operating range U s, power consumption C 80 V, DC 70 W, ON period s, switching frequency 60/h S00, S0 RU19 00-B71 S00, S0 RU19 00-F71 S00, S0 RU19 00-M71 RU Sealable covers For covering the setting knobs S00, S0 RV9 08-0P RV9 08-0P 4 4/71

336 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications RU11 up to 100 for standard applications 4 Overview SIRIUS RU11 6-1HB0 thermal overload relay Order No. scheme Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the contactors. The overload relay can be mounted onto a contactor using these pins. Stand-alone installation is possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a stand-alone installation module). The RU11 thermal overload relays up to 100 have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. n overload or phase failure results in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up the bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping mechanism. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. The "tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or automatically after a recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards and approvals. "Increased safety" type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors with "increased safety" type of protection EEx e. The relays meet the requirements of EN (Electrical apparatus for areas subject to explosion Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th Thermal overload relays R U SIRIUS 1st generation 1 Device series Size, rated operational current and power Setting range of the overload release Connection methods Installation type Example R U H B 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 4/7

337 RU11 up to 100 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications pplication Industries The RU11 thermal overload relays are suitable for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal starting conditions (CLSS 10). pplication The RU11 thermal overload relays have been designed for the protection of three-phase and single-phase C and DC motors. If single-phase C or DC loads are to be protected by the RU11 thermal overload relays, all three bimetal strips must be heated. For this purpose, all main current paths of the relay must be connected in series. mbient conditions The RU11 thermal overload relays have temperature compensation in accordance with IEC for the temperature range of 0 to +60 C. For temperatures from +60 to +80 C the upper set value of the setting range must be reduced by the factor listed in the table below. mbient temperature in C Derating factor for the upper set value Type RU11 6 RU11 46 S S Dimensions (W x H x D) (overload relay with stand-alone installation support) mm 55 x 105 x x 10 x 140 General data Trips in the event of Overload and phase failure Trip class acc. to IEC CLSS 10 Phase failure sensitivity Yes Overload warning No Reset and recovery Manual, utomatic and Remote RESET (Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories) - For automatic RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic - For manual RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic - For remote RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic Features Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide Yes Yes Yes Safe operation of motors with "increased safety" type of protection mbient temperature C C C Up to 60 - Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C % 100 (over +60 C current reduction is not required) - Temperature inside control cabinet 70 C % 87 Repeat terminals Not required Not required Degree of protection acc. to IEC 6059 IP0 (terminal compartment: IP00 degree of protection) Touch protection acc. to IEC Finger-safe Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC g/ms 8/10 4 4/7

338 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications RU11 up to 100 for standard applications Type RU11 6 RU11 46 S S Dimensions (W x H x D) (overload relay with stand-alone installation support) mm 55 x 105 x x 10 x 140 General data (continued) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity - Burst acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays - Surge acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays kv EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays (corresponds to degree of severity ) V/m EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays (corresponds to degree of severity ) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays Resistance to extreme climates air humidity % 100 Dimensions See "Dimensional drawings" Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 000; above this, please enquire Mounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for mounting onto contactors and stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction of 10 % must be implemented. Stand-alone installation: Contactor + overload relay: 4 Type of mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket (For screw and snap-on mounting on TH 5 standard mounting rail; 4/74

339 RU11 up to 100 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications Type RU11 6 RU11 46 S S Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui V (pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 6 8 Rated operational voltage Ue V Type of current Yes Current setting to to Power loss per unit (max.) W Short-circuit protection See "Selection and ordering data" motor starter protectors for motor feeders" Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting path acc. to IEC V 690 Conductor cross-section of the main circuit Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal Terminal screw M8, 4 mm llen screw Operating devices mm ø mm llen screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) x ( ) mm x ( ), 1 x ( ) x ( ), 1 x ( ) mm x ( ), 1 x ( ) x ( ), 1 x ( ) WG x (18... ), 1 x ( ) x ( /0), 1 x (10... /0) mm x (6 x 9 x 0.8) x (6 x 9 x 0.8) (number x width x thickness) Connection type Busbar connection 1) Terminal screw -- M6 x 0 Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.) mm -- x 70 mm -- x 70 WG -- /0 stranded, with cable lug mm ) The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are possible if the box terminal is removed. 4/75

340 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications RU11 up to 100 for standard applications 4 Type RU11 6 RU11 46 S S uxiliary circuit Number of NO contacts 1 Number of NC contacts 1 uxiliary contacts assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped"; 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree ) V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 6 Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts rated operational current Ie at Ue: - 4 V 4-10 V 4-15 V 4-0 V V V V 0.5 rated operational current Ie at Ue: - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 0 V V V V 0.5 rated operational current Ie at Ue: - 4 V 1-60 V On request V V V 0.11 Ith 6 (up to Ik Yes Short-circuit protection - Operational class gg 6 - Quick 10 6 Protective separation between auxiliary conducting paths acc. to IEC V 415 CS, UL, UR rated data uxiliary circuit switching capacity Conductor cross-sections of the auxiliary circuit Connection type B600, R00 Screw terminals Terminal screw Operating devices mm ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) mm -- mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) WG x ( ) 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping crosssections are used, this restriction does not apply. 4/76

341 RU11 up to 100 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications Selection and ordering data RU11 thermal overload relays with screw terminals on the auxiliary current side for mounting onto contactor 1), CLSS 10 Size S RU B0 Size S RU B0 contactor ) S S Rating for induction motor rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release kw Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of coordination "", operational class gg 4) ) 00 Screw terminals (on auxiliary current side) Order No. RU11 6-1HB0 RU11 6-1JB0 RU11 6-1KB0 RU11 6-4B0 RU11 6-4BB0 RU11 6-4DB0 RU11 6-4EB0 RU11 6-4FB0 RU11 6-4GB0 RU11 6-4HB0 RU DB0 RU EB0 RU FB0 RU HB0 RU JB0 RU KB0 RU LB0 RU MB0 1) With the suitable terminal brackets, the RU11 overload relays for mounting onto contactor can also be installed as stand-alone units. ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 5) page 4/. 4 4/77

342 4 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays RU11 up to 100 for standard applications RU11 up to 100 for standard applications RU11 thermal overload relays with screw terminals on the auxiliary current side for stand-alone installation 1), CLSS 10 Size S contactor ) S Rating for induction motor rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release kw Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of coordination "", operational class gg 4) Screw terminals (on auxiliary current side) Order No. RU11 6-4EB1 RU11 6-4FB1 RU11 6-4GB1 RU11 6-4HB1 RU11 6-4EB1 Size S S ) RU JB1 RU KB1 RU LB1 RU MB1 RU JB1 ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 5) page 4/. 4/78

343 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays ccessories ccessories Overview Overload relays for standard applications The following optional accessories are available for the RU11 thermal overload relays: Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation Type RU RU For overload relays RU11 6 RU11 46 Mounting type For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rails, Connection for main circuit Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal Terminal screw 4 mm llen screw Operating devices mm ø mm llen screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) x ( ) mm mm x ( ), 1 x ( ) mm x ( ), 1 x ( ) WG x (18... ), 1 x ( ) (number x width x thickness) x ( ), 1 x ( ) x ( ), 1 x ( ) x ( /0), 1 x (10... /0) mm x (6 x 9 x 0.8) x (6 x 9 x 0.8) Selection and ordering data Version Order No. Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation For separate mounting of overload relays; screw and snap-on mounting onto S S RU RU RU Mechanical RESET Resetting plungers, holders and formers S, S RU Pushbuttons with extended stroke S, S SB0 00-0E11 (1 mm), IP65, ø mm Extension plungers For compensation of the distance between the pushbutton and the unlatching button of the relay S, S SX1 5 RU with pushbutton and extension plunger 4/79

344 4 Overload Relays SIRIUS RU1 Thermal Overload Relays ccessories ccessories Version Order No. Cable releases with holder for RESET For ø 6.5 mm holes in the control panel; max. control panel thickness 8 mm S, S RU B RU C RU Modules for remote RESET, electrical Operating range Us, power consumption C 80 V, DC 70 W, ON period s, switching frequency 60/h S, S RU19 00-B71 S, S RU19 00-F71 S, S RU19 00-M71 RU Terminal covers Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections S RT E1 Covers for box terminals S RT19 6-4E S RT E 4/80

345 RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Overview SIRIUS RB1-4VE00 solid-state overload relay Order No. scheme The RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays up to 40 with internal power supply have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal and heavy starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure. n overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. This current rise is detected by the current transformers integrated into the devices and evaluated by corresponding solid-state circuits which then output a pulse to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting I e and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. In addition to inverse-time delayed protection of loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance and phase failure, the RB1 solid-state overload relays also allow internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting). This provides protection of loads against high-resistance short-circuits due to damage to the insulation material, moisture, condensed water etc. indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or automatically after the recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards and approvals. Increased safety type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RB0/RB1 solid-state overload relays are suitable for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors with the requirements of EN (Electrical apparatus for areas 4 Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th Solid-state overload relays R B SIRIUS Innovation Device series Size, rated operational current and power Version of the automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET Trip class (CLSS) Setting range of the overload release Connection methods Installation type Example R B R B 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 4/81

346 4 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications pplication Industries The RB0/RB1 solid-state overload relays are suitable for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions (CLSS 5 to management. pplication The RB0/RB1 solid-state overload relays have been designed voltage networks. The relays are not suitable for the protection of single-phase C or DC loads. The RU1 thermal overload relay or the RB/RB solid-state overload relay can be used for single-phase C loads. For DC loads we recommend the RU1 thermal overload relay. mbient conditions shocks, corrosive ambient conditions, ageing and temperature For the temperature range from 5 C to +60 C, the RB0/RB1 solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature in accordance with IEC /8

347 RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Type RB0 1., RB1 1. RB0., RB1. S00 S0 Dimensions (W x H x D) (overload relay with stand-alone installation support) General data Trips in the event of mm mm 45 x 89 x x 10 x x 97 x x 116 x 95 Overload, phase failure, and phase unbalance + ground fault (for RB1 only) Trip class acc. to IEC CLSS RB0: 10, 0; RB1: 5, 10, 0 and 0 adjustable Phase failure sensitivity Yes Overload warning No Reset and recovery Manual, automatic and remote RESET (depending on the version) - For automatic RESET pprox. min - For manual RESET Immediately - For remote RESET Immediately Features Yes, by means of switch position indicator slide Yes, test of electronics by pressing the TEST button /test of auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by actuating the switch position indicator slide/self-monitoring Yes No Explosion protection safe operation of motors with increased safety type of protection II () GD mbient temperatures C C C Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C % ) - Temperature inside control cabinet 70 C % On request Repeat terminals Yes Not required Yes Not required Degree of protection acc. to IEC 6059 IP0 Touch protection acc. to IEC Finger-safe Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC g/ms g/ms) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity - Burst acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv (power ports), 1 (signal ports) - Surge acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv (line to earth), 1 (line to line) kv 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge) (corresponds to degree of severity ) V/m 10 (corresponds to degree of severity ) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference Degree of severity B according to EN (CISPR 11) and EN 550 (CISPR ) Resistance to extreme climates air humidity % 95 Dimensions Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 000 Mounting position ny Type of mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket 4 1) Permissible rated current in case of heavy starting - CLSS 0, I e max =, - CLSS 0, I e max = 5. 4/8

348 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Type RB0 1., RB1 1. RB0., RB1. S00 S0 Main circuit Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 (pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Rated operational voltage U e V 690 Type of current No Current setting to to Power loss per unit (max.) W Short-circuit protection Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting path acc. to IEC (pollution degree ) V 690 for grounded networks, otherwise 600 V Conductor cross-sections of main circuit Connection type Screw terminals Terminal screw Operating device mm Ø Ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1) mm x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) x (1....5) 1), x ( ) 1) ; max. 1 x 10 WG x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1), x 1 Connection type Spring-type terminals x ( ) 1), x ( ) 1) 4 Operating device mm.0 x 0.5 and.5 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.) mm 1 x ( ) 1 x ( ) mm 1 x ( ) 1 x (1... 6) mm 1 x ( ) 1 x (1... 6) WG 1 x (0... 1) 1 x ( ) 1) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping sections are used, this restriction does not apply. 4/84

349 RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Type RB0 1., RB1 1. RB0., RB1. S00 S0 uxiliary circuit Number of NO contacts 1 Number of NC contacts 1 uxiliary contacts assignment 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 00 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 4 uxiliary contacts contact rating rated operational current I e at U e : - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 50 V rated operational current I e at U e : - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 50 V rated operational current I e at U e : - 4 V - 60 V V - 15 V - 50 V I th 5 Yes Short-circuit protection 6 Ground-fault protection (only RB1) I D I t trip (in steady-state condition) Integrated electrical remote RESET (only RB1) Connecting terminals, 4 Protective separation between auxiliary conducting paths acc. to IEC CS, UL, UR rated data uxiliary circuit switching capacity Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary circuit s V 00 I motor Lower current setting value < I motor <.5 upper set current value < 1 4 V DC, max. 00 m for approx. 0 ms, then < 10 m RB0: B600, R00; RB1: B00, R00 Connection type Screw terminals 4 Terminal screw Operating device mm Ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm mm WG 1 ( ), ( ) 1 ( ), ( ) ( ) Connection type Spring-type terminals Operating device mm.0 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm mm mm WG ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 4/85

350 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Selection and ordering data RB0 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1), CLSS 10 Screw and spring-type terminals Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection Internal power supply uxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Manual and automatic RESET Switch position indicator TEST function and self-monitoring Sealable covers (optional accessory) RB0 16-1TB0 RB0 16-1TE0 RB0 6-1VB0 RB0 6-1VE0 4 contactor ) Rating for induction motor Rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of operational class gg 4) Screw terminals Order No. Spring-type terminals Order No. kw Size S00 1) S RB0 16-1RB0 RB0 16-1RE RB0 16-1NB0 RB0 16-1NE RB0 16-1PB0 RB0 16-1PE RB0 16-1SB0 RB0 16-1SE RB0 16-1TB0 RB0 16-1TE0 Size S0 1) S RB0 6-1RB0 RB0 6-1RE RB0 6-1NB0 RB0 6-1NE RB0 6-1PB0 RB0 6-1PE RB0 6-1SB0 RB0 6-1SE RB0 6-1QB0 RB0 6-1QE RB0 6-1VB0 RB0 6-1VE0 1) With the suitable terminal brackets, these overload relays can also be installed as stand-alone units. ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 4/86

351 RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications RB0 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1), CLSS 0 Screw and spring-type terminals Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection Internal power supply uxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Manual and automatic RESET Switch position indicator TEST function and self-monitoring Sealable covers (optional accessory) RB0 16-TB0 RB0 16-TE0 RB0 6-VB0 RB0 6-VE0 contactor ) Rating for induction motor Rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of operational class gg 4) Screw terminals Order No. Spring-type terminals Order No. kw Size S00 1) S RB0 16-RB0 RB0 16-RE RB0 16-NB0 RB0 16-NE RB0 16-PB0 RB0 16-PE RB0 16-SB0 RB0 16-SE RB0 16-TB0 RB0 16-TE0 Size S0 1) S RB0 6-RB0 RB0 6-RE RB0 6-NB0 RB0 6-NE RB0 6-PB0 RB0 6-PE RB0 6-SB0 RB0 6-SE RB0 6-QB0 RB0 6-QE RB0 6-VB0 RB0 6-VE0 4 1) With the suitable terminal brackets, these overload relays can also be installed as stand-alone units. ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 4/87

352 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 40 for standard applications RB1 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1), CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 adjustable Screw and spring-type terminals Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection Internal ground-fault detection (activatable) Internal power supply uxiliary contacts 1 NO + 1 NC Manual and automatic RESET Electrical remote RESET integrated Switch position indicator TEST function and self-monitoring Sealable covers (optional accessory) RB1 1-4TB0 RB1 1-4TE0 RB1-4VB0 RB1-4VE0 4 contactor ) Rating for induction motor Rated value ) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of operational class gg 4) Screw terminals Order No. Spring-type terminals Order No. kw Size S00 1) S RB1 1-4RB0 RB1 1-4RE RB1 1-4NB0 RB1 1-4NE RB1 1-4PB0 RB1 1-4PE RB1 1-4SB0 RB1 1-4SE RB1 1-4TB0 RB1 1-4TE0 Size S0 1) S RB1-4RB0 RB1-4RE RB1-4NB0 RB1-4NE RB1-4PB0 RB1-4PE RB1-4SB0 RB1-4SE RB1-4QB0 RB1-4QE RB1-4VB0 RB1-4VE0 1) With the suitable terminal brackets, these overload relays can also be installed as stand-alone units. ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 4/88

353 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays ccessories ccessories Overview Overload relays for standard applications The following optional accessories are available for the RB0/RB1 solid-state overload relays: Terminal bracket for stand-alone installation with screw or Selection and ordering data Version Order No. Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation Terminal brackets for overload relays with screw terminals For separate mounting of the overload relays; screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rail S00 S0 Screw terminals RU RU RU RU Terminal brackets for overload relays with spring-type terminals For separate mounting of the overload relays; screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rail S00 S0 Spring-type terminals RU9 16-C01 RU9 6-C01 RU9 16-C01 RU9 6-C01 Mechanical RESET Resetting plungers, holders and formers S00, S0 RB Pushbuttons with extended stroke S00, S0 SB0 00-0E11 (1 mm), IP65, Ø mm Extension plungers For compensation of the distance between a pushbutton and the unlatching button of the relay S00, S0 SX1 5 4 RB with pushbutton and extension plunger Cable releases with holder for RESET For Ø 6.5 mm holes in the control panel; max. control panel thickness 8 mm S00, S0 RB9 80-0B S00, S0 RB9 80-0C RB Sealable covers For covering the setting knobs S00, S0 RB RB /89

354 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Overview The RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays up to 60 with internal power supply have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal and heavy starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance or phase failure. n overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. This current rise is detected by the current transformers integrated into the devices and evaluated by corresponding solidstate circuits which then output a pulse to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. In addition to inverse-time delayed protection of loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload, phase unbalance and phase failure, the RB1 solid-state overload relays also allow internal ground-fault detection (not possible in conjunction with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting). This provides protection of loads against high-resistance short-circuits due to damage to the insulation material, moisture, condensed water etc. indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or automatically after the recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards and approvals. 4 SIRIUS RB1-4UB0 solid-state overload relay Increased safety type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RB0/RB1 solid-state overload relays are suitable for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors with increased of EN (Electrical apparatus for areas subject to explosion Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th Solid-state overload relays R B SIRIUS nd generation Device series Size, rated operational current and power Version of the automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET Trip class (CLSS) Setting range of the overload release Connection methods Installation type Example R B Q B 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 4/90

355 RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications pplication Industries The RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays are suitable for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time delayed protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy starting conditions (CLSS 5 to management. pplication The RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays have been designed for the protection of induction motors in sinusoidal protection of single-phase C or DC loads. The RU11 thermal overload relays or the RB to RB4 solidstate overload relays can be used for single-phase C loads. For DC loads we recommend the RU11 thermal overload relay. mbient conditions shocks, corrosive ambient conditions, ageing and temperature For the temperature range from 5 C to +60 C, the RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature in accordance with IEC For the RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays with the factor. Type Setting range Derating factor for the upper set value for stand-alone installation at ambient temperature +50 C +60 C RB0 56, RB % 100 % RB0 66, RB % 100 % RB0 66, RB % 90 % Type Setting range Derating factor for the upper set value for mounting onto contactor at ambient temperature +50 C +60 C RB0 56, RB % 70 % RB0 66, RB % 70 % RB0 66, RB % 70 % 4 4/91

356 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications 4 Type RB0 6, RB1 RB0 46, RB1 4 RB0 56, RB1 5 RB0 66, RB1 6 S S S6 S10/S1 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 55 x 74 x x 86 x x 119 x x 147 x 156 (overload relay with stand-alone installation support) General data Trips in the event of Overload, phase failure, and phase unbalance + ground fault (for RB1 only) Trip class acc. to IEC CLSS RB0: 10 or 0; RB1: 5, 10, 0 and 0 adjustable Phase failure sensitivity Yes Overload warning No Reset and recovery RB0: Manual and automatic RESET; RB1: Manual, automatic and remote RESET - For automatic RESET pprox. min - For manual RESET Immediately - For remote RESET Immediately Features Yes, by means of switch position indicator slide Yes, test of electronics by pressing the TEST button / test of auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by actuating the switch position indicator slide/self-monitoring Yes No Explosion protection Safe operation of motors with increased safety type of protection II () GD mbient temperatures C C C Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C, stand-alone installation % or 90 1) - Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C, mounted on contactor % Temperature inside control cabinet 70 C % On request Repeat terminals Yes Not required Yes Not required Degree of protection acc. to IEC 6059 IP0 IP0 (terminal compartment: IP00 degree of protection) Touch protection acc. to IEC Finger-safe Finger-safe; for busbar connection with cover Finger-safe with cover Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC g/ms g/ms) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity - Burst acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv (power ports), 1 (signal ports) - Surge acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv (line to earth), 1 (line to line) kv 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge) (corresponds to degree of severity ) V/m 10 (corresponds to degree of severity ) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference Degree of severity B according to EN (CISPR 11) and EN 550 (CISPR ) Resistance to extreme climates air humidity % 100 Dimensions Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 000 Mounting position ny Type of mounting Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with terminal bracket Direct mounting/stand-alone installation 1) 90 % for relay with current setting range 160 to 60. 4/9

357 RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Type RB0 6, RB1 S S Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690/1000 1) 1000 (pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 6/8 ) 8 Rated operational voltage Ue V 690/1000 1) 1000 Type of current No Current setting , Power loss per unit (max.) W 0.05 Short-circuit protection Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting path cc. to IEC (pollution degree ) Conductor cross-sections of the main circuit Connection type V RB0 46, RB , for grounded networks, otherwise 600 V Screw terminals with box terminal Terminal screw M8, 4 mm llen screw Operating devices mm ø mm llen screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm ( ) ( ) mm mm ( ), 1 ( ) mm (max. 5), 1 (1... 5) WG (max. 4), 1 (18... ) (number x width x thickness) Connection type Busbar connections ( ), 1 ( ) ( ), 1 ( ) ( /0), 1 (10... /0) mm ( ) ( ) Terminal screw -- M6 0 Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.) mm mm WG -- /0 mm -- 1 Connection type Straight-through transformers Diameter of opening mm ) For version with straight-through transformer up to V C. ) For version with straight-through transformer up to 8 kv. 4/9

358 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Type RB0 56, RB1 5 RB0 66, RB1 6 S6 S10/S1 Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree ) V 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 8 Rated operational voltage Ue V 1000 Type of current No Current setting , Power loss per unit (max.) W 0.05 Short-circuit protection Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting path cc. to IEC (pollution degree ) V 690 for grounded networks, otherwise 600 V Conductor cross-sections of the main circuit Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal 4 Terminal screw mm 4 mm llen screw 5 mm llen screw Operating devices mm 4 mm llen screw 5 mm llen screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm mm With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 50, 1 max. 70), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 95, 1 max. 10), 1 ( ) mm With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 50, 1 max. 70), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 95, 1 max. 10), 1 ( ) mm With RT G box terminal: (max. 70), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: (max. 10), 1 ( ) WG With RT G box terminal: (max. 1/0), 1 (6... /0) (number x width x thickness) mm With RT G box terminal: (max. /0), 1 ( kcmil) With RT G box terminal: ( ), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: ( ), 1 ( ) Busbar connections Connection type Terminal screw M8 5 M10 0 Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-section (min./max.) mm ) ) mm ) ) ( ), rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) Rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) ( ), rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) Rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) ( ), rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) Rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) (/ kcmil), rear clamping point only: 1 (/ kcmil) Rear clamping point only: 1 (50 kcmil kcmil) ( ), 1 ( ) WG kcmil / kcmil mm 15 5 Connection type Straight-through transformers Diameter of opening 1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 465 with conductor crosssections mm ) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 464 with conductor crosssections of 95 mm and more, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used to ensure phase spacing. of 40 mm and more as well as to DIN 465 with conductor cross-sections of 185 mm and more, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used for to keep the phase clearance. 4/94

359 RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Type RB0 6, RB1 RB0 46, RB1 4 RB0 56, RB1 5 RB0 66, RB1 6 S S S6 S10/S1 uxiliary circuit Number of NO contacts 1 Number of NC contacts 1 uxiliary contacts assignment 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree ) V 00 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 4 uxiliary contacts contact rating rated operational current Ie at Ue: - 4 V 4-10 V 4-15 V 4-50 V rated operational current Ie at Ue: - 4 V 4-10 V 4-15 V 4-50 V rated operational current Ie at Ue: - 4 V - 60 V V V V 0.11 Ith 5 Yes Short-circuit protection 6 Ground-fault protection (only RB1) I Imotor I Lower current setting value < Imotor <.5 upper current setting value ttrip (in steady-state condition) s < 1 Integrated electrical remote RESET (only RB1) Connecting terminals, 4 4 V DC, 100 m,.4 W short-term Protective separation between auxiliary conducting paths V 00 acc. to IEC CS, UL, UR rated data uxiliary circuit switching capacity Conductor cross-sections of the auxiliary circuit Connection type B00, R00 Screw terminals 4 Terminal screw Operating devices mm ø Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm 1 ( ), ( ) mm -- mm 1 ( ), ( ) mm -- WG ( ) Connection type Spring-type terminals Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm ( ) mm -- mm ( ) mm ( ) WG ( ) 4/95

360 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Selection and ordering data RB0 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1)) and stand-alone installation )), CLSS 10 protection RB0 6-1UB0 RB0 56-1FW 4 4) Rating for induction motor Rated value 5) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with operational class gg 6) Screw terminals (on auxiliary current side) Order No. kw Size S 1))7) S RB0 6-1QB0 RB0 6-1QW RB0 6-1UB0 RB0 6-1UW1 Size S 1))7) S RB0 46-1UB RB0 46-1EB0 RB0 46-1EW1 Size S6 )7) S6 with busbar connections RB0 56-1FC S6 with box terminals RB0 56-1FW Size S10/S1 ) (TF68/TF69) RB0 66-1GC RB0 66-1MC 1) The relays with an Order No. ending with 0 are designed for mounting onto contactor. ) The relays with an Order No. ending with are designed for mounting onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For TF68/TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible. ) The relays with an Order No. ending with 1 are designed for stand-alone installation. 4) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 7) The relays with an Order No. with W or X in penultimate position are equipped with a straight-through transformer. 4/96

361 RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB0 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1)) and stand-alone installation )), CLSS 0 protection RB0 6-UB0 RB0 56-FW 4) Rating for induction motor Rated value 5) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with operational class gg 6) Screw terminals (on auxiliary current side) Order No. kw Size S 1))7) S RB0 6-QB0 RB0 6-QW RB0 6-UB0 RB0 6-UW1 Size S 1))7) S RB0 46-UB RB0 46-EB0 RB0 46-EW1 Size S6 )7) S6 with busbar connections RB0 56-FC S6 with box terminals RB0 56-FW Size S10/S1 ) (TF68/TF69) RB0 66-GC RB0 66-MC 4 1) The relays with an Order No. ending with 0 are designed for mounting onto contactor. ) The relays with an Order No. ending with are designed for mounting onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For TF68/TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible. ) The relays with an Order No. ending with 1 are designed for stand-alone installation. 4) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 7) The relays with an Order No. with W or X in penultimate position are equipped with a straight-through transformer. 4/97

362 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB0, RB1 up to 60 for standard applications RB1 solid-state overload relays for mounting onto contactor 1)) and stand-alone installation )), CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 adjustable protection 4 4) Rating for induction motor Rated value 5) Current setting of the inverse-time delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with operational class gg 6) Screw terminals (on auxiliary current side) Order No. kw Size S 1))7) S RB1-4QB0 RB1-4QW RB1-4UB0 RB1-4UW1 Size S 1))7) S RB1 4-4UB RB1 4-4EB0 RB1 4-4EW1 Size S6 )7) S6 with busbar connection RB1 5-4FC S6 with box terminals RB1 5-4FW Size S10/S1 ) (TF68/TF69) RB1 6-4GC RB1 6-4MC 1) The relays with an Order No. ending with 0 are designed for mounting onto contactor. ) The relays with an Order No. ending with are designed for mounting onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For TF68/TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible. ) The relays with an Order No. ending with 1 are designed for stand-alone installation. 4) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units.. 7) The relays with an Order No. with W or X in penultimate position are equipped with a straight-through transformer. 4/98

363 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays ccessories for RB0, RB1 ccessories for RB0, RB1 Overview Overload relays for standard applications The following optional accessories are available for the RB0 and RB1 solid-state overload relays: Selection and ordering data Version Order No. Mechanical RESET Resetting plungers, holders and formers S... S10/S1 RU Pushbuttons with extended stroke S... S10/S1 SB0 00-0E11 (1 mm), IP65, ø mm Extension plungers For compensation of the distance between a pushbutton and the unlatching button of the relay S... S10/S1 SX1 5 RU with pushbutton and extension plunger Cable releases with holder for RESET For ø 6.5 mm holes in the control panel; S... S10/S1 max. control panel thickness 8 mm RU B RU C RU Sealable covers For covering the setting knobs S... S10/S1 RB RB Terminal covers RT E1 RT19 6-4E mounting on the contactor. Box terminal blocks Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections 1) S RT E1 S6 RT E1 S10/S1 RT E1 Covers for box terminals 1) S RT19 6-4E 1) S RT E S6 RT E S10/S1 RT E Covers for screw terminals S6 RT E between contactor and overload relay, without box terminals (1 unit required per combination) S10/S1 RT E For round and ribbon cables S6 ) RT G S6 RT G S10/S1 RT G Information on page 4/1. 4 RT G 1) In the scope of supply for RT contactors (55 kw). 4/99

364 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications 4 Overview SIRIUS RB to RB4 evaluation modules SIRIUS RB9 06 current measuring module The RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays up to 60 (up to 80 possible in combination with a series transformer) are from a modular system. The RB overload relays (with monostable auxiliary contacts) and the RB overload relays (with bistable auxiliary contacts) are supplied from an external voltage, the RB4 overload relays (with monostable auxiliary contacts) are supplied through IO-Link. These devices have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with normal starting and heavy starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. n overload, phase unbalance or phase failure result in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor overload relays can also be used as direct-on-line or reversing starters (wye-delta starting also possible). This current rise is detected by means of a current measuring module and electronically evaluated by a special evaluation module which is connected to it. The evaluation electronics sends a signal to the auxiliary contacts. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio between the tripping current and current setting Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping continuous red OVERLOD The LED indicates imminent tripping of the relay due to overload, current has been violated. In the case of the RB and RB overload relays this warning can also be issued through auxiliary contacts, in the case of the RB4 overload relays it can also be issued through IO-Link. In addition to the described inverse-time delayed protection of loads against excessive temperature rises, the RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays also allow direct temperature monitoring of the motor windings (full motor protection) by connection with broken-wire interlock of a PTC sensor circuit. With this temperature-dependent protection, the loads can be protected against overheating caused indirectly by reduced of the current alone. In the event of overheating, the devices switch off the contactor, and thus the load, by means of the continuously illuminated THERMISTOR To also protect the loads against high-resistance short-circuits due to damage to the insulation, humidity, condensed water, etc., the RB and RB solid-state overload relays in conjunction with a function expansion module and the RB4 solidstate overload relays offer the possibility of internal groundfault detection (not possible in conjunction with contactor assembly for wye-delta starting). In the event of a ground fault the RB to RB4 relays trip instantaneously. status can also be signaled through auxiliary contacts, in the case of the RB4 overload relays it can also be signaled through IO-Link. fter tripping due to overload, phase unbalance, phase failure, thermistor or ground-fault tripping, the relay is reset manually or automatically after the recovery time has elapsed. In the case of the RB and RB evaluation modules in conjunction with a corresponding function expansion module, the motor current measured by the microprocessor can be output in the form of an analog signal DC 4 m to 0 m for operating rotary coil instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable logic controllers. 4/100

365 RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications With an additional S-Interface analog module the current values of the RB and RB overload relays can also be transferred over the S-i bus system. In the case of the RB4 overload relays the current values are transmitted to the higher-level control system directly through IO-Link. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials. They comply with all important worldwide standards and approvals. Increased safety type of protection EEx e according to TEX directive 94/9/EC The RB and RB4 (monostable) solid-state overload relays are suitable for the overload protection of explosion-proof motors The relays meet the requirements of EN (Electrical RB RB4 been submitted. On request. Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th Solid-state overload relays R B Innovations Device series Size, rated operational current and power Version of the automatic RESET, electrical remote RESET Trip class (CLSS) Setting range of the overload release Connection methods Installation type Example R B Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. pplication Industries The RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays are suitable for customers from all industries who want to guarantee optimum inverse-time delayed and temperature-dependent protection of their electrical loads (e.g. motors) under normal and heavy availability and maintenance management. pplication The RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays have been designed for the protection of three-phase asynchronous and single-phase C motors. In addition the RB4 overload relays can be used as directonline or reversing starters (wye-delta starting also possible) which are controlled through IO-Link. It is thus possible to control operating mechanisms directly through IO-Link from a higherlevel control system and also to signal e.g. current values directly through IO-Link. If single-phase C motors are to be protected by the RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays, the main current paths of the current measuring modules must be series-connected. mbient conditions shocks, corrosive ambient conditions, ageing and temperature For the temperature range from 5 C to +60 C, the RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays compensate the temperature in accordance with IEC C on request. 4 4/101

366 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications 4 Type Overload relay: complete system Size of contactor General data Trips in the event of RB, RB, RB4 S00... S10/S1 ground fault (with corresponding function expansion module) and activation of the thermistor motor protection (with closed PTC sensor circuit) Trip class acc. to IEC CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 adjustable Phase failure sensitivity Yes Overload warning Yes, from 1.15 x Ie for symmetrical loads and from 0.85 x Ie for unsymmetrical loads Reset and recovery Manual, automatic and remote RESET - For automatic RESET min - For tripping due to overcurrent: (stored permanently) - For tripping by thermistor: time until the motor temperature has fallen 5 K below the response temperature - For tripping due to a ground fault: no automatic RESET - For manual RESET min - For tripping due to overcurrent: (stored permanently) - For tripping by thermistor: time until the motor temperature has fallen 5 K below the response temperature - For tripping due to a ground fault: Immediately - For remote RESET min - For tripping due to overcurrent: (stored permanently) - For tripping by thermistor: time until the motor temperature has fallen 5 K below the response temperature - For tripping due to a ground fault: Immediately Features Yes, with 4 LEDs Yes, test of LEDs, electronics, auxiliary contacts and wiring of control circuit by pressing the button TEST/RESET / self-monitoring Yes, with the TEST/RESET button No Explosion protection Safe operation of motors with increased safety type of protection II () GD RB: -- RB4: On request mbient temperatures C C C Temperature inside control cabinet 60 C - Temperature inside control cabinet 70 C Repeat terminals Degree of protection acc. to IEC 6059 Touch protection acc. to IEC % % 100 On request Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC g/ms 15/11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity - Burst acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) - Surge acc. to IEC (corresponds to degree of severity ) (corresponds to degree of severity ) (corresponds to degree of severity ) kv kv kv V/m 10 Not required Not required connection in conjunction with cover (power ports), 1 (signal ports) (line to earth), 1 (line to line) 8 (air discharge), 6 (contact discharge) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference Degree of severity acc. to EN (CISPR 11) and EN 550 (CISPR ) Resistance to extreme climates air humidity % 100 Dimensions Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 000 Mounting position ny Type of mounting Stand-alone installation S00 to S: Stand-alone installation, S6 and S10/S1: stand-alone installation or mounting onto contactors 4/10

367 RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Type Overload relay: current measuring modules RB9 06 RB9 06 RB9 56 RB9 66 S00/S0 S/S S6 S10/S1 Dimensions of current measuring modules (W x H x D) mm 45 x 84 x x 94 x 7 Main circuit Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree ) V 1000 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 6 8 Rated operational voltage Ue V 1000 Type of current No Current setting ; Power loss per unit (max.) W 0.5 Short-circuit protection Protective separation between main and auxiliary conducting path acc. to IEC (pollution degree ) Conductor cross-sections of the main circuit Connection type V 10 x 119 x x 147 x for grounded networks, otherwise 600 V Screw terminals with box terminal Terminal screw -- 4 mm llen screw 5 mm llen screw Operating devices mm -- 4 mm llen screw 5 mm llen screw Prescribed tightening torque Nm Cond. cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or cond. can be connected mm mm -- With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 50, 1 max. 70), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 95, 1 max. 10), 1 ( ) mm -- With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 50, 1 max. 70), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: (1 max. 95, 1 max. 10), 1 ( ) mm -- With RT G box terminal: (max. 70), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: (max. 10), 1 ( ) WG -- With RT G box terminal: (max. 1/0), 1 (6... /0) With RT G box terminal: (max. /0), 1 ( kcmil) (number x width x thickness) mm -- With RT G box terminal: ( ), 1 ( ) With RT G box terminal: ( ), 1 ( ) Busbar connections ( ), rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) Rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) ( ), rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) Rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) ( ), rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) Rear clamping point only: 1 ( ) (/ kcmil), rear clamping point only: 1 (/ kcmil) Rear clamping point only: 1 (50 kcmil kcmil) ( ), 1 ( ) Connection type Terminal screw -- M8 5 M10 x 0 Prescribed tightening torque Nm Cond. cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or cond. can be connected Connection type mm mm WG mm ) ) kcmil 17 Straight-through transformers Diameter of opening mm ) ) / kcmil 5 4 1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 465 with conductor crosssections of 95 mm and more, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used to ensure phase spacing. ) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 464 with conductor crosssections of 40 mm and more as well as to DIN 465 with conductor cross-sections of 185 mm and more, the RT E1 terminal cover must be used for to keep the phase clearance. 4/10

368 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Type Overload relay: evaluation modules RB 8, RB 8 RB4 8 S00... S10/S1 Dimensions of evaluation modules (W x H x D) mm 45 x 111 x 95 4 uxiliary circuit Number of NO contacts -- Number of NC contacts -- Number of CO contacts -- 1 uxiliary contacts assignment - 1 NO for the signal tripped by overload - 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor - 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor or 1) - 1 NO for the signal tripped by overload - 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor - 1 NO for overload warning - 1 NC for disconnecting the contactor Rated insulation voltage Ui (pollution degree ) V 00 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kv 4 uxiliary contacts contact rating rated operational current Ie at Ue - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 50 V rated operational current Ie at Ue - 4 V - 10 V - 15 V - 50 V rated operational current Ie at Ue - 4 V - 60 V V - 15 V - 50 V Ith 5 Yes Short-circuit protection Protective separation between auxil. conducting paths acc. to IEC V 00 CS, UL, UR rated data uxiliary circuit switching capacity B00, R00 Conductor cross-sections of the auxiliary circuit Connection type Screw terminals Changeover contact: direction of rotation left, direction of rotation right Terminal screw Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected Connection type mm mm mm mm WG Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected expansion modules. mm mm mm mm WG 1 ( ), ( ) -- 1 ( ), ( ) -- ( ) Spring-type terminals ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) 4/104

369 RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Type Overload relay of evaluation modules RB 8, RB 8 RB4 8 S00... S10/S1 Control and sensor circuit as well as the analog output Rated insulation voltage Ui V 00 (pollution degree ) 1) Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 1) kv 4 Rated control supply voltage Us 1) Operating range 1) Rated power 1) Mains buffering time 1) ms 00 Thermistor motor protection (PTC thermistor detector) ) Ground-fault detection I ) - For 0. Ie < Imotor <.0 Ie - For.0 Ie < Imotor < 8.0 Ie V V W W Us min Us Us max 0.85 Us min Us Us max through IO-Link Ie Imotor ttrip ms nalog output )4) m Ie 4 m corresponds to 0 Ie 16.8 m corresponds to 1.0 Ie 0 m corresponds to 1.5 Ie 100 Conductor cross-sections for the control and sensor circuit as well as the analog output Connection type Screw terminals Terminal screw Operating devices mm.0 x 0.5 Prescribed tightening torque Nm Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or conductors can be connected mm mm mm mm WG 1 ( ), ( ) -- 1 ( ), ( ) -- ( ) 4 1) Control circuit. ) Sensor circuit. ) For the RB and RB overload relays in combination with a corresponding function expansion module. measuring transducers. In this case the analog input module must not supply current to the analog output of the RB to RB4 relay. 4/105

370 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Functions of the RB and RB evaluation modules in combination with the RB9 85 function expansion modules Evaluation modules With function expansion module RB 8-41 RB 8-4C1 RB 8-41 RB 8-4C1 Basic functions -- Inverse-time delayed protection, temperaturedependent protection, electrical remote RESET, overload warning RB9 85-C1 RB9 85-CB1 RB RB RB9 85-B1 Inverse-time delayed protection, temperaturedependent protection, internal ground-fault detection, electrical remote RESET, overload warning Inverse-time delayed protection, temperaturedependent protection, internal ground-fault detection, electrical remote RESET, groundfault signal Inverse-time delayed protection, temperaturedependent protection, electrical remote RESET, overload warning, analog output Inverse-time delayed protection, temperaturedependent protection, internal ground-fault detection, electrical remote RESET, overload warning, analog output Inverse-time delayed protection, temperaturedependent protection, internal ground-fault detection, electrical remote RESET, groundfault signal, analog output Inputs 1/ T1/T Y1/Y Power supply V C/DC Power supply V C/DC Power supply V C/DC Power supply V C/DC Power supply V C/DC Power supply V C/DC Connection for PTC sensor Connection for PTC sensor Connection for PTC sensor Connection for PTC sensor Connection for PTC sensor Connection for PTC sensor Electrical remote RESET Electrical remote RESET Electrical remote RESET Electrical remote RESET Electrical remote RESET Electrical remote RESET 4 Evaluation modules With function expansion module RB 8-41 RB 8-4C1 RB 8-41 RB 8-4C1 Outputs I ( ) / I (+) 95/96 NC 97/98 NO 05/06 NC 07/08 NO -- No Disconnection of the contactor (inverse-time delayed/temperaturedependent protection) RB9 85-C1 No Disconnection of the contactor (inverse-time delayed/temperaturedependent protection + ground fault) RB9 85-CB1 No Disconnection of the contactor (inverse-time delayed/temperaturedependent protection) RB nalog signal Disconnection of the contactor (inverse-time delayed/temperaturedependent protection) RB nalog signal Disconnection of the contactor (inverse-time delayed/temperaturedependent protection + ground fault) RB9 85-B1 nalog signal Disconnection of the contactor (inverse-time delayed/temperaturedependent protection) Overload warning Overload warning Overload warning Overload warning Switching off the contactor (ground fault) Signal ground-fault Overload warning Overload warning Overload warning Overload warning Switching off the contactor (ground fault) Signal ground-fault 4/106

371 RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Selection and ordering data RB, RB, RB4 overload relays (evaluation modules) for full motor protection for stand-alone installation, CLSS 5, 10, 0 and 0 adjustable Type RB, RB RB4 Overload protection, phase failure protection and unbalance protection Supplied from an external voltage Direct-on-line or reversing starters (wye-delta starting also possible) controllable through IO-Link uxiliary contacts V C/DC 4 V DC through IO-Link -- NO + NC Electrical remote RESET integrated 4 LEDs for operating and status displays TEST function and self-monitoring Internal ground-fault detection (with function expansion module) Screw terminals or spring-type terminals for auxiliary, control and sensor circuits Input for PTC sensor circuit nalog output (with function expansion module) vailable -- Not available 1 CO RB 8-41, RB RB 8-4C1, RB4 8-4C1 RB 8-41 RB 8-4C1 4 Version Screw terminals Order No. Evaluation modules S00... S1 Monostable RB 8-41 Bistable RB 8-41 Monostable RB /107

372 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Function expansion modules for RB and RB overload relays (evaluation modules) contactor Version For overload relays Order No. Sizes S00 to S1 For plugging into evaluation module (1 unit) S00... S1 nalog Basic 1 1) modules nalog output DC m, with overload warning RB, RB RB RB nalog Basic 1 GF modules 1)) nalog output DC m, with internal groundfault detection and overload warning RB, RB RB nalog Basic GF modules 1)) nalog output DC m, with internal groundfault detection and overload ground-fault signal RB, RB RB9 85-B1 Basic 1 GF modules ) with internal ground-fault detection and overload warning RB, RB RB9 85-C1 Basic GF modules ) with internal ground-fault detection and ground-fault signaling RB, RB RB9 85-CB1 Note: module must not supply current to the analog output of the 1) The analog signal DC 4 m up to 0 m can be used for operating rotary coil instruments or for feeding into analog inputs of programmable logic controllers. ) The following information on ground-fault protection refers to sinusoidal - With a motor current of between 0. and times the current setting Ie the unit will trip at a ground-fault current equal to 0 % of the current setting. - With a motor current of between and 8 times the current setting Ie the unit will trip at a ground-fault current equal to 15 % of the current setting. - The response delay amounts to between 0.5 s and 1 s. Operator panel for RB4 overload relays (evaluation modules) Version For overload relays Order No. 4 Operator panels for communication through IO-Link R Operator panels (set) RB4 R set comprises: Note: panel is not included in the scope of supply; please order separately. Connecting cables RB4 UF79-0B00-0 Length m (round), for connecting the evaluation module to the operator panel Enabling modules (replacement) RB4 R Interface covers RB4 R69-0B 4/108

373 RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays RB, RB, RB4 up to 60 for High-Feature applications Current measuring modules for mounting onto contactor 1) and stand-alone installation 1)) (essential accessories) Sizes S00/S0 )6) contactor ) Rating for induction motor, rated value 4) kw Current setting of the inversetime delayed overload release Short-circuit protection with fuse, type of coordination class gg 5) For overload relays Order No. S00/S RB to RB9 06-BG RB4 RB9 06-DG1 RB9 06-.G1 Sizes S/S )6) S/S RB to RB4 RB9 06-JG1 RB9 06-JG1 Size S6 1)6) RB9 56-TG Sizes S10/S1 1) S6 with busbar connection S6 with box terminals (TF68/TF69) RB to RB4 RB to RB RB to RB4 RB9 56-TH RB9 56-TG RB9 66-WH RB9 66-WH Note: supply; please order separately. 1) The current measuring modules with an Order No. ending with are designed for mounting onto contactor and stand-alone installation. For TF68/TF69 contactors, direct mounting is not possible. ) The current measuring modules with an Order No. ending with 1 are designed for stand-alone installation. ) Observe maximum rated operational current of the devices. 4) starting and rated data of the motor to be protected must be considered when selecting the units. 6) The modules with an Order No. with G in penultimate position are equipped with a straight-through transformer. 4 ccessories contactor Version For overload relays Order No. Connecting cables (essential accessory) RB S00...S For connection between evaluation module and current measuring module (only for mounting of the evaluation module directly onto the current measuring module) RB to RB4, RB9 RB9 87-B S00... S1 RB to RB4, RB9 RB9 87-D 4/109

374 Overload Relays SIRIUS RB Solid-State Overload Relays ccessories for RB, RB, RB4 ccessories for RB, RB, RB4 Overview Overload relays for High-Feature applications The following optional accessories are available for the RB to RB4 solid-state overload relays: and S10/S1 and S10/S1 relay and RB9 06 current measuring modules Selection and ordering data Version For overload relays Order No. Sealable covers For covering the setting knobs -- RB to RB4 RB RB9 84- Terminal covers for current measuring modules Box terminal blocks Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections S6 RB9 56 RT E1 S10/S1 RB9 66 RT E1 Covers for box terminals S6 RB9 56 RT E S10/S1 RB9 66 RT E Covers for screw terminals S6 RB9 56 RT E between contactor and overload relay, without box terminals (1 unit required per combination) S10/S1 RB9 66 RT E For current measuring modules, for round and ribbon cables S6 1) RB9 56 RT G S6 RB9 56 RT G S10/S1 RB9 66 RT G see note on Technical Information on page 4/1. RT G Push-in lugs -- RB to RB4 RP19 0 RP19 0 units are required per module) S00... S RB9 06 RB B RB B 4/110

375 Load Feeders and Motor Starters for Use in the Control Cabinet 5 5/ Introduction SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters 5/ General data R61, R6 Compact Starters 5/11 R61 direct-on-line starters 5/1 R6 reversing starters R64, R65 Compact Starters for IO-Link 5/1 R64 direct-on-line starters 5/14 R65 reversing starters 5/15 ccessories 5/0 dd-on modules for S-Interface 5/ Infeed systems for R6 5

376 5 Load Feeders and Motor Starters For Use in the Control Cabinet Introduction Overview R61 R6 R64 R65 R68 SIRIUS R6 compact starters Order No. relay and various functions of optional mountable accessories R61 direct-on-line starters R61 5/11 R6 reversing starters R6 5/1 R64 direct-on-line starters for IO-Link R64 5/1 R65 reversing starters for IO-Link R65 5/14 ccessories for R6 direct-on-line and reversing starters R69 5/15 dd-on modules for S-Interface R69 5/0 Infeed systems for R6 R68 5/ Page Central and compact starter solutions Our range offers you many different possibilities for simple and practical starter solutions in the control cabinet. Features common to all our load feeders, compact starters and motor starters: Like all SIRIUS devices they are optimally coordinated available for soft starting in the control cabinet. 5/

377 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data Overview R6 fuseless compact starters and infeed system for R6 R6 reversing starters Integrated functionality The SIRIUS R6 compact starters are a generation of innovative protection circuit breaker, contactor and solid-state overload relay. In addition, various functions of optional mountable already integrated in the SIRIUS compact starter. pplication started. The compact starters are not suitable for the protection of singlephase C or DC loads. pprovals according to IEC, UL and CS standards have been issued for the compact starters. voltage ranges, the equipment variance is greatly reduced compared to conventional load feeders. SIRIUS compact starter achieves a very high level of operational considerable additional outlay. This sets it apart from devices Safe disconnection starters are designed as mirror contacts. It is thus possible to use the devices for safe disconnection, e.g. emergency-stops, up Communications integration through S-Interface To enable communications integration through S-Interface there is an S-Interface add-on module available in several -versions for mounting instead of the control circuit terminals on the SIRIUS compact starter. The design of the S-Interface add-on module permits a group Communications integration using IO-Link Up to 4 compact starters in IO-Link version (reversing and direct- linked to the IO-Link master through a standardized IO-Link connection. The 4SI SIRIUS electronic modules are used distributed I/O system. The IO-Link connection enables a high density of information in the local range. The diagnostics data of the process collected by the R6 compact starter, e.g. short-circuit, end of service life, limit position etc., are not only indicated on the compact starter itself but also transmitted to the higher-level control system through IO-Link. installed in the control cabinet door, it is easy to control the R6 starter needing to be connected. compact starter is very easily replaced simply by pulling it out order to replace a compact starter. Consistent solution from the infeed to the motor feeder offered as a user-friendly possibility of feeding in summation additional intermediate terminals. The SIRIUS compact starters and the infeed system for R6 are Spring-type terminals The terminals are indicated in the corresponding tables starters and matching infeed. Types of infeed for the R6 fuseless compact starters 8US busbar adapters 5 5/

378 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data 5 SIRIUS R6 compact starters The SIRIUS R6 compact starters are universal motor feeders the thermal, dynamic and electrical loads from short-circuit currents up to I q combine the functions of a motor protection circuit breaker, a contactor and a solid-state overload relay in one enclosure. simultaneous actuation of both directions of rotation. by moving the handle into the OFF position; disconnection by means of the control contacts is not enough. R6 fuseless load feeders are supplied for 5 different current setting ranges. The R61 and R6 have control Current setting range t 400 V C for induction motors Standard output P Rated control supply voltage for R61, R6 compact starters R64, R65 compact starters for IO-Link Operating conditions The SIRIUS R6 compact starters are suitable for use in any no severe operating conditions (such as dust, caustic vapors, installation in dusty and damp locations. The SIRIUS compact starters are generally designed to degree of protection IP0. The permissible ambient temperature during operation is -0 to +60 C. The rated short-circuit current I CS according to Overload tripping times The overload tripping time can be set on the device to normal an overload, resetting is possible by either local manual reset or auto reset after minutes cooling time. Diagnostics options - Connection to the control voltage - Position of the main contacts - Tripping due to overload - Tripping due to short-circuit - Tripping due to malfunction (end of service life reached These states can also be evaluated in the higher-level control system: respective communication interface Four complement variants for R6 compact starters basic version including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals S-i add-on module: module is plugged on instead module: compact starters for IO-Link; the main circuit terminals depend on the use of the infeed system. lready integrated in the R61/R6 and connectable addition to the control supply voltage are the signaling contacts the position of the main contacts. Unlike the R61 direct-on- vailable for the R61 and R64 direct-on-line starters is a Unlike the direct-on-line starter, the R6 reversing starter has contact. 5/4

379 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data in the basic unit. Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - 4th 5th 6th 8th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 15th 16th SIRIUS R6 compact starters R 6 Version (direct-on-line starter = 1, reversing starter =, direct-on-line starter for IO-Link = 4, reversing starter for IO-Link = 5, infeed system = 8, accessories = 9) Details of accessories Connection method (0 = without terminals, 1 = screw terminals, = spring-type terminals) Setting range Rated control supply voltage Terminals complement variant Special versions Example R B 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. Compact design saves space in the control cabinet High plant availability through integrated functionalities such of service life Greater productivity through automatic device reset in case of overload and differentiated detection of overload and shortcircuit prior to start-up thanks to optional control kits Speedy replacement of devices thanks to removable terminals control circuit system for R6 Direct connection of the motor feeder cable to the SIRIUS infeed system for R6 thanks to integrated PE bar Connecting and looping through incoming feeders up to a Integration in Totally Integrated utomation thanks to the optional connection to S-Interface or IO-Link The SIRIUS R6 compact starters create the basis for highavailability and future-proof machine concepts. 5 5/5

380 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data Type R61 R6 R64 R65 Size S0 Mechanics and environment Mounting dimensions (WxHxD) mm mm 5 Depth from standard mounting rail mm 160 Permissible ambient temperature C C C Weight kg Permissible mounting positions Shock resistance a g Vibratory load f = Hz; d =15 mm; f = Hz; a = 0 m/s ;10 cycles Degree of protection IP0 Installation altitude m Relative air humidity % Pollution degree Device standard Maximum rated operational voltage U e Rated current I e and setting range for overload release Permissible operational current of the compact starter side-by-side on a vertical standard mounting rail or in the infeed system for R C +60 C % % Rated frequency Hz 50/60 Rated insulation voltage U i Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp 6 Trip class (CLSS) 10/0 Overload function 1:4 Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity k 5 I CS at 50/60 Hz 400 V C Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity I CSIT at 50/60 Hz 400/690 V C in IT systems k 1.5 Power loss P of all main current paths dependent on the rated current I n Max. switching frequency C-41 C-4 C-44 1/h 1/h 1/h No-load switching frequency 1/h , depending on the IO-Link communication time Touch protection Finger-safe Isolating features of the compact starter Yes: Isolation is assured only by moving the handle into the OFF position. Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch characteristics of the compact starter and accessories Yes /6

381 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data Type R61 R6 R64 R65 Size S0 Protective separation Control circuit to auxiliary circuit uxiliary circuit to auxiliary circuit Up to 400 Up to 50 Up to 400 Up to 50 Main circuit to auxiliary circuit Up to 400 EMC interference immunity Corresponds to degree of severity Conductor-related interference Conductor-related interference - Conductor - Ground - Conductor - Conductor - Conductor - Ground - Conductor - Conductor BURST acc. to SURGE acc. to uxiliary switches - Position of the main contacts - Overload/short-circuit and malfunction signal - Position of the main contacts Surge suppressors Electromagnetic operating mechanisms Control voltage C/DC C/DC Frequency t C Hz Operating range U s U s No-load switching frequency 1/h 600 Line protection t 10 k.5 t 50 k 4 Shock resistance Normal switching duty Making capacity Breaking capacity Switching capacity dependent on rated current Endurance in operating cycles Up to 1 Up to g g 5 15 I n I n t I e I n DC environment, additional overvoltage protection should be provided in the control circuit. 5 5/7

382 5 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data Type R B., R B. R61 0-.EB., R6 50-.EB. =, B, C or D Rated operational current 1 Rated operational current Rated control supply voltage V 4 C 4 DC 4 C 4 DC Inrush peak current Hold current Closed Operating times, typical ms ms <160 <5 Type R E., R E. R61 0-.EE., R6 50-.EE. =, B, C or D Rated operational current 1 Rated operational current Rated control supply voltage V 4 C 70 C 4 DC 70 DC 4 C 70 C 4 DC 70 DC Inrush peak current Hold current Closed Operating times, typical ms ms <160 <5 <140 <50 Type R P., R P. R61 0-.EP., R6 50-.EP. =, B, C or D Rated operational current 1 Rated operational current Rated control supply voltage V 110 C 40 C 110 DC 40 DC 110 C 40 C 110 DC 40 DC Inrush peak current Hold current Closed Operating times, typical ms ms <160 <50 <140 <80 Type R @B4., R65 =, B, C or D Rated operational current 1 R EB4., R EB4. Rated operational current Rated control supply voltage V 4 DC 4 DC Inrush peak current 0.5 Hold current Closed.4 Operating times, typical 1) ms ms <140 <5 <140 <5 <160 <5 <150 <50 <140 <40 <140 <160 <0 <150 <0 <160 <40 <140 <0 <140 <40 <140 <60 <140 <0 <150 <0 <150 <40 <140 <40 <140 <60 5/8

383 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data Type R61 R6 R64 R65 Size S0 Control circuit Rated operational voltage Switching capacity C-15 U e U e U e U e DC-1 U e U e U e U e C-15 U e U e U e U e DC-1 U e U e U e U e U e C-15 U e U e DC-1 U e U e External auxiliary switch blocks, internal auxiliary switches Endurance in operating cycles C-15, 0 V DC-1, 4 V DC-1, 110 V DC-1, 0 V Contact stability Operating cycles Short-circuit protection I K 1.1 k I K < 400 Fuse links operational class gg /9

384 5 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters General data Type R61 R6 R64 R65 Size S0 Signaling switches Endurance in operating cycles Contact stability Operating cycles Short-circuit protection I K 1.1 k Fuse links operational class gg 6 I K < 400 Overload (short-circuit current I K Fuse links operational class gg 6 4 5/10

385 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters R61, R6 compact starters R61 direct-on-line starters Selection and ordering data Direct-on-line start R61 0-1CB R61 0-EB Standard output P Setting range for electronic overload release For use with the infeed system for R6 and with the S-i add-on module or as a replacement device, R R61 0-0B R61 0-0C R61 0-0D R61 0-0E 0 Screw terminals Spring-type terminals For standard mounting rail or screw mounting, including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals R R R61 0-1B R61 0-B R61 0-1C R61 0-C R61 0-1D R61 0-D R61 0-1E R61 0-E For use in the infeed system for R6, R R R61 0-1B R61 0-B R61 0-1C R61 0-C R61 0-1D R61 0-D R61 0-1E R61 0-E For standard mounting rail or screw mounting when using the S-i add-on module R R R61 0-1B 4 R61 0-B R61 0-1C 4 R61 0-C R61 0-1D 4 R61 0-D R61 0-1E 4 R61 0-E 4 Order No. supplements for rated control supply voltage B B E E P P 5 motor. 5/11

386 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters R61, R6 compact starters R6 reversing starters Selection and ordering data Reversing duty R6 50-1CP R6 50-DP Standard output P Setting range for electronic overload release For use with the infeed system for R6 and with the S-i add-on module or as a replacement device, R R6 50-0B R6 50-0C R6 50-0D R6 50-0E 0 Screw terminals Spring-type terminals 5 For standard mounting rail or screw mounting, including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals R R R6 50-1B R6 50-B R6 50-1C R6 50-C R6 50-1D R6 50-D R6 50-1E R6 50-E For use in the infeed system for R6, R R R6 50-1B R6 50-B R6 50-1C R6 50-C R6 50-1D R6 50-D R6 50-1E R6 50-E For standard mounting rail or screw mounting when using the S-i add-on module R R R6 50-1B 4 R6 50-B R6 50-1C 4 R6 50-C R6 50-1D 4 R6 50-D R6 50-1E 4 R6 50-E 4 Order No. supplements for rated control supply voltage B B E E P P motor. 5/1

387 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters R64, R65 compact starters for IO-Link R64 direct-on-line starters Selection and ordering data Direct-on-line start Rated control supply voltage 4 V DC R64 Standard output P Setting range for electronic overload release Screw terminals Spring-type terminals For standard mounting rail or screw mounting, including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals R B4 R64 00-B R BB4 R64 00-BB R CB4 R64 00-CB R DB4 R64 00-DB R EB4 R64 00-EB4 For use in the infeed system for R6, R B4 R64 00-B R BB4 R64 00-BB R CB4 R64 00-CB R DB4 R64 00-DB R EB4 R64 00-EB4 motor. 5 5/1

388 5 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters R64, R65 compact starters for IO-Link R65 reversing starters Selection and ordering data Reversing duty Rated control supply voltage 4 V DC R65. Standard output P Setting range for electronic overload release Screw terminals Spring-type terminals For standard mounting rail or screw mounting, including 1 pair of main circuit terminals and 1 pair of control circuit terminals R B4 R65 00-B R BB4 R65 00-BB R CB4 R65 00-CB R DB4 R65 00-DB R EB4 R65 00-EB4 For use in the infeed system for R6, R B4 R65 00-B R BB4 R65 00-BB R CB4 R65 00-CB R DB4 R65 00-DB R EB4 R65 00-EB4 motor. 5/14

389 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters ccessories Overview ccessories for SIRIUS R6 compact starters compact starters: S-i add-on module: s R6, page 5/0 Control kit: aid for manually closing the main contacts in order short-circuit protection lugs terminals terminals on the line side to spring-type terminals on the connection using -phase busbars on the infeed side. The motors are then connected directly by the quick and reliably contacting spring-type connection method. ccessories for infeed using three-phase busbar systems The three-phase busbars can be used as an easy, time-saving and clearly arranged means of feeding SIRIUS R6 compact starters and S0 can also be integrated. 6 is possible by clamping the tags of an additional busbar motor protection circuit breaker. circuit breakers are supplied by appropriate feeder terminals. of connected SIRIUS R6 compact starters or motor protection circuit breakers. Busbar adapters for 60 mm systems clearance in order to save space and to reduce infeed times and from 1 to 0 mm. The busbars can be 4 to 5 mm or 10 mm thick. summation current of 60. The reversing starter version requires a device holder along side the busbar adapter for lateral mounting. The compact starters are snapped onto the adapter and connected on the line side. This prepared unit is then plugged directly onto the busbar system, and is thus connected both mechanically and electrically at the same time. ccessories for operation with closed control cabinet doors Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for standard and emergency-stop applications are available for operating the ccessories for SIRIUS R6 compact starters in IO-Link version R65 compact starters: dditional connection cables for side-by-side mounting of up to 4 compact starters Operator panel for on-site control and diagnostics of up to 4 compact starters coupled to each other 5 5/15

390 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters ccessories Selection and ordering data ccessories specially for R6 compact starters Control kits For mechanical actuation of the compact starter R Direct-on-line starters require 1 set, reversing starters sets. R Screw terminals uxiliary switch blocks for compact starters R R R Main circuit terminals R Control circuit terminals R69 0-1B R69 0-1C Spring-type terminals uxiliary switch blocks for compact starters R R69 1- R69 1- Main circuit terminals R Control circuit terminals R69 0-B R69 0-C 5/16

391 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters ccessories ccessories specially for R6 compact starters Main circuit terminals mixed connection method 1 set comprises: R69 0- ccessories especially for R64, R65 compact starters with IO-Link compact starters - 8 mm - 00 mm - 8 mm - 00 mm Operator panels R69-0 R69-0B R R69-0C R Enabling modules R Blanking covers R69 6-0B Connection cables (round) for connecting the operator panel R pole, 000 mm concepts. Link version. 5 5/17

392 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters ccessories protection circuit breakers that can be connected Three-phase busbars for infeed with R6 Rated current I n mm Size For motor protection circuit breakers 45 6 S00, S0 RV B 45 6 S00. S0 RV BB S00, S0 RV CB S00, S0 RV DB not possible on account of the different modular spacings and the different series can be jointly clamped; no connecting piece has to be used. Connecting pieces for three-phase busbars For motor protection circuit breakers Covers for connection tags of the three-phase busbars mm Size 45 S00 RV DB Touch protection for empty positions S00, S0 RV B Conductor cross-section Solid or stranded Finely stranded solid or stranded Tightening torque Size Three-phase feeder terminals for three-phase busbars For compact starters and motor protection circuit breakers Connection from top S0 RV19 5-5B 5 Connection from below Input: 4; Output:....5 S00, S0 RV B requirement into account. 5/18

393 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters ccessories Busbar adapters for 60 mm system Thickness: mm or 10 mm 8US1 11-1NS10 Device holders for lateral mounting along side the busbar adapter for 60 mm system Required in addition to the busbar adapter for mounting a reversing starter 8US US Color of handle Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for operating the compact starter with closed control cabinet doors The door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms consist of a knob, a coupling driver and mechanisms are designed to degree of protection IP65. The door interlocking prevents accidental Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms Black 10 RV9 6-0B EMERGENCY-STOP door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms 10 RV9 6-0C Tools for opening spring-type terminals by hand Screwdrivers titanium gray/black, partially insulated Spring-type terminals R Documentation System manuals SIRIUS Compact Starters and ccessories English R /19

394 5 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters dd-on modules for S-Interface Overview Interface: Standard version For local control The S-i add-on modules can be combined only in connection C/DC. S-i add-on module for on-site controller utomatic mode the local terminals on the S-i add-on module. If the + connections are connected simultaneously to both local inputs, On-site control disconnection of the compact starter. Operation through S-i be assured and the S-i control supply voltage must no longer be applied. S-i add-on module for on-site control Resetting to utomatic mode Simultaneous application of a 1 signal at the local inputs. The S-i add-on module for on-site control 5/0

395 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters dd-on modules for S-Interface Selection and ordering data S-i add-on modules ccessories for S-i add-on modules Standard version With two local inputs For safe disconnection through local safety relays, With two free external inputs Replaces the digital standard inputs With one free external input and one free external output With two free external outputs Only for direct-on-line starters, For local control Control of the compact starter optionally using ddressing units -1 addressing unit R R69 70-B R69 70-C R69 70-D R69 70-E R69 70-F RK19 04-B01 5 5/1

396 5 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters Infeed systems for R6 Overview The infeed system for R6 compact starters enables far less The infeed system provides the possibility of completely be connected at the same time. s the result of the removable terminals in the main circuit, compact starters can be integrated In addition, the integrated PE bar means it is optionally possible additional intermediate terminals. The infeed system for R6 compact starters is designed for summation currents up to on the feeder terminal block. The infeed system can be mounted on a standard mounting rail Infeed system for R6 compact starters 5/

397 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters Infeed systems for R6 Infeed (5/5 mm type connection (5/5 mm Three-socket expansion modules connection. module. live. Optional possibilities: PE connection on motor outgoing side Two-socket expansion modules If only instead of additional sockets are required, then the Expansion plug possible. PE infeeds This module enables a PE cable to be connected. type connection (5 mm PE expansion plug bars to be connected. PE pick-off type connection (6/10 mm Connecting wedges modules. End covers 45 mm adapters for SIRIUS RV1 motor protection circuit breakers plugged into the infeed system. Terminal blocks Using the terminal block the phases can be fed out of the components can also be integrated in the system. fter the end cover is pulled out, the terminal block can be Expansion plug for SIRIUS RV19 infeed systems module. It connects the infeed system for R6 compact starters Maximum rated operational current components of the infeed system for R6: Component Maximum rated operational current Proposal for upstream short-circuit protection devices infeed system for R6 compact starters: Conductor cross-section Inscriptions Proposal for upstream shortcircuit protection device Short-circuit protection for infeed block (5 mm²/5 mm²)with screw connection I I t RV J10 Short-circuit protection for infeed block (50/70 mm²)with screw connection I RV M10 Short-circuit protection for infeed blockwith springtype connection 4 I I t RV10 1-4D10 6 I = 1.5 k, I t RV10 1-4E10 10 I = 15 k, I t RV10 1-4H10 16/5 I I t RV J10 Short-circuit protection for terminal block 1.5 I 5SY....5 I 1) 4 I 6 I = 1.5 k 5 5/

398 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters Infeed systems for R6 Selection and ordering data Three-phase infeeds and expansion modules Infeeds with screw connection 5/5 mm left Infeed with screw connection at line side -socket expansion module with screw or spring-type connection on the outgoing side and integrated PE bar Expansion module 1 reversing starter Screw terminals R68 1-8B R68 1-8B R68 1-8C R68 1-8C R68 1-8B Infeeds with screw connection 50/70 mm left Infeed with screw connection at line side -socket expansion module with screw or spring-type connection on the outgoing side and integrated PE bar Expansion module 1 reversing starter Screw terminals R68 1-8B R68 1-8C R68 1-8C Infeeds with screw connection 5/5 mm left or right Up to 6 Spring-type terminals R68 0-5C R68 0-5C 5 5/4

399 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters Infeed systems for R6 Expansion modules Two-socket expansion modules With screw or spring-type connection and integrated PE bar Screw terminals R68-0B R68-0B Spring-type terminals R68-0C R68-0C R68-0B Three-socket expansion modules With screw or spring-type connectionand integrated PE bar Screw terminals R68-0B Spring-type terminals R68-0C R68-0C 5 5/5

400 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters Infeed systems for R6 ccessories ccessories for infeed systems for R6 PE infeeds 5/5 mm Screw terminals R B R B Spring-type terminals R C R C PE pick-offs 6/10 mm Screw terminals R B Spring-type terminals R68 70-C Expansion plugs PE expansion plugs R E Expansion plugs R B 5 Expansion plugs for SIRIUS RV19 infeed system R /6

401 For Use in the Control Cabinet SIRIUS R6 Compact Starters Infeed systems for R6 ccessories for infeed systems for R6 45 mm adapters Screw terminals R B Terminal blocks Spring-type terminals RV D Tools for opening spring-type terminals by hand Screwdrivers Spring-type terminals titanium gray/black, partially insulated R /7

402 5 For Use in the Control Cabinet Notes 5/8

403 Monitoring and Control Devices 6 6/ Introduction SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 6/4 General data 6/11 Basic units 6/1 Expansion modules 6/1 Failsafe expansion modules 6/14 ccessories SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays 6/18 General data 6/19 With relay enabling circuits Timing Relays 6/4 General data 6/5 SIRIUS RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5 mm 6/0 ccessories SIRIUS RR, UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and dditional Measurements SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors 6/1 General data 6/4 Current monitoring SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation 6/9 General data 6/40 Line monitoring 6/45 Voltage monitoring 6/48 Current monitoring 6/51 Power factor and active current monitoring Residual current monitoring 6/54 - Residual-current monitoring relays 6/56 - Summation current transformers Insulation monitoring 6/57 - For ungrounded C networks 6/59 - For ungrounded DC networks Level monitoring 6/61 - Level monitoring relays 6/64 - Level monitoring sensors 6/65 ccessories SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays 6/66 General data 6/69 Relays, analogically adjustable for 1 sensor 6/7 Relays, digitally adjustable for 1 sensor 6/74 Relays, digitally adjustable for up to sensors 6/76 ccessories SIRIUS RN1 Thermistor Motor Protection 6/77 For PTC sensors 6

404 6 Monitoring and Control Devices Introduction Overview Type SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Page SIMOCODE UF motor management and control devices Basic units 6/11 Current measuring modules 6/11 Current/voltage measuring modules 6/11 Decoupling modules 6/11 Operator panels 6/11 Operator panels with display 6/11 Expansion modules 6/1 Failsafe expansion modules 6/1 Current transformers 6/56 SIMOCODE ES 007 6/16 SIMOCODE pro function block library for SIMTIC PCS 7 6/17 Type RP15 Timing relays Enclosure: Monofunction Multifunction Monovoltage Combination voltage Wide voltage range pplication: 6/

405 Monitoring and Control Devices Introduction Type UG45 1., UG46 1. Monitoring relays UG46. RR, UG46 1, UG46 UG46 41 UG46 4 UG0 81, UG0 8 UG45 01 UG46 51 RS10, RS0 Line monitoring 6/40 Voltage monitoring 6/45 Current monitoring 6/48 Power factor and active 6/51 current monitoring Residual current 6/54 monitoring Insulation monitoring 6/57 Level monitoring 6/61 Temperature monitoring relays Temperature monitoring 6/66 Thermistor motor protection Thermistor motor protection 6/77 RN1 Page 6 6/

406 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data Overview SIMOCODE pro V with current/voltage measuring module, failsafe expansion module and operator panel with display for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage performance to be made for startup, operation and maintenance of a system. When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchboard, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level automation system and the motor feeder and includes the following: Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection which is independent of the automation system Integrated control functions instead of hardware for the motor control Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data Open communication through PROFIBUS DP, the standard for Safety relay function for the failsafe disconnection of motors up to SIL (IEC 61508/6061) or PL e with Category 4 (ISO ) SIMOCODE ES is the software package for SIMOCODE pro Two series SIMOCODE pro is structured into two functionally tiered series: SIMOCODE pro C, as a compact system for direct-on-line starters and reversing starters or the actuation of a circuit breaker SIMOCODE pro V, as a variable system with all control functions and with the possibility of expanding the inputs, outputs and functions of the system at will using expansion modules Expansion possibilities SIMOCODE pro C, Basic Unit 1 SIMOCODE pro V, Basic Unit 1) Operator panels Operator panels with display Current measuring modules Current/voltage measuring modules Decoupling modules Expansion modules: ) vailable Not available 1) When an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module is used, more restrictions on the number of expansion modules connectable per basic unit must be observed, see page 6/10. ) The failsafe digital module can be used instead of one of the two digital modules. Per feeder each system always comprises one basic unit and one separate current measuring module. The two modules are connected together electrically through the system interface with a connection cable and can be mounted mechanically connected as a unit (one behind the other) or separately (side by side). The motor current to be monitored is decisive only for the choice of the current measuring module. n operator panel for mounting in the control cabinet door is optionally connectable through a second system interface on the basic unit. Both the current measuring module and the operator panel are electrically supplied by the basic unit through the connection cable. More inputs, outputs and functions can be added to basic unit (SIMOCODE pro V) by means of optional expansion modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs already existing on the basic unit. With the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital modules it is also possible to integrate the failsafe disconnection of motors in the SIMOCODE pro V motor management system. ll modules are connected by connection cables. The connection cables are available in various lengths. The maximum distance between the modules (e.g. between the basic unit and the current measuring module) must not exceed.5m. The total length of all the connection cables in a single system must not be more than m. Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th SIMOCODE pro motor management system U F 7 Type of unit/module Functional version of the unit/module Connection type of the current transformer Voltage version Example U F Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 6/4

407 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data Integrating the whole motor feeder into the process control between the motor feeder and PLC saves resources in the automation system and ensures full bus system fails diagnostics data in the feeder and process control system increases plant availability as well as maintenance and servicefriendliness The high degree of modularity allows users to perfectly feeder The SIMOCODE pro system offers functionally graded and space-saving solutions for each customer application The replacement of the control circuit hardware with integrated control functions decreases the number of limits stock keeping costs and potential wiring errors The use of solid-state full motor protection permits better tripping characteristic and reliable tripping even after years of service Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection for rated motor currents up to 80 SIMOCODE pro offers comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by means of a combination of different, multi-step and delayable protection and monitoring functions: Inverse-time delayed solid-state overload protection (CLSS 5 to 40) Thermistor motor protection Phase failure/unbalance protection Stall protection Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current Voltage and power monitoring Monitoring of the power factor (motor idling/load shedding) Ground-fault monitoring Temperature monitoring, e.g. over PT100/PT1000 Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number of starts etc. Recording of measuring curves SIMOCODE pro can record measuring curves and therefore is able, for example, to present the progression of motor current during motor start-up. Flexible motor control implemented with integrated control functions (instead of comprehensive hardware interlocks) integrated into SIMOCODE pro, including all necessary logic operations and interlocks: Overload relays Direct-on-line and reversing starters Wye/delta starters (also with direction reversal) Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switch); also with direction reversal Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings (also with direction reversal) Positioner actuation Solenoid valve actuation ctuation of a circuit breaker Soft starter actuation (also with direction reversal) can be freely assigned to the inputs and outputs of the device (including PROFIBUS DP). evaluation, etc.) and with the help of standard functions (power failure monitoring, emergency start, external faults, etc.), without additional auxiliary relays being necessary in the control circuit. SIMOCODE pro makes a lot of additional hardware and wiring in the control circuit unnecessary which results in a high level of circuit diagrams. Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data SIMOCODE pro makes different operational, service and diagnostics data available and helps to detect potential faults in time and to prevent them by means of preventative measures. In Operating data main circuit ll phase currents ll phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages ctive power, apparent power and power factor Time to trip Motor temperature Remaining cooling time etc. Service data Motor operating hours Motor stop times Number of motor starts Number of overload trips Interval for compulsory testing of the enabling circuits Consumed power Internal comments stored in the device etc. Diagnostics data Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages Internal device fault logging with time stamp Time stamping of freely selectable status, alarm or fault messages etc. Easy operation and diagnostics Operator panels The operator panel is used to control the motor feeder and can replace all conventional pushbuttons and indicator lights to save space. It makes SIMOCODE pro or the feeder directly operable in the control cabinet. It features all the status LEDs available on Operator panels with display s an alternative to the UF7 0 standard operator panel for SIMOCODE pro V there is also an operator panel with display: the UF7 1 is thus able in addition to indicate current measured values, operational and diagnostics data or status information of the motor feeder at the control cabinet. The pushbuttons of the operator panel can be used to control the motor while at the same time the display indicates current measured values, status information, fault messages or the device-internal fault protocol. Using the display settings each user can select for himself how the measured values are presented as standard and how the displayed unit is converted (e.g. C -> F). 6 6/5

408 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data Communication interface (SUB-D or terminal connection) and can therefore replace all individual wiring (including marshalling racks), which level automation system, with a single -wire cable. In conjunction with a failsafe controller (F-CPU), the DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital module also enables failsafe disconnection through the same PROFIBUS with the PROFIsafe SIMOCODE pro supports among other things: Baud rates up to 1 Mbit/s utomatic baud rate detection Communication with up to masters Time stamp with high timing precision (SIMTIC S7) Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1) DPV1 communication after the Y-Link Failsafe communication through PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe in conjunction with the DM-F PROFIsafe (F-DO) failsafe digital module etc. For SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices with communication function see page 6/11 onwards. For accessories see page 6/14 onwards. For accessories for PROFIBUS DP see Catalog IK PI Industrial Communication. utonomous operation n essential feature of SIMOCODE pro is independent execution of all protection and control functions even if communication system fails, the full functionality of the feeder is ensured or a mechanisms can be performed (e.g. the direction of rotation can be reversed). SIMOCODE pro designed for mixed operation be used simultaneously without any problems and without any additional outlay in a low-voltage system. SIMOCODE pro C is fully upward-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. The same can be transferred without any problems. Both systems have the same removable terminals and the same terminal designations. 6 SIMOCODE pro combines all essential functions, including safety functions, through PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe for the motor feeder 6/6

409 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data pplication SIMOCODE pro is often used for automated processes where plant downtimes are very expensive (e.g. steel or cement industry) and where it is important to prevent plant downtimes through detailed operational, service and diagnostics data or to SIMOCODE pro is modular and space-saving and suited especially for operation in motor control centers in the process industry and for power plant technology. pplications Protection and control of motors EEx e/d according to TEX directive 94/9/EC see With heavy starting (paper, cement, metal and water industries) In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, raw material processing industry, power plants) Safety technology for SIMOCODE pro The safe disconnection of motors in the process industry is becoming increasingly important as the result of new and revised With the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe expansion modules it is easy to integrate functions for failsafe disconnection in the SIMOCODE pro V motor management system while retaining service-proven concepts. The strict separation of safety functions and operational functions proves particularly Seamless integration in the motor management system leads to greater transparency for diagnostics and during operation of the system. Suitable components for this purpose are the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe expansion modules, depending on the The DM-F Local failsafe digital module for when direct assignment between a failsafe hardware disconnect signal The DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital module for when a failsafe controller (F-CPU) creates the signal for the disconnection and transmits it failsafe through PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe to the motor management system General data Permissible ambient temperature C ; UF7 1: C ; UF7 1: Degree of protection (acc. to IEC 6059) IP00 IP54 IP0 Shock resistance (sine pulse) g/ms 15/11 Mounting position ny Frequency 50/60 ±5 % Immunity to electromagnetic interference (acc. to IEC ) Corresponds to degree of severity kv kv (power ports) 1 (signal ports) V 10 kv kv kv kv (line to earth) 1 (line to line) 8 (air discharge) 6 (contact discharge); UF7 1: 4 (contact discharge) V/m 10 Immunity to electromagnetic interference (acc. to IEC ) EN 55011/ EN 550 (CISPR 11/ CISPR ) (corresponds to degree of severity ) Protective separation (acc. to IEC ) ll circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely separated from each other according to IEC , i.e. they are designed with doubled creepage paths and clearances. In this context, compliance with the instructions in the test report 6 6/7

410 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data Basic units Control circuit Rated control supply voltage U s (acc. to EN 6111-) 4 V DC Operating range x U s U s Power consumption Basic Unit 7 V/5 W 10 V/7 W Rated insulation voltage U i V 00 (at pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 4 Relay outputs 6 C-15 DC-1 Inputs (binary) Thermistor motor protection (binary PTC) k k k 5 W 7 W monostable relay outputs I k < 500 ) 6 /4 V C /4 V DC 6 /10 V C 0.55 /60 V DC /0 V C 0.5 /15 V DC 4 inputs supplied internally by the device electronics (with 4 V DC) and connected to a common potential Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules Main circuit UF7 1.0 UF7 1.1 UF7 1. Current setting I e Rated insulation voltage U i V 690; UF7 10 and UF7 104: 1000 (at pollution degree ) Rated operational voltage U e V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6; UF7 10 and UF7 104: 8 Rated frequency 50/60 Type of current Three-phase current Short-circuit ccuracy of current measurement (in the range of 1 x minimum current setting I u to 8 x max. current setting I o ) % ± Typical voltage measuring ranges U L1 L ) U L1 ) ccuracy U L in the range V) Notes on voltage measurement power supply system and for single-phase systems V V % % % (only the phase voltages are available in SIMOCODE pro as measured values) ± (typical) ±5 (typical) ±5 (typical) Digital modules Control circuit Rated insulation voltage U i V 00 (at pollution degree ) Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 4 Relay outputs 6 C-15 DC-1 In these networks the current/voltage measuring module can be used only with an upstream decoupling module on the system interface. In the feeder lines from the main circuit for voltage measurement of SIMOCODE pro it may be necessary to provide additional line protection! monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the version) I k < 500 ) 6 /4 V C /4 V DC 6 /10 V C 0.55 /60 V DC /0 V C 0.5 /15 V DC Inputs (binary) 4 inputs, electrically isolated, supplied externally with 4 V DC or V C/DC depending on the version, connected to a common potential 6 6/8

411 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data Ground-fault modules Control circuit Connectable UL summation current transformer with rated fault currents I N Ground fault I N Ground fault I N 0./0.5/1 No tripping Tripping Response delay (conversion time) ms , additionally delayable Temperature modules Sensor circuit Typical sensor circuits Open-circuit/short-circuit detection C m m 1 (typical) 0. (typical) PT100/PT Measuring accuracy at 0 C ambient temperature (T0) K < ± Deviation due to ambient temperature (in % of measuring range) % 0.05 per K deviation from T0 Conversion time ms 500 Connection type Two- or three-wire connection nalog modules Control circuit Inputs Output Connection type Electrical separation of inputs/output to the device electronics Detection possible m m % ms bit m % ms bit KTY KTY (passive) 0/ ± With measuring range m 1 0/ V DC ± Yes Two-wire connection No 6 6/9

412 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 General data 6 More information with display and/or a decoupling module If you want to use an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module in the SIMOCODE pro V system, then the number of connectable expansion modules must be observed. of the expansion modules for the various combinations. The DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe expansion modules behave in this connection like digital modules for standard applications. Use of an operator panel with display Digital modules Digital modules nalog modules Temperature modules Ground-fault modules Only operator panel with display for basic unit (4 V DC or V C/DC) Max. 4 expansion modules can be used Operator panel with display and current/voltage measurement with basic unit ( V C/DC) Max. expansion modules can be used or: vailable Not available Use of a decoupling module (voltage measurement in insulated networks) Digital modules Digital modules nalog modules Temperature modules Ground-fault modules Basic units (4 V DC) 1) 1) Basic unit ( V C/DC) 1) 1) vailable Not available 1) No bistable relay outputs and no more than 5 of 7 relay outputs active simultaneously (> s). Use of a decoupling module (voltage measurement in insulated networks) in combination with an operator panel with display Digital modules Digital modules nalog modules Temperature modules Ground-fault modules Basic units (4 V DC) Basic unit ( V C/DC) ) 1) 1) ) vailable Not available 1) No bistable relay outputs and no more than 5 of 7 relay outputs active simultaneously (> s). ) No bistable relay outputs and no more than of 5 relay outputs active simultaneously (> s). ) nalog module output is not used. Protective separation ll circuits in SIMOCODE pro are safely separated from each other according to IEC , nnex N. That is, they are designed with double creepages and clearances. In the event of a fault, therefore, no parasitic voltages can be formed in neighboring circuits. The instructions of Test Report No. 668 must be complied with. Types of protection EEx e and EEx d The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection overload protection of explosion-protected motors to the type of protection: EN EEx e increased safety e.g. according to EN or EN When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 4 V DC control voltage, electrical separation must be ensured using a battery or a safety transformer according to EN EC prototype Test report: BVS PP EG. Selection data for type-tested assemblies/load feeders E86060-T or in the SIMOCODE pro System Manual. System manual The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes the motor management system and its functions in detail. It provides maintenance. typical example of a reversing starter application system. In addition to help on how to identify and rectify faults in the event of a malfunction, the manual also contains special information for servicing and maintenance. For selection of UF system manual is consulted. detailed description of the DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe expansion modules is provided in the system manual SIMOCODE pro Safety Failsafe Digital Modules, which can be downloaded from the Internet. Internet More information is available on the Internet at: 6/10

413 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 Basic units Selection and ordering data Version Current setting Width Screw terminals SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro C, Basic Unit 1 PROFIBUS DP interface, 1 Mbit/s, RS 4854 I/ O freely assignable, input for thermistor connection, monostable relay outputs,rated control supply voltage U s : mm Order No. UF B00-0 UF U00-0 UF SIMOCODE pro V, Basic Unit PROFIBUS DP interface, 1 Mbit/s, RS 4854 I/ O freely assignable, input for thermistor connection, monostable relay outputs, can be expanded by expansion modules,rated control supply voltage U s : UF B00-0 UF U00-0 UF UF UF Current measuring modules Current/voltage measuring modules for SIMOCODE pro V connection with a decoupling module Decoupling modules For connecting upstream from a current/voltage measuring module on the system interface when using voltage detection in insulated, high-resistance or asymmetrically grounded systems and in single-phase systems UF UF UF UF UF7 10-1B00-0 UF B00-0 UF UF UF UF UF7 11-1B00-0 UF B00-0 UF UF Operator panels Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, for plugging into basic unit, 10 LEDs for status indication and user-assignable buttons for controlling the motor UF UF Operator panels with display for SIMOCODE pro V 1) Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, for plugging into basic unit, 7 LEDs for status indication and user-assignable buttons for controlling the motor, multilingual display, e.g. for indication of measured values, status information or fault messages UF UF ) Only possible with basic unit, product version E0 and higher (from 1/006). 6 6/11

414 6 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 Expansion modules Selection and ordering data Version Screw terminals Expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V UF7 00-1U00-0 With SIMOCODE pro V, it is possible to expand the type and number of inputs and outputs in steps. Each expansion module has two system interfaces on the front. Through the one system interface the expansion module is connected to the system interface of the SIMOCODE pro V using a connection cable; through the second system interface, further expansion modules or the operator panel can be connected. The power supply for the expansion modules is provided by the connection cable through Basic Unit. Note: Please order connection cable separately, see page 6/14. Order No. Digital modules Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional binary inputs and relay outputs to basic unit. The input circuits of the digital modules are supplied from an external power supply. 4 binary inputs and relay outputs, up to digital modules can be connected per basic unit Relay outputs Input voltage Monostable 4 V DC UF7 00-1B V C/DC UF7 00-1U00-0 Bistable 4 V DC UF7 10-1B V C/DC UF7 10-1U00-0 nalog modules Basic unit can be optionally expanded with analog inputs and outputs (0/ m) by means of the analog module. inputs (passive) for input and 1 output for output of 0/ m signals, max. 1 analog module can be connected per Basic Unit. UF UF UF Ground-fault modules Instead of ground-fault monitoring using the current measuring modules or current/ voltage measuring modules, it may be necessary, especially in high-impedance grounded networks, to implement ground-fault monitoring for smaller ground fault currents using a summation current transformer. 1 input for connecting a summation current transformer UL, up to 1 ground-fault module can be connected per Basic Unit Note: For corresponding summation current transformers for rated fault currents of 0., 0.5 or 1 see page 6/56. Temperature modules Independently of the thermistor motor protection of the basic units, up to analog temperature sensors can be evaluated using a temperature module. Sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY8/KTY84 or NTC inputs for connecting up to analog temperature sensors, up to 1 temperature module can be connected per Basic Unit UF UF UF /1

415 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 Failsafe expansion modules Selection and ordering data Version Screw terminals Failsafe expansion modules for SIMOCODE pro V Thanks to the failsafe expansion modules, SIMOCODE pro V can be expanded with the function of a safety relay for the failsafe disconnection of motors. maximum of 1 failsafe digital module can be connected; it can be used instead of a digital module. The failsafe expansion modules are equipped likewise with two system interfaces at the front for making the connection to other system components. Unlike other expansion modules, power is supplied to the modules through a separate terminal connection. Note: Please order connection cable separately, see page 6/14. DM-F Local failsafe digital modules For failsafe disconnection using a hardware signal relay enabling circuits, joint switching; relay outputs, common potential disconnected failsafe; inputs for sensor circuit, start signal, cascading and feedback circuit, safety function adjustable using DIP switches,rated control supply voltage U s : Order No. UF7 0-1B00-0 UF7 0-1U00-0 UF7 0-1B00-0 DM-F PROFIsafe failsafe digital modules For failsafe disconnection using PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe relay enabling circuits, joint switching; relay outputs, common potential disconnected failsafe; 1 input for feedback circuit; binary standard inputs, rated control supply voltage U s : UF7 0-1B00-0 UF7 0-1U00-0 UF7 0-1B /1

416 6 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 ccessories Selection and ordering data Version Order No. Connection cables (essential accessory) UF Connection cables In different lengths for connecting basic unit, current measuring module, current/ voltage measuring module, operator panel or expansion modules or decoupling module: Important: Only suitable for connecting basic unit to its expansion modules or for same height! UF UF UF UF UF7 9-0B00-0 UF7 97-0B00-0 UF7 9-0B00-0 PC cables and adapters For PC/PG communication with SIMOCODE pro Through the system interface, for connecting to the serial interface of the PC/PG USB/serial adapters To connect an RS PC cable to the USB port of a PC, we recommend using modular safety system RK, soft starter RW44, ET 00S/ECOFST/ET 00pro motor starter, S-i UF UF UF Memory modules The memory module enables the complete parameter assignment of a system to be saved and transferred to a new system, e.g. when a device is replaced, without the need for additional aids or detailed knowledge of the the system interface UF UF Interface covers For system interface UF UF ddressing plugs For assigning the PROFIBUS addresses without using a PC or programming device On SIMOCODE pro through the system interface UF UF Door adapters For external connection of the system interface Outside, for example, a control cabinet UF UF dapters for operator panel The adapter enables the smaller UF7 0 operator panel from SIMOCODE pro to be used in a front panel cutout in which previously, e.g. after a change of system, a larger UF5 operator panel from SIMOCODE-DP had been used; degree of protection IP54 UF UF /14

417 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 ccessories Version Order No. Labeling strips UF Push-in lugs RB B Terminal covers RT E1 RT E Box terminal blocks Note: software SIRIUS Label Designer on a laser printer. Note the software version! Download from UF UF UF RB B RP19 0 Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections Covers for box terminals Covers for screw terminals Between contactor and current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module for direct mounting RT E1 RT E1 RT E RT E RT E RT E For round and ribbon cables, can be used for UF7 1.-1B00-0 RT G, can be used for UF7 1.-1B00-0 RT G, can be used for UF B00-0 RT G RT G Bus termination modules System manuals With separate supply voltage for terminating the bus following the last unit on the bus line.supply voltage: SIMOCODE pro With token fee, languages: UF K00 UF KB00 UF UF UF UF Note: The system manual SIMOCODE pro Safety Failsafe Digital Modules is available on the Internet at 6 6/15

418 6 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 ccessories Version Order No. SIMOCODE ES 007 Basic Floating license for one user E-SW, software and documentation on CD, languages (German/English/French), communication through system interface ZS1 1-4CC10-0Y5 ZS1 1-4CE10-0YB5 ZS1 1-4CC10-0Y5 SIMOCODE ES 007 Standard Floating license for one user E-SW, software and documentation on CD, languages (German/English/French), communication through system interface, integratedgraphics editor Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES 004 and later Floating license for one user,e-sw, software and documentation on CD, license key on USB stick, Class, languages (German/English/French), communication through the system interface Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 007 Basic Floating license for one user,e-sw, license key on USB stick, Class, languages (German/English/French), communication through the system interface Software Update Service For 1 year with automatic extension, assuming the current software version is in use, E-SW, software and documentation on CD, communication through the system interface ZS1 1-5CC10-0Y5 ZS1 1-5CE10-0YB5 ZS1 1-5CC10-0YE5 ZS1 1-5CC10-0YD5 ZS1 1-5CC10-0YL5 SIMOCODE ES 007 Premium Floating license for one user E-SW, software and documentation on CD, languages (German/English/French), communication through PROFIBUS or system interface, integrated graphics editor, STEP7 Object Manager Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES 004 and later Floating license for one user,e-sw, software and documentation on CD, license key on USB stick, Class, languages (German/English/French), communication through PROFIBUS or the system interface Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 007 Standard Floating license for one user,e-sw, license key on USB stick, Class, languages (German/English/French), communication through the PROFIBUS or the system interface Software Update Service For 1 year with automatic extension, assuming the current software version is in use, E-SW, software and documentation on CD, communication through PROFIBUS or the system interface ZS1 1-6CC10-0Y5 ZS1 1-6CE10-0YB5 ZS1 1-6CC10-0YE5 ZS1 1-6CC10-0YD5 ZS1 1-6CC10-0YL5 Please order PC cable separately, see page 6/14. 6/16

419 SIMOCODE UF Motor Management and Control Devices SIMOCODE pro UF7 ccessories Version Order No. SIMOCODE pro function block library for SIMTIC PCS 7 UF Scope of supply: S modules and faceplates for integrating SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system Engineering software for one engineering station (single license) including runtime software for execution of the S module in an automation system (single license), German/English/French, Type of delivery: CD incl. electronic documentation Runtime software For execution of the S module in an automation system (single license), Type of delivery: license without software and documentation Upgrade for the PCS 7 function block library SIMOCODE pro, V6.0 or V6.1 on Version SIMOCODE pro V7.0 for integrating SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system, for PCS 7 Version V7.0 (single license), German/English/French, Type of delivery: CD incl. electronic documentation UF UF UF UF UF UF /17

420 SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays General data Overview SIRIUS safety relays are the key modules of a consistent and costeffective safety chain. Be it EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection, protective door monitoring or the protection of presses or be implemented to optimum effect in terms of engineering and price. SIRIUS safety relays provide numerous safety-related functions: Monitoring the safety functions of sensors Monitoring the sensor leads Monitoring the correct operation of the safety relay Monitoring actuators for stoppage Safety-oriented disconnection when dangers arise SIRIUS TK8 safety relay Depending on the version of the device, SIRIUS safety relays and achieve the highest Safety Integrity Level (SIL ) acc. to IEC TK8 safety relays With relay enabling circuits With electronic enabling circuits With contactor relay enabling circuits With special functions Basic units Basic units t v Expansion units Two-hand control units Basic units Basic units t v Multifunction units Basic units Expansion units Expansion units t v Standstill monitors Overspeed Monitors TK8 0 TK8 6 TK8 0 TK8 4 TK8 40 TK8 4 TK8 45 TK8 50 TK8 56 TK8 57 TK TK TK8 1 TK8 7 TK8 41 TK8 51 TK8 TK8 8 TK8 5 TK8 TK8 5 TK8 4 TK8 5 TK8 6 General Can be used for all safety applications thanks to compliance ISO or SIL according to IEC 61508) Suitable for use all over the world through compliance with all Compact, service-proven SIRIUS design creates more space in the control cabinet changes easy Removable terminals for greater plant availability safety technology Sensor cable up to 000 m long enables use in large-scale plants Relay outputs contacts Higher currents can be switched with relay contacts Solid-state outputs Wear-free Suitable for operation in fast switching applications Insensitive to vibrations and dirt Good electrical endurance Microprocessor systems Flexible use thanks to many different integrated functions High functional reliability based on extensive monitoring functions Operated by the machine control lso connection of non-contact sensors (light arrays, light barriers etc.) pplication 6 SIRIUS safety relays are used mainly in autonomous safety applications which are not connected to a safety-oriented bus system. Their function here is to evaluate the sensors and the monitor the sensors, actuators and safety-oriented functions of the safety relay. 6/18

421 SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays With relay enabling circuits Overview SIRIUS TK8. safety relay Safety relays with with relay enabling circuits safety with SIRIUS safety relays with relay enabling circuits not only save a great deal of space thanks to their compact design but also offer extra safety in the form of positively driven pairs of make and break contacts. If one of the contacts becomes welded, the other will disconnect the circuit. positively driven break contact (NC) then performs the fault detection of the faulty make contact (NO). For two-hand operation consoles in press control systems the TK8 4 press control device serves as a safe evaluation unit. TK8 0 expansion units are available to increase the number of enabling circuits. General Compact design Floating safe outputs TK8 4 safety relays also suitable for press and punch controls Can be used up to an ambient temperature of max. 70 C TK8 6 safety relays Connection of all standard sensor types Many functions available in a single unit Status displays Expanded diagnostics options pprovals (EN , IEC 61508, UL/CS) Signaling of disconnect faults in the actuator circuit Floating outputs Units with wide voltage range Saving of the sensor status in the event of voltage failure TK8 6 safety relays evaluation unit for typical safety chains (detection, evaluation, disconnection). DIP switches on the front can be used to set many different functions. The TK8 6 is therefore universally applicable. Safety sensors (e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons) are connected at the input side while contactors or valves for output side. The TK8 6 performs the monitoring of the sensor and actuator functions as well as the safe disconnection of the outputs (enabling circuits). TK8 6 with DIP switch OFF Schematic DIP switch No. Without crossover monitoring ON 1 Switching mat operation NC/NO evaluation: NC/NC contact evaluation x 1-channel 1 x -channel Debounce time for sensor inputs 50 ms 4 Debounce time for sensor inputs» 10 ms utostart sensor input 5 Monitored start sensor input Cascading input autostart 6 Cascading input monitored start With start test 7 Without start test utomatic start after mains failure (not permitted in connection with a start test) 8 Without automatic start after mains failure 6 6/19

422 6 SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays With relay enabling circuits Selection and ordering data Type Basic units TK8 0 TK8 1 TK8 TK8 TK8 4 TK8 5 Sensors ) (Reed contacts) Safety mats Start Cascading input 4 V DC Key-operated switch NO NO NO NO NO NO Enabling circuit, solid-state Signaling outputs 1 NC 1 NC NC Standards EN , EN ISO 1100, ISO , IEC EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC Compliance to standards TÜV, UL, CS BG, SUV, UL, CS Category according to EN max 4 (according to ISO ) EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC BG, SUV, UL, CS EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC BG, SUV, UL, CS EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC BG, SUV, UL, CS EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC BG, SUV, UL, CS ) 4 4 ) 4 SIL level max. according to IEC Performance level PL according to ISO e c e e c e Probability of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH d ) 9.8 x /h 1.1 x /h 1. x /h 1. x /h 8.7 x /h 1.5 x /h Rated control supply voltage vailable Not available 1) The ON button is not monitored. necessary in the sensor circuit (e.g. protected laying). 6/0

423 SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays With relay enabling circuits Type Basic units Two-hand control devices Expansion units ) TK8 6 TK8 7 TK8 8 TK8 4 TK8 0 4 V DC Wide voltage range 4 V DC t v Wide voltage range t v t v t v Sensors switch (Reed contacts) Safety mats Start Cascading input 4 V DC Key-operated switch 4 NO 4 NO NO NO NO NO NO+ NC 4 NO NO NO NO NO Enabling circuit, solid-state Signaling outputs 1 NC 1 NO + 1 NC NC 1 NO + NC 1 NC 1 NC Standards EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC Compliance to standards TÜV, UL, CS TÜV, UL, CS TÜV, UL, CS TÜV, UL, CS BG, SUV, UL, CS Category according to EN max SIL level max.according toiec Performance level PLaccording to ISO EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC BG, SUV, UL, CS EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC 61508, EN 574 BG, SUV, UL, CS, TÜV EN , EN ISO 1100, EN 954-1, IEC BG, SUV, UL, CS, TÜV ) 4 1) 4 s basic unit ) ) s basic unit e e e e e ) e ) s basic unit Probability of a dangerous failure per hour (PFH d ) 7.8 x /h 7.8 x /h 7.8 x /h 7.8 x /h.7 x /h.7 x /h 1.4 x /h 1. x /h Rated control supply voltage vailable Not available 1) Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts, otherwise Category. ) For expansion of Siemens safety products. ) Only possible for instantaneous enabling contacts, otherwise SIL or Performance Level PL d. 6 6/1

424 SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays With relay enabling circuits TK8 1-1CB0 TK8 5-1BB40 TK8 6-BB40 TK8 7-1BB41 Rated control supply voltage U s Start OFF-delay t v Screw terminals V s Order No. Basic units TK8 0 uto/monitored uto/monitored uto/monitored TK8 0-1CB0 TK8 0-1J0 TK8 0-1L0 TK8 1 uto TK8 1-1CB0 TK8 uto TK8-1CB0 TK8 Monitored TK8-1CB0 TK8 4 TK8 5 TK8 6 With time-delay enabling circuits uto uto uto uto uto/monitored uto/monitored uto/monitored uto/monitored uto/monitored uto/monitored TK8 4-1CB0 TK8 4-1BB40 TK8 4-1J0 TK8 4-1L0 TK8 5-1BB40 TK8 5-1B0 TK8 5-1J0 TK8 5-1L0 TK8 6-1BB40 TK8 6-1CW0 TK8 6 t v uto/monitored uto/monitored TK8 6-1BB41 TK8 6-1CW1 uto/monitored uto/monitored TK8 6-1BB4 TK8 6-1CW uto/monitored uto/monitored TK8 6-1BB44 TK8 6-1CW4 TK8 7 t v Monitored Monitored Monitored Monitored TK8 7-1BB41 TK8 7-1B1 TK8 7-1J1 TK8 7-1L1 Monitored Monitored Monitored Monitored TK8 7-1BB40 TK8 7-1B0 TK8 7-1J0 TK8 7-1L0 TK8 8 t v uto uto uto uto TK8 8-1BB41 TK8 8-1B1 TK8 8-1J1 TK8 8-1L1 uto uto uto uto TK8 8-1BB40 TK8 8-1B0 TK8 8-1J0 TK8 8-1L0 6 6/

425 SIRIUS TK8 Safety Relays With relay enabling circuits TK8 1-1CB0 Rated control supply voltage U s Start OFF-delay t v Screw terminals V s Order No. Two-hand control devices TK8 4 Expansion units TK8 0 TK8 4-1BB40 TK8 4-1B0 TK8 4-1J0 TK8 4-1L0 TK8 0-1CB0 TK8 0-1J0 TK8 0-1L0 6 6/

426 6 Timing Relays General data Overview RP15 timing diagram Function Timing diagram RP15 timing relay and RP19 01 label set 1 CO contact Contact closed Contact open RP RP letter ON-delay RP15 1. RP15 5 RP15. RP15 40 RP15 7. OFF-delay With auxiliary voltage B 1) ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage (t t on t off ) C 1) Flashing, starting with interval (pulse/interval 1:1) D Passing make contact E Passing break contact with auxiliary voltage F 1) Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage (pulse generation at the output does not depend on dditive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage G 1) H 1) NO contacts Star-delta function 1) Note on function with start contact: new control signal at terminal B, does not apply to G and H, which are not retriggerable. Function is possible 6/4

427 Timing Relays SIRIUS RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5 mm Overview ccessories SIRIUS RP15 timing relays Standards The timing relays comply with: EN Environmental conditions EN EN and EN Electromagnetic compatibility EN control circuit devices Sealable cover Label set for marking the multifunction relay Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 1th 14th 0 8 K Timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5mm R P 1 5 Functions/time setting ranges Connection type Contacts Rated control supply voltage Example R P W 0 8 K Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. pplication Timing relays are used in control, starting, and protective circuits for all switching operations involving time delays. They guarantee a high level of functionality and a high repeat accuracy of timer settings. Enclosure version ll timing relays are suitable for snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rails according to EN or for screw mounting. 6 6/5

428 6 Timing Relays SIRIUS RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5 mm Type RP15 05 RP15 1 RP15 Rated insulation voltage (Pollution degree ) V C 00/500* Overvoltage category III acc. to DIN VDE 0110 Permissible ambient temperature during operation C -5 to +60 during storage C -40 to +80 Mechanical endurance operating cycles 0 x 10 6 Rated operational currents Ie DC-1 at 4 V DC-1 at 110 V DC-1 at 0 V Control voltage tolerance Operating frequency at rated current Ie, 0 V C Setting accuracy referred to upper limit of scale Repeat accuracy Recovery time Minimum ON period Degree of protection cover terminals Rated power solid solid or stranded WG conductors terminal screw V /h 500 ms ms W V RP15 11 RP15 1 RP15 5 RP1574 RP x U s s for 4VDC < ±5% < ±1% IP 40 IP 0 Rated control fuse 4 Permissible mounting position any Conductor cross-sections main / auxiliary conductors mm mm WG Nm Electrical endurance operating Ic Uninterrupted thermal current * Insulation voltage is 00V for executions other than having operating voltage less than 440V 6 1x(0.5-4), x(0.5-.5) 1x(0.5-.5), x( ) x(0-14) M 0.8 to 1. 1 x Dimensions RP15 1 C/O contact without auxiliary voltage and star delta timer 1 and C/O contacts, with auxiliary voltage 1) Push-in lug (for screw mounting on a base plate) for RP15 6/6

429 Timing Relays SIRIUS RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5 mm RP15 internal circuit diagrams (terminal designation to DIN 46199, Part 5) RP , RP15 1., RP RP , RP15.-. RP RP ON-delay OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage Flashing RP RP RP RP Passing make contact Passing break contact with auxiliary voltage Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage dditive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage RP W0 RP15 5-1B RP BW0 RP M0 Multifunction relay (same functions as RP ) ON-delay, RP15 5-1B also for /60 V C/DC ON-delay Star-delta timing relay RP15 74, RP15 76 Star-delta timing relay 6 6/7

430 6 Timing Relays SIRIUS RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5 mm RP15-1P0 Version Time setting range t adjustable by rotary switch to Rated control supply voltage U s DC V V RP15. timing relays, OFF-delay, with auxiliary voltage, 1 time setting range With LED and 1 CO contact The same potential must be applied to terminals and B s 4/ / s 4/ / RP15 7. timing relays, star-delta function, dead interval 50 ms, 1 time setting range 1 NO contact instantaneous and 1 NO contact delayed (common contact root terminal 17) Screw terminals Order No. RP15 1-1Q0-8K RP15 1-1P0-8K RP15-1Q0-8K RP15-1P0-8K s / RP NM0-8K s 4/ / / RP NQ0-8K RP NP0-8K RP NM0-8K RP NP0-8K 6/8

431 Timing Relays SIRIUS RP15 timing relays in industrial enclosure,.5 mm Selection and ordering data Solid-state timing relays for general use in control systems and mechanical engineering with: 1 or CO contacts Single or selectable time setting ranges Switch position indication and voltage indication by LED RP P0 8K RP15 5-1BW0 8K RP W0 8K Version Time setting range t Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals adjustable by rotary switch to DC Order No. V V RP15 05 timing relays, multifunction, 15 time setting ranges The functions can be adjusted by means of rotary switches. Insert labels can be used to adjust different functions of the RP15 05 timing relay clearly and unmistakably. The corresponding labels can be ordered as an accessory. The same potential must be applied to terminals. and B. For functions see RP19 01 label set, page 6/0. With LED and 1 CO contact, 8 functions s s s s min s min min min h min h h h h 1) ) ) RP W0-8K RP15 1. timing relays, ON-delay, 1 time setting range With LED and1 CO contact s 4/ / s 4/ / RP15 5 timing relays, ON-delay, 15 time setting ranges With LED and 1 CO contact s s s s min s min min min h min h h h h 1) 4/ / RP Q0-8K RP P0-8K RP15 1-1Q0-8K RP15 1-1P0-8K RP15 5-1Q0-8K RP15 5-1P0-8K CO contacts ) ) RP15 5-1BW0-8K 1) With switch position no timing. For test purposes (ON/OFF function) on site. Relay is constantly on when activated, or relay remains constantly off when activated. Depending on which function is set. ) Operating range 0.7 to 1.1 x U s. ) Operating range 0.8 to 1.1 x U s. 6 6/9

432 6 Timing Relays ccessories Selection and ordering data ccessories for RP15 Version Function letter Use Order No. Label sets for RP15 and RP0 RP Push-in lugs for RP15 RP19 0 ccessory for RP The label set offers the possibility of labeling timing relays with the set function in English and German. 1 label set (1 unit) with 8 functions ON-delay For devices with OFF-delay with auxiliary voltage B 1 CO contact and RP ON-delay and OFF-delay with auxiliary C RW0 voltage Flashing, starting with interval D Passing make contact E Passing break contact with auxiliary F voltage Pulse-forming with auxiliary voltage G dditive ON-delay with auxiliary voltage H Push-in lugs For RP15 with 1 or CO contacts RP K RP19 0-8K 6/0

433 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors General data Overview Features RR1 RR General data Sizes S00, S0 S00, S0 technical characteristics of the other devices in the SIRIUS modular system (contactors, soft starters, etc.) widths of 45 mm (S00 and S0) Current range S00: S0: S00: S0: Permissible ambient temperature C C Monitoring functions Current overshoot Current undershoot (Two-phase) (Two-phase) (Three-phase) (Three-phase) pparent current monitoring (Selectable) ctive current monitoring (Selectable) Range monitoring Phase failure, open-circuit (Two-phase) (Two-phase) (Three-phase) (Three-phase) Phase sequence monitoring (Selectable) Internal ground-fault detection (residual current monitoring) (Selectable) Blocking current monitoring (Selectable) against excessive temperature rises due to overload gate valves other maintenance-relevant phenomena heaters operation range through the patented combination of power factor and apparent current monitoring with a singe device through immediate disconnection carrying capacity wrong direction of rotation short-circuits or ground faults due to moisture, condensed water, damage to the insulation material, etc. operation through immediate disconnection electronic shear pin vailable Not available 6 6/1

434 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors General data Features RR1 RR Features RESET function supply voltage off and on (remote RESET) ON-delay time s s current Tripping delay time s s near the threshold values Operating and indicating elements LEDs and rotary potentiometers Displays and buttons Integrated contacts 1 CO contact 1 CO, 1 semiconductor output Design of load feeders Short-circuit strength up to 100 k at 690 V (in conjunction with the corresponding fuses or the corresponding motor starter protector) Electrical and mechanical matching to RT contactors Spring-type connection for main circuit and auxiliary circuits More features Suitable for single- and three-phase loads irregularity personnel in the event of short-circuits due to insulation faults or faulty switching operations mounting (Optional) (Optional) parallel infeed at the contactor or looping the current through the three phase connections Wide setting ranges Wide voltage supply range (Optional) (Optional) vailable 6/

435 Possible combinations of RR monitoring relays with RT contactors Monitoring Relays Current range Contactors RT0 1 RT0 S00 S0 Type /4/5.5/7.5 kw 5.5/7.5/11/15/18.5 kw RR With stand-alone installation support RR With stand-alone installation support RR With stand-alone installation support RR With stand-alone installation support vailable Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors General data Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th 0 Monitoring relays R R SIRIUS nd generation Type of setting Type of monitoring relay Size Connection methods Number and type of outputs Signal type of the supply voltage Example R R Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 6 6/

436 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors Current monitoring Overview SIRIUS RR 4 and RR1 4 current monitoring relays The SIRIUS RR current monitoring relays are suitable for the load monitoring of motors or other loads. In two or three phases they monitor the rms value of C currents for overshooting or undershooting of set threshold values. Whereas apparent current monitoring is used above all in active current monitoring option can be used to observe and The RR current monitoring relays can be integrated directly in the feeder by mounting onto the RT contactor; separate overload relay, terminal brackets for stand-alone installation are available for separate standard rail mounting. Versions Basic versions The basic versions with two-phase apparent current monitoring, a CO contact output and analog adjustability provide a high level of monitoring reliability especially in the rated and overload range. Standard versions The standard versions monitor the current in three phases with selectable active current monitoring. They have additional diagnostics options such as residual current These devices have an additional independent semiconductor output, an actual value indicator, and are digitally adjustable. Both versions are available optionally with screw terminals or Directly mountable onto RT contactors, i.e. no additional wiring outlay in the main circuit Optimally coordinated with the technical characteristics of the RT contactors Versions with wide voltage supply range Variably adjustable to overvoltage, undervoltage or range monitoring Display of CTUL value and status messages ll versions with removable control current terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals Simple determination of the threshold values through direct reference to actually measured values for setpoint loading Range monitoring and selectable active current measurement In addition to current monitoring it is also possible to monitor current and motor blocking. pplication Monitoring of current overshoot and undershoot Monitoring of broken conductors Monitoring of no-load operation and load shedding, e.g. in the event of a torn V-belt or no-load operation of a pump system Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads such as heaters such as compressors or cranes Monitoring of high-resistance short-circuits, e.g. due to damaged insulation or dampness 6/4

437 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors Current monitoring Function diagrams of RR basic variant, analogically adjustable Closed-circuit principle upon application of the control supply voltage Current overshoot Range monitoring Current undershoot 6 6/5

438 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors Current monitoring Function diagrams of RR 4.-.F.0 standard version, digitally adjustable With the closed-circuit principle selected upon application of the control supply voltage Current overshoot Range monitoring Current undershoot with residual current monitoring 6/6

439 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors Current monitoring Selection and ordering data SIRIUS RR current monitoring relays For load monitoring of motors or other loads Multi-phase monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent Starting and tripping delay can be adjusted separately Tripping delay 0 to 0 s uto or manual RESET RR1 41-1W0 RR1 4-1W0 RR 41-1FW0 RR 4-1FW0 RR RR 41-F0 Measuring range Hysteresis Power supply U s Screw terminals Spring-type terminals Basic versions V Order No. Order No. nalogically adjustable, closed-circuit principle, 1 CO, -phase current monitoring, apparent current monitoring, start-up delay s S % of threshold value 4 C/DC C/DC RR RR1 41-1W0 RR RR1 41-W0 S % of threshold value 4 C/DC C/DC RR RR1 4-1W0 RR1 4-0 RR1 4-W0 Standard versions Digitally adjustable, LCD, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, 1 CO, 1 semiconductor output, -phase current monitoring, blocking current monitoring, reclose delay time min, start-up delay s, separate settings for warning and alarm thresholds S C/DC C/DC S C/DC C/DC RR 41-1F0 RR 41-1FW0 RR 4-1F0 RR 4-1FW0 RR 41-F0 RR 41-FW0 RR 4-F0 RR 4-FW0 6 6/7

440 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS RR Monitoring Relays for Mounting onto RT Contactors Line monitoring ccessories Use Version Order No. Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation 1) For RR For separate mounting of the overload relays or monitoring relays; screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 5 standard mounting rail Screw terminals S00 RU S0 RU RU Spring-type terminals S00 RU9 16-C01 S0 RU9 6-C01 RU9 6-C01 6/8

441 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation General data Overview Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th Monitoring relays U G Generation Type of setting Functions Connection methods Contacts Control supply voltage Signal type of the supply voltage Special version Example U G N 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. General data Type UG Dimensions (W x H x D) - Screw terminals - Spring-type terminals mm mm.5 x 8 x 91.5 x 84 x 91 - Screw terminals - Spring-type terminals mm mm.5 x 9 x 91.5 x 94 x 91 - Screw terminals - Spring-type terminals mm mm.5 x 10 x 91.5 x 10 x 91 Permissible ambient temperature C Connection type Screw terminals mm mm WG Nm 1 x ( )/ x ( ) 1 x ( )/ x ( ) x ( ) /9

442 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Line monitoring Overview Can be used without auxiliary voltage in any network from 160 to 600 V C worldwide thanks to wide voltage range Variably adjustable to overvoltage, undervoltage or range monitoring Width.5 mm Permanent display of CTUL value and network fault type on the digital versions utomatic correction of the direction of rotation by distinguishing between power system faults and wrong phase ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals pplication SIRIUS UG46 15 monitoring relay Solid-state line monitoring relays provide maximum protection for mobile machines and plants or for unstable networks. before far greater damage ensues. phase failure with and without N conductor monitoring, phase asymetry, undervoltage or overvoltage. Phase asymetry is evaluated as the difference between the greatest and the smallest phase voltage relative to the greatest phase voltage. Undervoltage or overvoltage exists when at least one phase voltage deviates by 0 % from the set rated system voltage or the directly set limit values are overshot or undershot. The rms value of the voltage is measured. With the UG46 17 or UG46 18 relay, a wrong direction of rotation can also be corrected automatically. e.g. air conditioning compressors, refrigerating containers, building site compressors and cranes. Function Phase failure Phase asymmetry Undervoltage Overvoltage pplication voltage corresponding overheating power overvoltage UG45 11 monitoring relays for operation. The device has an internal power supply and works terminals L1-L-L is correct, the output relay picks up after the wrong, the output relay remains in its rest position. Note: When one phase fails, connected loads (motor windings, lamps, transformers, coils, etc.) create a feedback voltage at the terminal of the failed phase due to the network coupling. Because the UG45 11 relays are not resistant to voltage feedback, such a phase failure is not detected. Should this be required, then the UG45 1 monitoring relay must be used. 6/40

443 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Line monitoring UG45 1 monitoring relays The UG45 1 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase unbalance of 10 %. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V and feedback through the load of up to 90 %. The device has an internal power supply and works using the mains voltage is switched on, the green LED is lit. If the phase the output relay remains in its rest position. If a phase fails, the red LED is permanently lit and the output relay drops. Note: The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the current relay status. The UG45 1 monitoring relay is suitable for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz. Phase failure UG45 1 monitoring relays The UG45 1 line monitoring relay monitors three-phase asymetry and undervoltage of 0 %. The device has an internal power supply and works using the closed-circuit principle. The hysteresis is 5 %. The integrated response delay time is adjustable from 0 to 0 s and responds to undervoltage. If the direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. When the mains voltage is terminals L1-L-L is correct, the output relay picks up. If the relay remains in its rest position. If a phase fails, the red LED is permanently lit and the output relay drops. Note: The red LED is a fault diagnostic indicator and does not show the current relay status. The UG45 1 monitoring relay is suitable for line frequencies of 50/60 Hz. Phase failure and undervoltage 6 6/41

444 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Line monitoring UG46 14 monitoring relays The UG46 14 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage range three-phase networks with regard to phase asymetry from 5 hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 0 V. In addition the device has a response delay and ON-delay from 0 to 0 s in each case. The integrated response delay time responds to phase asymetry and undervoltage. If the direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V and feedback through the load of up to 80%. The UG46 14 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. With the closed-circuit principle selected UG46 15/UG46 16 monitoring relays The UG46 15/UG46 16 line monitoring relay has a wide voltage range and an internal power supply. The device is buttons. The UG46 15 device monitors three-phase networks with regard to phase failure, undervoltage, overvoltage and neutral conductor as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 0 V. In addition the device has two separately adjustable delay times for overvoltage and undervoltage from 0 to 0 s in each case. If the direction is incorrect, the device switches off immediately. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. The UG46 15/UG46 16 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. With the closed-circuit principle selected Phase failure Phase failure Undervoltage Undervoltage Unbalance Overvoltage 6/4

445 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Line monitoring UG46 17/UG46 18 monitoring relays The UG46 17/UG46 18 line monitoring relay has an internal power supply and can automatically correct a wrong direction of rotation. Thanks to a special measuring method, a phase failure is reliably detected in spite of the wide voltage range from 160 to 690 V C and feedback through the load of up to 80 %. The three buttons. The UG46 17 line monitoring relay monitors failure, phase unbalance, undervoltage and overvoltage. The UG46 18 monitoring relay monitors the neutral conductor as well. The hysteresis is adjustable from 1 to 0 V. In addition the device has delay times from 0 to 0 s in each case for overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure and phase unbalance. The UG46 17/UG46 18 monitoring relay can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. The one changeover contact is used for warning or disconnection in the event of power system faults (voltage, unbalance), the other responds only to a wrong phase is thus possible to change the direction automatically. Undervoltage Overvoltage With the closed-circuit principle selected Phase failure Unbalance Type UG UG45 1, UG UG46 18 General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III acc. to EN V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage kv 6 Control circuit Load capacity of the output relay I th 5 Rated operational current I e at Minimum contact load at 17 V DC m 5 Electrical endurance C-15 Million 0.1 operating cycles Mechanical endurance Million operating cycles 10 Circuit diagrams UG , UG UG B, UG45 1-.B, UG45 1, UG46 14, UG46 15, UG46 17 UG46 16, UG Note: It is not necessary to protect the measuring circuit for device protection. The protective device for line protection depends on the crosssection used. 6 6/4

446 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Line monitoring Selection and ordering data UG P0 UG CR0 UG CR0 UG CR0 UG CR0 UG45 11-BP0 UG45 1-BR0 Hysteresis Undervoltage detection Monitoring of phase sequence Overvoltage detection ON-delay Tripping delay Version of auxiliary contacts Rated control supply voltage U s 1) Screw terminals s s CO V Order No. uto-reset C UG N0 UG BN C UG P0 UG BP C UG Q0 UG BQ0 Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure and phase unbalance uto-reset, closed-circuit principle, unbalance threshold 10 % C UG45 1-1R0 UG45 1-1BR0 Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure, unbalance and undervoltage 5 % of set value C UG45 1-1BR0 Digitally adjustable, auto or manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, unbalance threshold 0 or % djustable V C UG BR0 Monitoring of phase sequence, phase failure, overvoltage and undervoltage Digitally adjustable, uto-reset or manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle djustable V ) ) C UG CR0 Monitoring of phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure, overvoltage and undervoltage Digitally adjustable, uto-reset or manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle djustable V ) ) C against N UG CR0 utomatic correction of the direction of rotation in case of wrong phase sequence, phase failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage Digitally adjustable, auto or manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, unbalance threshold 0 or % djustable V ) C UG CR0 utomatic correction of the direction of rotation in case of wrong phase sequence, phase and N conductor failure, phase unbalance, overvoltage and undervoltage Digitally adjustable, auto or manual RESET, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle, unbalance threshold 0 or % djustable V Function available Function not available ) C against N 1) bsolute limit values. ) 1 CO contact each and 1 tripping delay time each for U min and U max. For accessories, see page 6/65. UG CR0 6 6/44

447 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Voltage monitoring Overview Versions with wide voltage supply range Variably adjustable to overvoltage, undervoltage or range monitoring Width.5 mm Display of CTUL value and status messages ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals SIRIUS UG46 1 monitoring relay The relays monitor single-phase C voltages (rms value) and DC voltages against the set threshold value for overshoot and undershoot. The devices differ with regard to their power supply (internal or external). pplication Protection of a plant against destruction due to overvoltage Protection against overloaded control supply voltages, particularly with battery power Threshold switch for analog signals from 0.1 to 10 V UG46 monitoring relays The UG46 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power supply and performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring buttons. The operating and measuring range extends from 17 to 75 V C/DC. The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot threshold values is reached, the output relay responds according to the set principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time has elapsed. This delay time U Del can be set from 0.1 to 0 s like the ON-delay time on Del. The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 150 V. The device can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. One output changeover contact is available as signaling contact. With the closed-circuit principle selected Overvoltage Undervoltage Range monitoring 6 6/45

448 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Voltage monitoring UG46 1/UG46 monitoring relays Undervoltage The UG46 1/UG46 voltage monitoring relay is supplied with an auxiliary voltage of 4 V C/DC or 4 to 40 V C/DC and performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of buttons. The measuring range extends from 0.1 to 60 V or 10 to 600 V C/ DC. The threshold values for overshoot or undershoot can be values is reached, the output relay responds according to the set principle of operation as soon as the delay time has elapsed. This delay time U Del can be set from 0.1 to 0 s. The hysteresis can be set from 0.1 to 0 V or 0.1 to 00 V. The device can be operated on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle and with manual or auto RESET. One output changeover contact is available as signaling contact. Range monitoring With the closed-circuit principle selected Overvoltage General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III acc. to EN V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Measuring circuit UG46 1 UG46 UG46 Permissible measuring range single-phase C/DC voltage V Setting range single-phase voltage V Measuring frequency Control circuit Load capacity of the output relay I th 5 Rated operational current I e at Minimum contact load at 17 V DC m 5 Circuit diagrams UG , UG UG46 1-.W0, UG46 -.W0 UG46 Note: It is not necessary to protect the measuring circuit for device protection. The protective device for line protection depends on the crosssection used. 6 6/46

449 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Voltage monitoring Selection and ordering data Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LC display uto or manual RESET Open or closed-circuit principle 1 CO contact UG UG46 -L0 Measuring range Hysteresis Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals V V V Order No. Internal power supply without auxiliary voltage, ON-delay and tripping delay can be adjusted separately s C/DC C/DC 1) UG46-1L0 Supplied from an external auxiliary voltage, tripping delay adjustable s C/DC C/DC C/DC C/DC 1) bsolute limit values. For accessories, see page 6/ C/DC UG UG C/DC UG46 1-1W0 UG46-1W0 6 6/47

450 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Current monitoring Overview Versions with wide voltage supply range Variably adjustable to overvoltage, undervoltage or range monitoring Width.5 mm Display of CTUL value and status messages ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals pplication SIRIUS UG46 monitoring relay The relays monitor single-phase C currents (rms value) and DC currents against the set threshold value for overshoot and undershoot. They differ with regard to their measuring ranges and supply voltage types. UG46 1/UG46 monitoring relays The UG46 1 or UG46 current monitoring relay is supplied with an auxiliary voltage of 4 V C/DC or 4 to 40 V C/DC and performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of buttons. The measuring range extends from to 500 m or 0.05 to 10. The rms value of the current is measured. The threshold values range. If one of these threshold values is reached, the output relay responds according to the set principle of operation as soon as the tripping delay time I Del has elapsed. This time and the ONdelay time on Del are adjustable from 0.1 to 0 s. The hysteresis is adjustable from 0.1 to 50 m or 0.01 to 5. The device can be operated with manual or auto RESET and on the basis of either the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle. Following options are available: Response of the output relay when the supply voltage U s measurement range limit of the measuring current (I > m/50 m) is reached. One output changeover contact is available as signaling contact. With the closed-circuit principle selected upon application of the supply voltage Current overshoot Overcurrent and undercurrent monitoring Monitoring the functionality of electrical loads Open-circuit monitoring Threshold switch for analog signals from 4 to 0 m Current undershoot Range monitoring 6/48

451 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Current monitoring General data Rated insulation voltage U i V 690 Pollution degree ; overvoltage category III acc. to EN Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp kv 6 Measuring circuit UG UG46 1-.W UG46 -. UG46 -.W 4 Max. 00 1) Measuring range for single-phase C/DC current Setting range for single-phase current Load supply voltage V 4 Max. 00 1) Max. 500 ) Max. 500 ) Control circuit Load capacity of the output relay I th 5 Rated operational current I e at Minimum contact load at 17 V DC m 5 1) With protective separation. ) With simple separation Circuit diagrams UG , UG Operation with separate control circuit and load circuit Operation with joint control circuit and load circuit Wiring diagram for 4 V C/DC (only UG46.-.0) From the following circuit diagrams it is clear that loads in the monitoring relay. Otherwise, the monitoring relay could be destroyed and the short-circuit current could cause damage to the plant. UG46 1-.W0, UG46 -.W0 Single-phase operation Three-phase operation and M are electrically connected internally. For applications in which the load to be monitored and the monitoring relay are supplied from the same power supply, there is no need for connection. relay may be destroyed. 6 6/49

452 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Current monitoring Selection and ordering data Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LC display uto or manual RESET Open or closed-circuit principle 1 CO contact UG UG46 -W0 Measuring range Hysteresis Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Monitoring of undercurrent and overcurrent, ON-delay and tripping delay can be adjusted separately s C/DC 500 m C/DC C/DC 500 m C/DC m m V Order No. 4 C/DC 1) UG UG C/DC ) UG46 1-1W0 UG46-1W0 1) No electrical separation. Load supply voltage 4 V. ) Electrical separation between control circuit and measuring circuit. Load supply voltage for protective separation max. 00 V, for simple isolation max. 500 V. For accessories, see page 6/65. With C currents I > 10 it is possible to use 4NC current transformers as an accessory. 6/50

453 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Power factor and active current monitoring Overview Can be used worldwide thanks to wide voltage range from 90 to 690 V (absolute limit values) Monitoring of even small single-phase motors with a no-load supply current below 0.5 Simple determination of threshold values through the direct collection of measured variables on motor loading Range monitoring and active current measurement enable detection of cable breaks between control cabinets and motors, as well as phase failures Power factor or active current can be selected as measurement principle Width.5 mm ll versions with removable terminals SIRIUS UG46 41 monitoring relay The UG46 41 power factor and active current monitoring device enables the load monitoring of motors. Whereas power factor monitoring is used above all for monitoring no-load operation, the active current monitoring option can be used to observe and evaluate the load factor over UG46 41 monitoring relays The UG46 41 monitoring relay is self-powered and serves the single-phase monitoring of the p.f or performs overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring of the active current depending terminals IN and Ly/N. The setting range for the power factor is 0.1 to 0.99 and for the active current I res 0. to 10. If the supply show I < 0. and a symbol for overrange, underrange or range monitoring. If the motor is now switched on and the current exceeds 0., the set ON delay time begins. During this time, if the set limit values are fallen below or exceeded, this does not lead to a relay reaction of the changeover contact. If the falls below or exceeds the respective set threshold value, the spike delay begins. When this time has expired, the relay changes its switch position. The relevant measured variables for overshooting active current overshooting is deactivated (I res load current drops below the lower measurement range threshold (0. ), then the CO contacts remain unchanged. If a threshold value is set for the monitoring of active current undershooting, then undershooting of the measurement range threshold (0. ) will result in a response of the CO contacts. The relay operates either according to the open-circuit or closedcircuit principle. the set principle of operation, the switching relay returns to its is reached. switching relay remains in its current switching state and the current measured value and the symbol for undershooting and reaches a permissible value again. This stored fault status can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN key simultaneously for seconds, or by switching the supply voltage off and back on again. pplication No-load monitoring and load shedding, such as in the event of a V-belt tear Underload monitoring in the low performance range, e.g. in the event of pump no-load operation Simple power factor monitoring in networks for control of Broken cable between control cabinet and motor With the closed-circuit principle selected Response in the event of undershooting the measurement range limit With activated monitoring of I res With deactivated monitoring of active current overshooting 6 6/51

454 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Power factor and active current monitoring Overshooting of active current Overshooting of power factor Undershooting of active current Undershooting of power factor Range monitoring of active current Range monitoring of power factor Legend cos : p.f. (power factor) 6/5

455 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Power factor and active current monitoring Type UG46 41 General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III acc. to EN V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage kv 6 Control circuit Number of CO contacts for auxiliary contacts Load capacity of the output relay I th 5 Rated operational current I e at Minimum contact load at 17 V DC m 5 Circuit diagrams Single-phase motors Three-phase motors Three-phase motors with transformers for currents > Selection and ordering data For monitoring the power factor and the active current I res (p.f. x I) Suitable for single- and three-phase currents Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LC display Overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately Permanent display of actual value and tripping state 1 changeover contact each for undershoot/overshoot Measuring range Hysteresis ON-delay OFF-delay Rated control supply voltage U 1) s Screw terminals For power factor For active For power factor For active current I res current I res P.f. P.f. s s V Order No UG CS0 1) bsolute limit values. For accessories, see page 6/65. With C currents I res > 10 it is possible to use 4NC current transformers as an accessory. 6 6/5

456 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Residual current monitoring: Residual-current monitoring relays Overview Can be used worldwide thanks to wide voltage range from 90 to 690 V (absolute limit values) Variably adjustable threshold values for warning and disconnection Permanent indication of the actual value and fault diagnosis on the display transformer outside the control cabinet Width.5 mm ll versions with removable terminals pplication SIRIUS UG46 4 monitoring relay The UG46 4 residual-current monitoring relay is used together with the UL summation current transformer for plant monitoring. Monitoring of plants in which residual currents can occur, e.g. due to dust deposits or moisture, porous cables and leads or capacitive residual currents UG46 4 monitoring relays The main conductor and any neutral conductor to which a load is connected, are routed through the opening of the annular stripwound core of a summation current transformer. secondary winding is placed around this annular strip-wound core to which the monitoring relay is connected. in the secondary winding of the summation current transformer. However, if an insulation fault occurs downstream of the residual currents is greater than that of the outward currents. The differential current - the residual current - induces a secondary current in the secondary winding of the transformer. This current is evaluated in the monitoring relay and is used on the one hand to display the actual residual current and on the other, to switch the relay if the set warning or tripping threshold is overshot. If the measured residual current exceeds the set warning value, the associated changeover contact instantly changes the switching state and an indication appears on the display. If the measured residual current exceeds the set tripping value, the set expiry of this time, the associated changeover contact changes the switching state. With the closed-circuit principle selected switches for the tripping value once the value falls below the associated relay changes its switching state if the value falls overshoots are therefore not stored. ON-delay time for motor start To be able to start an motor, once the auxiliary voltage has been applied for an adjustable ON-delay time, and depending on whether the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle is selected, the output relay switches to the GO state. The changeover contacts do not react if the set threshold value is overshot during this period. 6/54

457 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation If Manual RESET is selected in the menu, the output relay remains in its current switching state and the current measured value and measured residual current returns to a permissible value. This stored fault status can be reset by pressing the UPs and DOWNt key simultaneously for > seconds, or by switching the supply voltage off and back on again. Note: The neutral conductor must not be grounded downstream of the summation current transformer as this may impair the function of the residual current monitoring device. Residual current monitoring: Residual-current monitoring relays Type UG46 4 General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree Overvoltage category III acc. to EN V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage kv 6 Control circuit Number of CO contacts for auxiliary contacts Load capacity of the output relay Conventional thermal current I th 5 Rated operational current I e at Minimum contact load at 17 V DC m 5 Circuit diagram UG46 4 Note: It is not necessary to protect the measuring circuit for device protection. The protective device for line protection depends on the cross-section used. Selection and ordering data For monitoring residual currents I Dn 0. to 40 For UL summation current transformers with feed-through opening 40 to 10 mm Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LC display Separately adjustable limit value and warning threshold Permanent display of actual value and tripping state 1 CO contact each for limit violation and warning threshold Display range Setting range Hysteresis ON / tripping delay time Rated control supply voltage U s ) Screw terminals Limit value Warning value Order No. s V % of I n % of I n LSB 1) up to 50 % of I n 5 % of I n UG46 4-1CS0 I n. ) bsolute limit values. For accessories, see page 6/65. For UL summation current transformers see page 6/ /55

458 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Residual current monitoring: Summation current transformers Overview Dimensional drawings SIRIUS UL summation current transformers The UL summation current transformers detect fault currents in machines and plants. Together with the UG46 4 residual-current monitoring relay or the SIMOCODE UF motor management and control device they enable residual-current and ground-fault monitoring. Selection and ordering data Feed-through openingdiameter Rated insulation voltage Rated fault current I n For Protodur cable, U i can be fed through Screw terminals mm V max. mm Order No. Summation current transformers (essential accessory for UG46 4 or SIMOCODE UF) x 95 UL 01-1 UL 01- UL 01-4 x 40 UL 0-1 UL 0- UL 0- UL 0-1B UL 0-B UL 0-B UL 0-4B UL 0-5B 8 x 00 UL 0-1 UL 0- UL 0- UL 0-1B UL 0-B UL 0-B UL 0-4B UL 0-5B 6/56

459 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Insulation monitoring for ungrounded C networks Overview pplication The UG0 81 monitoring device is suitable for insulation monitoring of C systems with one or three phases in ungrounded networks (IT networks). Control supply voltage The UG0 81-1K0 has alternative voltage terminals. Only one control supply voltage is permitted to be connected to it! Terminals 1 and are used to connect 0 V C and terminals 1 and B are used to connect 115 V C. The UG0 81-1W0 has a wide-range input of 4 V to 40 V C/DC on terminals 1 and. SIRIUS UG0 81 insulation monitor Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between the ungrounded single or three-phase C supply and a protective conductor Measuring principle with superimposed DC voltage Two selectable measuring ranges of 1 to 110 kw Stepless setting within the measuring range Selectable: - - Storage of the tripping operation Test function with test button and terminal connections on the front Switching output: 1 CO contact Insulation fault indication with a red LED Control supply voltage indication with a green LED Electromagnetically compatible according to EN and EN The monitoring relay measures the insulation resistance between the ungrounded C supply and an associated protective conductor. superposed DC measuring voltage is used to perform the measurement. The monitoring relay is divided into two ranges for an insulation resistance range from 1 to 100 kw. range switch on the front can be used to switch over between a 1 to 11 kw range and a 10 to 110 kw range. Within the selected range, the monitoring relay can be steplessly adapted to the respective insulation conditions. If the insulation resistance undershoots the set response value, the output relay is excited and the red LED (fault indication) is lit. If the insulation resistance exceeds 1.6 times (corresponding to 60 % hysteresis) the set response value, the output relay will return to the rest position. Test functions The Test button on the front can be used to simulate a ground fault. If the Test button is pressed for at least 00 ms, the test button, which is connected to PE, can also be connected to terminal Y1. The function is activated by closing (> 00 ms). Note: The monitoring relay is designed for C voltage systems. measuring relay. Fault storage and RESET If terminals Y1 and Y are jumpered, the monitoring relay is set to fault storage mode. If the set insulation resistance is undershot, the output relay is excited and remains tripped even after the insulation resistance rises above 1.6 times the set value terminals or by switching off and on the supply voltage. 6 6/57

460 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Insulation monitoring for ungrounded C networks Type UG0 81 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 100 x 100 General data Rated insulation voltage U i between supply, measurement, and output circuit Measuring circuit L/PE V 50 acc. to IEC Response value k Min. internal resistance for C k 100 Min. internal resistance for DC k 100 Measurement DC voltage V 0 Max. C insulation voltage (L/PE) V 415 Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m) Y1-Y Delay time in case of response s 1 Output relay 1 CO contact, open-circuit principle Connection diagram for networks up to 415 V C Selection and ordering data Measuring range U e Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals k V Order No. Insulation monitors for ungrounded C networks / 0 C UG0 81-1K C/DC UG0 81-1W0 UG0 81-1K0 For accessories, see page 6/65. 6/58

461 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Insulation monitoring for ungrounded DC networks Overview pplication The UG0 8 monitoring relay has been designed for insulation monitoring in ungrounded, purely DC networks with or without networks as well as to monitor battery-powered systems. Control supply voltage Due to the electrical isolation of the supply voltage and the measuring circuit, the relay can be used for DC networks in which the auxiliary voltage is either supplied externally or where the network to be monitored also serves as the power supply. Note: If the monitoring relay is supplied with an external voltage, then the terminals 1 and L+ as well as and L- must not be connected with each other! SIRIUS UG0 8 insulation monitor Relay for monitoring the insulation resistance between ungrounded pure DC networks and a protective conductor Measuring principle for residual current measurement Response value can be adjusted steplessly from 10 to 110 kw Selectable - uto RESET function with hysteresis or - Storage of the tripping operation Front selector switch for open-circuit and closed-circuit principle for the output relay Test function with test buttons on the front for L+ and L-and over terminal connections Switching output: 1 CO contact Insulation fault indicator for L+ and L- through two red LEDs Control supply voltage indication with a green LED Electromagnetically compatible according to EN and EN The monitoring relay measures the insulation resistance between the positive and negative supply voltage in an ungrounded DC voltage network and a corresponding protective conductor. The measurement is based on the DC residual current measurement principle. The response value can be adjusted steplessly in the range from 10 to 110 kw and thus can be adapted to the corresponding conditions. If the insulation resistance falls below the set response value, the output relay triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed-circuit principle selector switch) and a fault LED lights up. ground fault is evaluated separately for L+ and L- and indicated by means of a corresponding LED. Note: Due to the measurement principle, a symmetrical ground fault on terminals L+ and L- cannot be evaluated. Test function ground fault can be simulated using the Test L+ and Test L- buttons on the front. If the test button is pressed for at least 1 s, the status of the output relay changes and the corresponding fault LED lights up. n external test button can be connected to terminals Y1-Y for L+ and terminals Y4-Y for L-. The function is triggered by means of a NO contact. 6 6/59

462 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Insulation monitoring for ungrounded DC networks Fault storage and RESET If terminals Y and Y are linked, the monitoring relay is set to fault storage mode. If the insulation resistance falls below the set value, the output relay triggers (depending on the setting of the open/closed circuit selector switch), and stays in this state even if the insulation resistance rises again above the hysteresis value (typical: times the set value). This fault storage can be deleted by pressing and releasing the L+ RESET button, opening the Y-Y connection or by switching off the supply voltage. Connection diagram for 4 to 40 V DC Open/closed-circuit principle selector switch The principle of operation of the output relay can be adjusted by means of a selector switch on the front panel. If the relay is to respond in the event of a fault (contact symbol open), the open-circuit principle must be selected. If the relay however is to trigger in the event of a fault (contact symbol closed), the closed-circuit principle must be selected. Note: The position of the selector switch has no effect upon the fault LEDs. The LEDs always light up if the insulation resistance on L+ or L- falls below the set value. Type UG0 8 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm 45 x 100 x 100 General data Rated insulation voltage U i between supply, measurement, and output circuit V 50 Measuring circuit Response value k Min. internal resistance for DC k 57 Measurement DC voltage V Max. DC insulation voltage (L+/PE/ground, L-/PE/ground) V 00 Reset/test function terminals (max. 10 m) Y1/Y, Y4/Y Delay time in case of response s 1 Output relay 1 changeover contact, open-circuit or closed-circuit principle Selection and ordering data Measuring range U e Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals k V Order No. Insulation monitors for ungrounded DC networks C/DC UG0 8-1W0 UG0 8-1W0 For accessories, see page 6/65. 6/60

463 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Level monitoring: Level monitoring relays Overview SIRIUS UG45 01 monitoring relay The UG45 01 level monitoring relay is used together with - or Can be used worldwide thanks to wide voltage range from 4 to 40 V (absolute limit values) - and -pole wire electrodes can be individually shortened for simple mounting from above or below analog setting of the sensitivity from to 00 kw Compensation of wave movements through a tripping delay time of 0.1 to 10 seconds Selectable inlet or outlet function ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals pplication Single-point and two-point level monitoring Dry run protection Leak monitoring UG45 01 monitoring relays The principle of operation of the UG45 01 level monitoring between two immersion sensors and a reference terminal. If the measured value is lower than the sensitivity set at the front, the output relay changes its switching state. In order to exclude with alternating current. Two-point control level reaches the maximum sensor, while the minimum sensor is submerged. The relay returns to its original switching state as soon as the minimum sensor no longer has contact with the OVER, two-point control UNDER, two-point control Note: It is also possible to connect other resistance sensors to the Min and Max terminals in the range to 00 kw, e.g. photoresistors, temperature sensors, encoders based on resistance, etc. The monitoring relay can therefore also be used for other applications apart from monitoring the levels of liquids. 6 6/61

464 6 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Level monitoring: Level monitoring relays Single-point control If only one level is being controlled, the terminals for Min and Max on the monitoring relay are bridged. The output relay and returns to its original switching state once the sensor no In order to prevent premature tripping of the switching function caused by wave motion or frothing, even though the set level has not been reached, it is possible to delay this function by s. For safe resetting, the supply voltage must be interrupted for at least the set delay time of +0.5 s. OVER, single-point control UNDER, single-point control Type UG45 01 General data Rated insulation voltage U i Pollution degree, Overvoltage category III acc. to EN V 00 Rated impulse withstand voltage kv 4 Measuring circuit Electrode current, max. m 1 Electrode voltage, max. V 15 Sensor feeder cable m Max. 100 Conductor capacity of sensor cable 1) nf Max. 10 Control circuit Load capacity of the output relay Conventional thermal current I th 5 Rated operational current I e at Minimum contact load at 17 V DC m ) The sensor cable does not necessarily have to be shielded, but we do not recommend installing this cable parallel to the power supply lines. It is also possible to use a shielded cable, whereby the shield has to be connected to the M terminal. 6/6

465 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Level monitoring: Level monitoring relays Circuit diagrams Schematic circuit diagram Circuit example of two-point control with outlet monitoring Circuit example of single-point control with inlet monitoring Selection and ordering data Control principle: inlet or outlet control per rotary switch Single-point and two-point control possible nalogically adjustable tripping delay time 1 yellow LED for indicating the relay state 1 green LED for indicating the applied control supply voltage 1 CO contact Sensitivity Tripping delay time Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals k s VC/DC Order No ) UG UG W0 1) The rated control supply voltage and the measuring circuit are not electrically separated. For accessories, see page 6/65. For level monitoring sensors see page 6/ /6

466 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation Level monitoring: Level monitoring sensors Type UG 07- three-pole UG 07- two-pole UG 07-B two-pole UG 07-1B single-pole UG 07-1C single-pole Length mm Insulation Yes Yes Yes Yes Installation Vertical Vertical Lateral Lateral Lateral Screw-in gland width /F Thread inch R /8 Connecting cable mm x 0.5, m long Operating temperature C 90 Operating pressure bar 10 Cable/electrode assignment Center electrode Not assignable Gland Gland Gland Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Electrode Electrode Not assignable Not assignable Dimensional drawings UG 07- UG 07- UG 07-1C UG 07-B UG 07-1B Selection and ordering data Version Level monitoring sensors (essential accessory) Three-pole wire electrodes, 500 mm long value and a common reference electrode. Order No. UG 07- UG 07- Two-pole wire electrodes, 500 mm long when the conductive tank is used as the reference electrode. UG 07- UG 07- Two-pole bow electrodes and pipes, as a leak monitor and level monitor or for warning of water entering an enclosure. UG 07-B UG 07-B UG 07-1B UG 07-1B UG 07-1C 6 UG 07-1C 6/64

467 Monitoring Relays SIRIUS UG Monitoring Relays for Stand-lone Installation ccessories Selection and ordering data Blank labels Use Version Order No. RT SB0 Push-in lugs and covers RP19 0 RP19 0 For UG4 For UG4 For UG4 For UG4 For UG45 Covers for insulation monitoring relays For UG0 81, UG0 8 Unit labeling plates For SIRIUS devices 1) Inscription labels for sticking For SIRIUS devices Push-in lugs Sealable covers Sealing foil RT SB0 RT SB60 RT SD60 RP19 0 RP19 0 TK Sealable, transparent covers UG ) PC labeling system for individual inscription of unit labeling plates available from: murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH 6 6/65

468 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays General data Overview The RS10, RS0 temperature monitoring relays can be used temperature is detected by the sensor in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for staying within an operating range (window function). The range comprises adjustable analog units with one or two threshold values, digital units for 1 sensor, which are also a good alternative to temperature controllers for the low-end range, and monitoring large motors. SIRIUS RS temperature monitoring relay Order No. scheme Digit of the Order No. 1st - rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 1th Temperature monitoring relays R S Device type Version and type of sensor Connection methods Number and type of outputs Control supply voltage Measuring range Special version Example R S C D 0 0 Note: The Order No. scheme is presented here merely for information purposes and for better understanding of the logic behind the order numbers. For your orders, please use the order numbers quote in the catalog in the Selection and ordering data. 6 Connection of resistance-type thermometers Two-wire measurement When two-wire temperature sensors are used, the resistances of the sensor and wiring are added. The resulting systematic error must be taken into account when the signal evaluation unit is calibrated. jumper must be clamped between terminals T and T for this purpose. Wiring errors The errors that are generated by the wiring comprise approximately.5 Kelvin/. If the resistance of the cable is not known and cannot be measured, the wiring errors can also be estimated using the following table. Temperature drift dependent on the length and cross-section of the cable with PT100 sensors and an ambient temperature of 0 C, in K Cable length Cross-section mm² in m Temperature drift in K: Example: On a PT100 sensor with a cable length of 10 m and a conductor cross-section of 1 mm 0.9 K. 6/66

469 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays General data Three-wire measurement circuit is often used. Using the additional cable, two measuring circuits can be formed of which one is used as a reference. The signal evaluation unit can then automatically calculate the line resistance and take it into account. Temperature overshoot Closed-circuit principle More information is available on the Internet at: Temperature undershoot Closed-circuit principle Principle of operation the output relay K1 changes its switching state as soon as the set time t The delay time can only be adjusted with digital units (on analog units t The relays return to their original state as soon as the temperature reaches the set hysteresis value. Range monitoring (digital units only) the output relay K1 changes its switching state as soon as the set time t has elapsed. The relay returns to its original state as soon as the temperature reaches the set hysteresis value. K responds in the same manner to the lower threshold value of Closed-circuit principle 6 6/67

470 6 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays General data Principle of operation with memory function (RS10 4) based on the example of temperature overshoot Closed-circuit principle the output relay K1 changes its switching state as soon as the set relays only return to the original state when the temperature falls below the set hysteresis value and when terminals Y and Y4 Characteristic curves For resistance sensors Measuring range in C for resistance sensors Sensor type Shortcircuit Open circuit RS10 40/ RS10 41 Measuring range in C RS10 4 Measuring range in C PT100 PT1 000 KTY8-110 KTY84 NTC 1) Detection possible Detection not possible The short-circuit and open-circuit detection as well as the measuring range is limited, depending on the sensor type. 1) NTC type: B577-K-1 (100 C: 1.8 k ; 5 C:.76 k ). Type RS10 analog RS10, RS0 digital Dimensions (W x H x D) mm mm.5 x 10 x 91.5 x 10 x x 106 x x 108 x 91 Permissible ambient temperature C Connection type Screw terminals mm mm WG Nm 1 x ( )/ x ( ) 1 x ( )/ x ( ) x ( ) /68

471 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Relays, analogically adjustable, for 1 sensor Overview ll devices except for 4 V C/DC feature electrical separation Extremely easy operation using a rotary potentiometer Variable hysteresis djustable working principle for devices with threshold values. ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals, many versions alternatively with spring-type connections pplication SIRIUS analog monitoring relay for 1 sensor The RS10 analog temperature monitoring relays can be used temperature is detected by the sensors in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot. When the threshold values are reached, the output relay switches on or The analogically adjustable SIRIUS RS10 temperature monitoring relays can be used in almost any application in which temperature overshoot or undershoot is not permitted, e.g. in the monitoring of set temperature limits and the output of alarm messages for: Motor and system protection Control cabinet temperature monitoring Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging industry or electroplating and ventilation systems, solar collectors, heat pumps or warm water supplies Motor, bearing and gear oil monitoring Monitoring of coolants Type RS10 00, RS10 10 uxiliary circuit RS10 0, RS10 0 Rated operational currents I e - 4 V - 40 V Releases Measuring accuracy at 0 C ambient temperature (T0) Typically < ±5 % from upper limit of scale Reference point accuracy Deviations due to ambient temperature In % of the measuring range < < Hysteresis settings Sensor circuit Typical sensor circuits Open-circuit detection Short-circuit detection m m % from upper limit of scale 5 % from upper limit of scale Typically 1 Typically 0. No Three-wire conductor connection 1) Yes Yes Enclosures Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V 00 No Typically 1 Typically 0. 1) Two-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T and T. 6 6/69

472 6 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Relays, analogically adjustable, for 1 sensor Circuit examples RS10 00, RS10 10 Legend Important! When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used, T and T must be jumpered. RS10 0, RS10 0 6/70

473 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Relays, analogically adjustable, for 1 sensor Selection and ordering data For temperature monitoring with resistance sensors or thermoelements Temperature range -55 C to C, depending on the sensor type Wide-range voltage versions are electrically separated. nalogically adjustable, setting accuracy ±5 % Versions with separately adjustable threshold values and adjustable open/closed-circuit principle Hysteresis for threshold value 1 is adjustable ( to 0 %), hysteresis for threshold is non-adjustable (5 %) 1 NC + 1 NO for versions with one threshold value 1 CO for threshold value1 and 1 NO for threshold value Sensor Function Measuring range Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals nalogically adjustable, 1 threshold value, width,5 mm; closed-circuit principle; without memory; 1 NO + 1 NC C V Order No. RS CD10 PT100 (resistance sensor) Overshoot C/DC 110/0 C C/DC 110/0 C C/DC 110/0 C Undershoot C/DC 110/0 C C/DC 110/0 C C/DC 110/0 C RS CD00 RS CK00 RS CD10 RS CK10 RS CD0 RS CK0 RS CD00 RS CK00 RS CD10 RS CK10 RS CD0 RS CK0 RS10 00-CD10 nalogically adjustable for warning and disconnection ( threshold values),.5 mm width, open/closed-circuit principle switchable; without memory; 1 NO + 1 CO RS10 0-1DD00 PT100 (resistance sensor) Overshoot C/DC 4 40 C/DC C/DC 4 40 C/DC C/DC 4 40 C/DC Undershoot C/DC 4 40 C/DC C/DC 4 40 C/DC C/DC 4 40 C/DC RS10 0-1DD00 RS10 0-1DW00 RS10 0-1DD10 RS10 0-1DW10 RS10 0-1DD0 RS10 0-1DW0 RS10 0-1DD00 RS10 0-1DW00 RS10 0-1DD10 RS10 0-1DW10 RS10 0-1DD0 RS10 0-1DW0 For accessories, see page 6/ /71

474 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Relays, digitally adjustable, for 1 sensor Overview Very simple operation without complicated menu selections ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals pplication SIRIUS digital monitoring relay for 1 sensor The RS10, RS0 temperature monitoring relays can be used temperature is detected by the sensor in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for staying within an operating range (window function). The RS10 unit indicate the measured temperature in degrees Celsius, the RS0 unit in degrees Fahrenheit. The units are also an excellent alternative to temperature controllers in the low-end performance range (two-or three-point closed-loop control). The temperature monitoring relays can be used in almost any application in which temperature overshoot or undershoot is not permitted, e.g. in the monitoring of set temperature limits and the output of alarm messages for: Plant and environment protection Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging industry or electroplating Temperature limits for district heating plants Exhaust temperature monitoring and ventilation systems, solar collectors, heat pumps or warm water supplies Motor, bearing and gear oil monitoring Monitoring of coolants Type RS10 40, RS10 4, RS0 40 uxiliary circuit Rated operational currents I e - 4 V - 40 V Releases Measuring accuracy at 0 C ambient temperature (T0) < ± K, ± 1 digit Reference point accuracy Deviations due to ambient temperature % 0.05 C per K deviation from T0 In % of measuring range Measuring cycle ms 500 Hysteresis settings for temperature K, for both values djustable delay time s Sensor circuit Typical sensor circuits m m Typically 1 Typically 0. Open-circuit detection Yes 1) Short-circuit detection Yes Three-wire conductor connection Yes ) Enclosures Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) 1) Not for NTC type B577-K-1 (100 C: 1.8 kw; 5 C:.76 k ). ) Two-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T and T. 1 0,1 V C /7

475 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Relays, digitally adjustable, for 1 sensor Selection and ordering data For temperature monitoring with resistance sensors or thermoelements Temperature range independent of sensor type - For RS10 - For RS0 Wide-range voltage versions are electrically separated. Non-volatile Short-circuit and open-circuit detection in sensor circuit Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LC display Overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring Exact sensor type can be set separately adjustable threshold values 1 hysteresis applies to both thresholds (0 to 99 K) 1 delay time applies to both thresholds (0 to 999 s) djustable open/closed-circuit principle djustable manual/remote RESET Permanent display of actual value in C or F and tripping state 1 CO contact each per threshold value 1 NO for sensor monitoring Sensor Measuring range (measuring range limit depends on the sensor) Rated control supply voltage U s Temperature monitoring relays, digitally adjustable, threshold values, width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO, memory function possible with external jumper, device parameters are non-volatile PT100/1 000; KTY8/84; NTC (resistance sensors) 1) C 4 C/DC 4 40 C/DC F 4 C/DC 4 40 C/DC V Screw terminals Order No. RS GD50 RS GW50 RS0 40-1GD50 RS0 40-1GW50 RS GD50 RS10 40-GW50 Temperature monitoring relays, digitally adjustable, threshold values, width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO, tripping state and device parameters are non-volatile PT100/1 000; KTY8/84; C 4 C/DC NTC (resistance sensors) 1) 4 40 C/DC RS10 4-1GD70 RS10 4-1GW70 1) NTC type: B577-K-1 (100 C: 1.8 k ; 5 C:.76 k ). For accessories, see page 6/76. Circuit examples RS10 40, RS10 4, RS0 40 Legend RS1 40 Important! When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used, T and T must be jumpered. 6 6/7

476 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Relays, digitally adjustable for up to sensors Overview Very simple operation without complicated menu selections Space-saving with 45 mm width ll devices are available alternatively with spring-type terminals ll versions with removable terminals ll versions with screw terminals or alternatively with innovative spring-type terminals pplication The RS10, RS0 temperature monitoring relays can be used in almost any application in which several temperatures have to be monitored simultaneously for overshoot or undershoot or within a range. SIRIUS digital monitoring relay for up to sensors The RS10, RS0 temperature monitoring relays can be used temperature is detected by the sensor in the medium, evaluated by the device and monitored for overshoot or undershoot or for staying within an operating range (window function). The RS10 units indicate the measured temperature in degrees Celsius, the RS0 units in degrees Fahrenheit. The evaluation unit can evaluate up to resistance sensors at the same time and is specially designed for monitoring motor windings and bearings. Monitoring of set temperature limits and output of alarm messages for: Plant and environment protection Temperature limits for process variables e.g. in the packaging industry or electroplating and ventilation systems, solar collectors, heat pumps or warm water supplies Motor, bearing and gear oil monitoring Monitoring of coolants Type uxiliary circuit RS10, RS0 Rated operational currents I e - 4 V - 40 V DIZED fuse 4 Releases Measuring accuracy at 0 C ambient temperature (T0) < ± K, ±1 digit Deviations due to ambient temperature In % of measuring range % 0.05 per K deviation from T0 Measuring cycle ms 500 Hysteresis settings for temperature K, for both values djustable delay time s Sensor circuit Typical sensor circuits m m Typically 1 Typically 0. Open-circuit detection Yes 1) Short-circuit detection Yes Three-wire conductor connection Yes ) Enclosures Rated insulation voltage U i (pollution degree ) V C ) Not for NTC type B577-K-1 (100 C: 1.8 k ; 5 C:.76 k ). ) Two-wire connection of resistance sensors with wire jumper between T and T. 6/74

477 SIRIUS RS10, RS0 Temperature Monitoring Relays Circuit example Relays, digitally adjustable for up to sensors RS10 41, RS0 41 Legend Important! When resistance sensors with two-wire connection are used, T and T must be jumpered. Selection and ordering data For two- and three-wire resistance sensors or thermoelements Temperature range independent of sensor type - For RS10: -50 to +500 C - For RS0: -58 to +9 F Wide-range voltage versions are electrically separated. Non-volatile Short-circuit and open-circuit detection in sensor circuit Digitally adjustable, with illuminated LC display Overshoot, undershoot or range monitoring Exact sensor type and number of sensors can be set separately adjustable threshold values 1 hysteresis; applies to both thresholds (0 to 99 K) 1 delay time; applies to both thresholds (0 to 999 s) djustable open/closed-circuit principle With connectable and disconnectable error memory Permanent display of actual value in C or F and tripping state 1 CO contact each per threshold value 1 NO for sensor monitoring Sensor Number of sensors Measuring range (measuring range limit depends on the sensor) Rated control supply voltage U s Screw terminals Motor monitoring relays, digitally adjustable for sensors, width 45 mm; 1 CO + 1 CO + 1 NO PT100/1 000; KTY8/84; NTC (resistance sensors) 1) V Order No sensors C C/DC RS GW F C/DC RS0 41-1GW50 RS GW50 1) NTC type: B577-K-1 (100 C: 1.8 k ; 5 C:.76 k ). For accessories, see page 6/ /75